2026
ACCORD
Hybrid
Owner’s Manual
California Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a
passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can
expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust,
carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do
not idle the engine except as necessary, service your
vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or
wash your hands frequently when servicing your
vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
Quebec Regulatory Notice
Availability of spare parts, repair service and information for maintenance or
repair:
Pursuant to applicable Quebec regulation, Honda does not guarantee the availability
of replacement parts, repair services, or information required for the maintenance or
repair of this product or its components.
For more information visit:
www.honda.ca/en/quebecregulatorynotice (English)
www.honda.ca/fr/avisreglementaireduquebec (French)
Authorized Manuals
Web Owner’s Manual
To view or download your vehicle’s Web
Owner’s Manual, please visit
https://mygarage.honda.com
General Information
General Information
1
Service Express
For electronic copies of service publications, you can purchase a subscription to
Service Express. Visit https://techinfo.honda.com for pricing and options.
For U.S. Owners
Some manuals can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can order a manual
by phone at 1 (800) 782-4356, or online at www.helminc.com.
For Canadian Owners
Please contact a dealer to order any manuals that you may require.
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. Operating this vehicle safely is
an important responsibility.
To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have provided operating
procedures and other information on labels and in this manual. This information
alerts you to potential hazards that could hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the hazards associated
with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You must use your own good judgment.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms, including:
Safety Labels - on the vehicle.
Safety Messages - preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of three signal words:
DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION. These signal words mean:
3 DANGER
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
3 WARNING
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
3 CAUTION
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
Safety Headings - such as Important Safety Precautions.
Safety Section - such as Safe Driving.
Instructions - how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information - please read it carefully.
General Information
2
About Other Displays
This mark denotes advice for preventing vehicle damage or malfunction, or that you
should be careful when using something.
Indicates that a feature is customizable.
About This Manual
This manual should be considered a permanent part of the vehicle and should remain
with the vehicle when it is sold.
This manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find descriptions of
equipment and features that are not on your particular model.
The images throughout this manual (including the front cover) that depict features,
equipment, Audio/Information screen details, and Meter screens are only examples
and may not be representative of your particular model.
This manual is for vehicles sold in the United States and Canada.
The information and specifications included in this publication were in effect at the
time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications or design at any time without notice and without
incurring any obligation.
General Information
3
System Updates Terms & Conditions
General
Your vehicle has an application that allows your System Updates to automatically
search for Honda software updates that are specific to your System Updates and its
connected devices (when you set the power mode to ON, via Wi‑Fi or every four (4)
weeks via Telematics Control Unit (TCU)
*
, queries may occur more or less frequently
due to internet outages, retries, direct user action, WAP push from the server, or a
change in query policy on the Honda servers). This application periodically transmits
to our servers a limited amount of vehicle and device information (Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), the Model Type (MT) Identification Number, Hardware
and Software Part Number, Serial Number, Software Version, preferred language,
Internet Protocol (IP) address, Transaction Log (alert or update viewing, update
download and installation, software status), etc.). When the application finds an
update from the server, the application initially asks permission to download and
install the update. Where available, in your settings menu you may elect to
automatically download and install these updates or you may elect to manually
update the system.
When your System Updates searches our servers for updates or alerts, we will
automatically provide you with the opportunity to update your devices or transmit the
update or alert directly to your System Updates. We will also maintain on our servers
a log of the updates or alerts that are installed.
Your Personal Data
Should the aforementioned information transmitted to Honda constitute personal
information in your region, please note that this information will be treated in strict
accordance with the rules and regulations outlined in this notice as well as applicable
data protection law.
The terms of our privacy notice are incorporated into these terms by reference and
your use of system updates will be subject to the privacy notice. Our privacy notice
sets out information about how we and any named third-parties will process any
personal data we collect from you or that you provide to us via the application. For
further details, see Honda’s connected product privacy notice at:
U.S.: https://www.honda.com/privacy/connected-product-privacy-notice
Canada: https://www.honda.ca/privacy/vehicledata (English)
https://www.honda.ca/fr/confidentialite/politiquedeconfidentialité (French)
Honda collects, uses, and stores your personal data for the reasons set out below:
to deliver system updates and related services
to allow us to improve and optimize system updates products and services
to respond to user questions and complaints
for internal record keeping
where necessary for Honda’s legitimate interests, as listed below, and where our interests are
not overridden by your data protection rights
*: Not available on all models
General Information
4
as otherwise described in Honda’s Privacy Notice and Vehicle Data Privacy Notice
Protecting our legitimate business interests and legal rights includes, but is not
limited to, use in connection with compliance, regulatory, auditing, legal claims
(including disclosure of such information in connection with legal process or
litigation), and other ethics and compliance reporting requirements.
Honda will also convert personal data into anonymous data and use it (normally on an
aggregated statistical basis) for uses such as market research and analysis, to
improve the system updates, to analyze trends, and to assess the success of software
update releases. Aggregated personal information does not personally identify you or
any other use of system updates.
Honda may share this data with Honda’s worldwide support organization or affiliated
Honda companies or other third-parties engaged by Honda for the purposes of
rendering support services in connection with system support.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record
data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such
data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-
trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR
data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else
except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.
General Information
5
Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about
powertrain performance. The data can be used to verify emissions law requirements
and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be
combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains
confidential. Some diagnostic and maintenance information is uploaded to Honda
upon vehicle start up.
California Perchlorate Contamination
Prevention Act
The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this vehicle may contain
perchlorate materials - special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/
hazardouswaste/perchlorate
Software End User License Agreement
Your vehicle comes equipped with software, which is governed by the End User
License Agreement in this Owner’s Manual, and which contains a binding arbitration
clause. Please refer to the End User License Agreement for the terms and conditions
governing your use of the installed software, as well as the applications, services,
functions, and content provided through the software. Your use of the installed
software will serve as your consent to the terms and conditions of the End User
License Agreement.
You may opt out within 30 days of your initial use of the Software by sending a signed,
written notice to HONDA at American Honda Motor Co., Inc., Honda Automobile
Customer Service, Mail Stop CHI-5, 1919 Torrance Blvd., Torrance, CA 90501-2746.
Privacy Notice
This vehicle may share location and usage information. To manage this setting, visit:
U.S.: https://www.honda.com/privacy/connected-product-privacy-notice
Canada: https://www.honda.ca/privacy/vehicledata (English)
https://www.honda.ca/fr/confidentialite/politiquedeconfidentialité (French)
To learn more about how we collect and use Personal Information including
precise geolocation data, please read our Privacy Notice and Vehicle Data
Privacy Notice, accessible at:
General Information
6
1 Before Driving 15
About the Hybrid Systemu 16 | Check Before Drivingu 21 | Child Safetyu 29 | Airbagsu 40 |
Safety Labelsu 53 | Keyu54 | Locking/Unlockingu 59 | Steering Wheelu 68 | Seats u 69 |
Seat Beltsu 78 | Mirrorsu 85 | Windowsu 87 | Trunku 90 | Maximum Load Limitu 92 |
Towing a Traileru95
2 Driving Operation 96
Turn Power System On or Offu 97 | Shifting u 102 | Braking u 104 | Starting and Driving u 111 |
Parking Your Vehicle u 113 | Rear View Camerau 114 | Refuelingu 116 |
Turn Signals/Light Switchesu 120 | Wipers and Washersu 126 | Defrosteru 130 | Driving Featuresu 132
3 Controls 142
Interior Lightsu 143 | Interior Convenience Itemsu145 | Seat Heaters/Ventilators
*
u 152 |
Heated Steering Wheel
*
u 154 | Moonroofu 155 | Climate Control Systemu157 |
In-Vehicle Infotainmentu 161 | 12.3" Color Touchscreen Basic Operationsu169 |
12.3" Color Touchscreen Other Operationsu190 | 12.3" Color Touchscreen Customized Features u 202 |
General Information on the Audio Systemu212
4 Safety Driving Assist System 230
Honda Sensing® u 231 | Collision Mitigation Braking System™ (CMBS™)u 238 |
Low Speed Braking Control
*
u 244 | Road Departure Mitigation Systemu248 |
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Followu 252 | Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)u 263 |
Traffic Jam Assistu 267 | Traffic Sign Recognition System u 271 | Blind Spot Information Systemu 275 |
Cross Traffic Monitoru 278 | Parking Sensor System
*
u 281
5 About Your Instrument Panel 284
Indicatorsu 285 | Gaugesu 293 | Driver Information Interfaceu 297 | Head-Up Display
*
u 307
6 Maintenance 311
Before Performing Maintenanceu 312 | Maintenance Minder™ u 315 | Maintenance Under the Hood u 320 |
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Bladesu 331 | Checking and Maintaining Tires u 333 |
12-Volt Batteryu 343 | Climate Control System Maintenanceu 345 | Cleaning u 346
7 Handling the Unexpected 349
Toolsu 350 | When a Lightbulb Goes Outu 351 | Remote Transmitter Careu 352 |
If a Tire Goes Flatu 354 | Handling of the jacku 363 | Power System Won’t Startu 364 |
If the 12-volt Battery Is Deadu367 | Shift Lever Does Not Moveu 369 | Overheatingu 370 |
When a Warning Appearsu 372 | Fusesu374 | Emergency Towingu380 |
If You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Dooru381 | If You Cannot Open the Trunku382 | Refuelingu383 |
Emergency Call (eCall)u 384
8 Vehicle Information 386
Specificationsu 387 | Identification Numbers u 389 | Devices that Emit Radio Wavesu390 |
Reporting Safety Defectsu391 | Emissions Testingu 393 | Warranty Coveragesu 394 |
Customer Service Informationu 396 | Open Source Licenseu398
*: Not available on all models
Contents
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Index
a
Maintenance Under the Hood
u
320
b
Windshield Wipers
u
126
u
331
c
Power Door Mirrors
u
85
Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator
Lights
*
u
120
u
351
d
Door Lock/Unlock Control
u
59
e
Tires
u
333
u
354
f
Headlights
u
120
u
351
Front Turn Signal Lights
u
120
u
351
Parking/Daytime Running Lights
u
120
u
123
u
351
Front Side Marker Lights
u
120
u
351
g
High-Mount Brake Light
u
351
h
Opening/Closing the Trunk
u
90
Emergency Trunk Opener
u
91
i
Rear License Plate Light
u
351
Trunk Release Button
u
90
j
Rear View Camera
u
114
k
Taillights
u
120
u
351
Back-Up Lights
u
351
l
Brake Lights
u
351
Rear Side Marker/Taillights
u
120
u
351
Rear Turn Signal Lights
u
120
u
351
m
How to Refuel
u
117
*: Not available on all models
Visual Index
10
a
Interior Light
u
143
Map Lights
u
143
b
Moonroof Switch
u
155
SOS Button
u
385
Sunglasses Holder
u
149
c
Sun Visors
Vanity Mirrors
d
Seat Belts
u
78
e
Side Curtain Airbags
u
48
f
Rear Seat Heater Buttons
*
u
153
g
Grab Handles
Coat Hook
u
149
h
Interior Light
u
143
i
Front Seat
u
71
j
Accessory Power Socket
u
145
k
USB Ports
u
164
l
Front Side Airbags
u
47
m
Rear Seat
u
73
n
Seat Belt (Installing a Child Seat)
u
35
Seat Belt to Secure a Child Seat
u
36
o
LATCH to Secure a Child Seat
u
32
p
Rear Side Airbags
u
47
*: Not available on all models
Visual Index
11
a
Master Door Lock Switch
u
64
Power Window Switches
u
87
b
Driving Position Memory System
*
u
76
c
Door Mirror Controls
u
85
d
Driver’s Front Airbag
u
42
e
/ Passenger Airbag Off
Indicator
u
50
f
Rearview Mirror
u
85
g
Passenger’s Front Airbag
u
42
h
Glove Box
u
145
i
Knee Airbags
u
45
j
Trunk Main Switch
u
91
k
Wireless Charger
u
146
l
USB Ports
u
164
m
DRIVE MODE Switch
u
132
e-Button
u
132
Electric Parking Brake Switch
u
104
Automatic Brake Hold Button
u
107
n
Shift Lever
u
102
o
Interior Fuse Box
u
376
p
Hood Release Handle
u
321
q
Trunk Opener
u
90
*: Not available on all models
Visual Index
12
a
Head-Up Display
*
u
307
b
System Indicators
u
285
Gauges
u
293
Driver Information Interface
u
297
c
POWER Button
u
97
d
Audio System
u
162
e
Hazard Warning Button
f
Front Seat Heater/
Ventilator
*
Buttons
u
152
g
Climate Control System
u
157
(ON/OFF) Button
u
158
Front Defogger Button
u
130
Rear Defogger/ Heated Door
Mirror
*
Button
u
130
h
Steering Wheel Adjustments
u
68
*: Not available on all models
Visual Index
13
a
Headlights
u
120
Turn Signals
u
120
b
Wipers/ Washers
u
126
c
－ Deceleration Paddle Selector
u
134
d
Horn (Press an area around )
e
+ Deceleration Paddle Selector
u
134
f
Lane Keeping Assist System
(LKAS) Button
u
263
g
Right Selector Wheel
u
297
h
Interval Button
u
256
i
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
with Low Speed Follow Buttons
u
253
j
Heated Steering Wheel Button
*
u
154
k
Left Selector Wheel
u
165
l
(Talk) Button
u
177
u
185
u
195
u
195
u
197
Audio Remote Controls
u
165
*: Not available on all models
Visual Index
14
About the Hybrid System
SPORT HYBRID i-MMD (intelligent Multi-Mode
Drive)･･････････････････････････････････････････ 16
Driving Mode････････････････････････････････････ 17
High Voltage System and Battery･･･････････････ 18
Check Before Driving
For Safe Driving･････････････････････････････････ 21
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features･･････････････････ 22
Driving Preparation･･････････････････････････････23
Precautions While Driving･･･････････････････････ 25
Exhaust Gas Hazard
･････････････････････････････
26
Modifications and Accessories
･･････････････････
26
Child Safety
Protecting Child Passengers
････････････････････
29
Safety of Infants and Small Children
････････････
30
Installing a Child Seat
･･･････････････････････････
32
Safety of Larger Children
････････････････････････
37
Airbags
About Your Airbags
･･････････････････････････････
40
Airbag System Components･････････････････････40
Front Airbags (SRS)･････････････････････････････ 42
Knee Airbags････････････････････････････････････ 45
Side Airbags･････････････････････････････････････47
Side Curtain Airbags････････････････････････････ 48
Airbag System Indicators･･･････････････････････ 49
Airbag Care･････････････････････････････････････ 51
Safety Labels
Label Locations･････････････････････････････････ 53
Key
Details on the Key･･･････････････････････････････54
Built-in Key･･････････････････････････････････････58
Key Number Tag･････････････････････････････････58
Locking/Unlocking
Using the Remote Transmitter･･････････････････ 59
Using the Keyless Access System･･･････････････ 59
Locking the Doors and Trunk (Walk Away Auto
Lock®)･･････････････････････････････････････････61
Lock Presetting･･････････････････････････････････62
Unlocking the Doors Using a Key････････････････ 63
Locking a Door Without Using a Key･････････････63
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside･･･ 64
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking･･･････････････････ 65
Childproof Door Locks･･･････････････････････････66
What to Do If････････････････････････････････････ 66
Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel･･･････････････････ 68
Seats
Adjusting the Seat･･･････････････････････････････69
Adjusting the Front Seat Positions･･････････････ 71
Adjusting the Rear Seat Positions･･･････････････ 73
Driving Position Memory System
*
･･･････････････ 75
Rear Seat Reminder
･････････････････････････････
77
Seat Belts
About Your Seat Belts
･･･････････････････････････
78
Fastening a Seat Belt
････････････････････････････
81
Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor
･･････････････････
83
Seat Belt Inspection････････････････････････････ 83
Mirrors
Interior Rearview Mirror･････････････････････････85
Power Door Mirrors･････････････････････････････ 85
Windows
Opening/Closing the Power Windows･･･････････ 87
Opening the Windows with the Remote･････････ 89
Trunk
Precautions for Opening/Closing the Trunk･････ 90
Maximum Load Limit
About Maximum Load Limit･････････････････････ 92
Towing a Trailer
About Towing a Trailer･･････････････････････････ 95
Towing Behind a Motorhome････････････････････95
*: Not available on all models
Before Driving
15
1
Before Driving >
About the Hybrid System
SPORT HYBRID i-MMD (intelligent Multi-Mode
Drive)
Your SPORT HYBRID i-MMD vehicle uses both an electric motor and a gasoline engine
as propulsion sources, with the electric motor receiving electricity from an internal
High Voltage battery and/or internal generator. The High Voltage battery is charged
from the generator driven by the engine or regenerative braking. When driving, your
vehicle is propelled exclusively by the electric motor, exclusively by the gasoline
engine, or by a combination of the two.
Also, you can press the e button to manually enable EV (driven only on electricity)
mode.
AUTO/EV/CHARGE Mode
u
P.132
Components
a Gasoline Engine:
Runs the generator, and under certain conditions,
drives the wheels directly.
b Generator:
Starts the engine and generates electric power
when driven by the gasoline engine to supply
electricity to power the electric motor and/or to
charge the High Voltage battery.
c Electric Motor:
Provides direct power to the wheels (together
with the engine in some cases). Also, the electric
motor provides electricity to the High Voltage
battery through regenerative braking.
d High Voltage Battery:
The High Voltage battery stores electricity and
supplies electricity to the motor.
High voltage parts and high voltage wires in this vehicle are sheathed in
electromagnetic shielding material; therefore, the amount of electromagnetic waves
emitted is no greater than those emitted by household appliances or the electrical
parts in conventional vehicles.
16
Battery types
There are two types of batteries used in this vehicle: a standard 12-volt battery that
powers the airbags, the interior and exterior lights, and other standard 12-volt
systems: and the High Voltage battery that is used to power the propulsion motor
and recharge the 12-volt battery.
Sounds Unique to the SPORT HYBRID i-MMD System
You may hear the following sounds when turning on the power system, or driving.
When starting and stopping the engine:
The sound of the powertrain operating can be heard coming from the front of the
vehicle.
At acceleration:
Motor and engine operating sounds can be heard coming from inside the engine
compartment.
At deceleration:
To regenerate energy, the sounds of motor regeneration can be heard coming from
inside the engine compartment. Also, when depressing the brake pedal while driving
at low speeds, or when changing the braking system to regenerative braking, you may
hear a sound coming from the brakes.
Climate control system in operation:
The sound of the compressor and/or heating system operating can be heard coming
from inside the engine compartment.
Energy Efficiency
As with a gasoline-powered vehicle, hybrid vehicle fuel efficiency and driving range is
most impacted by your driving style. Aggressive acceleration and high-speed driving
can easily trigger the system to switch the propulsion source to the gasoline-powered
engine.
In addition, heavy climate control system use negatively affects vehicle range and
efficiency. Either of these use patterns will more quickly reduce the High Voltage
battery’s state of charge.
Driving Mode
When driving, your vehicle is propelled exclusively by the electric motor, exclusively
by the gasoline engine, or by a combination of the two. The system selects which
propulsion source is most appropriate and automatically switches to it. Under
appropriate conditions, pressing the e button will switch the vehicle to EV mode.
1
Before Driving > About the Hybrid System
17
1
Before Driving
≫
Depending on the climate control system, High Voltage battery, and driving conditions, the
engine will start and stop automatically.
AUTO/EV/CHARGE Mode
u
P.132
Electric Vehicle (EV) driving mode
When parked or while driving at low speeds, the EV indicator comes on and the
vehicle is powered only by the motor.
Hybrid (HV) driving mode
When driving under high load conditions (such as when accelerating or going
uphill), the engine operates and runs the generator. The generator then provides
that electricity to the motor to help run the motor when driving. It also charges the
High Voltage battery.
Engine (Direct Drive) driving mode
When driving at high speeds under light load conditions, the vehicle is powered
mainly by the engine. Also depending on the situation, electricity from the High
Voltage battery helps the motor run, or the motor acts as a generator that charges
the High Voltage battery.
Regeneration driving mode
When the accelerator pedal is not being operated while decelerating or descending
a hill, the motor acts as a generator and operates regenerative braking, and the
electricity gained through regenerative braking is provided to the High Voltage
battery.
Deceleration Paddle Selector
u
P.134
≫
The regenerative braking feature works similarly to engine braking. The rate of deceleration
can be changed by using the deceleration paddle selector.
High Voltage System and Battery
Characteristics of High Voltage Battery
The High Voltage battery gradually discharges even if the vehicle is not in use. As a
result, if your vehicle is parked for an extended period of time, the battery charge level
will become low. Extended periods of time at a low state of charge will shorten
battery life. To maintain the battery state of charge, drive your vehicle for more than
30 minutes at least once every three months.
Extreme high temperatures can affect the battery life. You can minimize the effects by
parking the vehicle in the shade during the summer.
1
Before Driving > About the Hybrid System
18
!
Be careful not to let the High Voltage battery drain too much.
If the battery level becomes close to zero, it will make it impossible to start the
engine.
Safety Precautions
Attempting to take a High Voltage system component apart or disconnect one of its
wires can cause severe electrical shock. Make sure that any maintenance or repairs to
the High Voltage system are performed by a Honda dealer.
Do not cover the air intake (a).
If the air intake is obstructed during vehicle
operation, the High Voltage battery can become
too hot. To protect the battery, the system may
start to limit the battery’s output and cause the
POWER SYSTEM indicator and 12-volt battery
charging system indicator to come on.
3 WARNING
If a severe crash damages your vehicle’s High Voltage system, there is a
possibility of electrical shock due to exposed High Voltage components or
orange wires. If this happens, do not touch any of the High Voltage system
components or any of its orange wires.
The High Voltage battery contains a flammable electrolyte that could leak
as a result of a severe crash. Avoid skin or eye contact with the electrolyte
as it is corrosive. If you accidentally come into contact with the electrolyte,
rinse the exposed skin and flush any exposed eyes with copious amounts of
water for a few minutes, and seek medical attention immediately.
!
Use a fire extinguisher for an electrical fire.
Attempting to extinguish an electrical fire with even a small quantity of water,
from a garden hose for instance, can be dangerous.
!
Any time the vehicle is damaged in a crash, have it repaired by a
dealer.
1
Before Driving > About the Hybrid System
19
1
Before Driving
Emergency Shutdown System for the High Voltage System
If the vehicle is involved in a crash, the emergency shutdown system will activate
depending on the severity of the impact. When the system activates, the High
Voltage system automatically shuts down, and the vehicle can no longer move
under its own power. To return the High Voltage system back to normal operation,
consult a dealer.
When the vehicle is disposed
Honda collects and recycles High Voltage batteries used in its vehicles – consult a
dealer for more information.
1
Before Driving > About the Hybrid System
20
1
Before Driving >
Check Before Driving
For Safe Driving
The following pages explain your vehicle’s safety features and how to use them
properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the
most important.
Important Safety Precautions
Some states, provinces, and territories prohibit the use of cell phones other than
hands-free devices by the driver while driving.
Always wear your seat belt
A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped
with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly.
Restrain all children
Children ages 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the
front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger
children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use
the belt properly without a booster seat.
Be aware of airbag hazards
While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants
who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children,
and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.
Don’t drink and drive
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to
changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink.
So don’t drink and drive, and don’t let your friends drink and drive, either.
Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely
Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying
close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash.
Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe
to divert some attention away from driving.
21
1
Before Driving
Control your speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher
the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds.
Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum
speed posted.
Keep your vehicle in safe condition
Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous. To
reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition
frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle
Children, pets, and people needing assistance left unattended in the vehicle may be
injured if they activate one or more of the vehicle controls. They may also cause the
vehicle to move, resulting in a crash in which they and/or another person(s) can be
injured or killed. Also, depending on the ambient temperature, the temperature of
the interior may reach extreme levels, which can result in harm or death. Even if the
climate control system is on, never leave them in the vehicle unattended as the
climate control system can shut off at any time.
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
a Safety Cage
b Crush Zones
c Seats and Seat-Backs
d Head Restraints
e Collapsible Steering Column
f Seat Belts
1
Before Driving > Check Before Driving
22
g Front Airbags
h Knee Airbags
i Side Airbags
j Side Curtain Airbags
k Door Locks
l Seat Belt Tensioners (Front Seats)
m Seat Belt Tensioners (Rear Seats)
n Outer Lap Pretensioners
The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and your
passengers.
Your vehicle is equipped with many features that work together to help protect you
and your passengers during a crash.
Some features do not require any action on your part. These include a strong steel
framework that forms a safety cage around the passenger compartment, front and
rear crush zones, a collapsible steering column, and tensioners that tighten the front
and outer rear seat belts in a sufficient crash.
However, you and your passengers cannot take full advantage of these features
unless you remain seated in the correct position and always wear your seat belts. In
fact, some safety features can contribute to injuries if they are not used properly.
Driving Preparation
Exterior Checks
Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle.
≫
There are blind spots from the inside.
Make sure the tires are in good condition.
≫
Check air pressures, and check for damage and excessive wear.
Checking Tires
u
P.333
Make sure the hood is securely closed.
≫
If the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked.
Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior lights, or other
parts of the vehicle.
≫
Remove any frost, snow, or ice.
≫
Remove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of vision while
driving or fall off and impact other road users. If frozen solid, remove ice once it has
softened.
≫
When removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel or wheel
components.
Make sure the door is not frozen.
≫
When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around the door edges to melt any ice. Do not
try to force them open, as this can damage the rubber trim around the doors. When done,
wipe dry to avoid further freezing.
1
Before Driving > Check Before Driving
23
1
Before Driving
Make sure that there are no flammable materials left under the hood.
≫
Be especially careful if the vehicle has not been used for a long time, or after maintenance.
The heat from the engine and exhaust may cause flammable materials to catch fire, leading
to unexpected accidents.
Interior Checks
After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure all doors are closed and locked. Locking the
doors helps prevent an occupant from being ejected and an outsider from unexpectedly
opening a door.
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
u
P.64
If the door and/or trunk open message appears on
the driver information interface, a door and/or the
trunk is not completely closed. Close all doors and
the trunk tightly until the message disappears.
Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are adjusted as far to
the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the vehicle. Sitting too close to a front
airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a crash.
Adjusting the Front Seat Positions
u
P.71
Adjusting the Seat
u
P.69
Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective when the
center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller persons should adjust
their head restraint to the highest position.
Adjusting the Front Seat Positions
u
P.71
Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any passengers
are properly belted as well.
Fastening a Seat Belt
u
P.81
Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a child’s age, height, and
weight.
Protecting Child Passengers
u
P.29
Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the floor mat.
≫
An object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator pedal
operation while driving.
Store or secure all items on board properly.
≫
Carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle’s handling,
stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe.
Do not pile items higher than the seatback height.
≫
They can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of sudden braking.
1
Before Driving > Check Before Driving
24
Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly.
≫
Adjust them while sitting in the proper driving position.
Interior Rearview Mirror
u
P.85
Power Door Mirrors
u
P.85
Adjusting the Steering Wheel
u
P.68
Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the seats.
≫
They can interfere with the driver’s ability to operate the pedals, the operation of the seats,
or the operation of the sensors under the seats.
If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle.
≫
They may interfere with driving and a crash could occur.
Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the vehicle, and
go off soon after.
≫
Always have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated.
Indicator List
u
P.285
About Headlight Adjustment
Headlight aim
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not need to be adjusted. However,
if you regularly carry heavy items in the trunk, have the aim readjusted at a dealer
or by a qualified technician.
Precautions While Driving
In Rain
Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the motor or
driveline, or cause electrical component failure.
Other Precautions
If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location.
Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks.
If you repeatedly turn the steering wheel at an extremely low speed, or hold the
steering wheel in the full left or right position for a while, the electric power steering
(EPS) system heats up, causing the system to go into a protective mode and make
the steering wheel progressively harder to operate.
≫
Once the system cools down, the EPS system is restored.
≫
Repeated operation under these conditions can eventually damage the system.
1
Before Driving > Check Before Driving
25
1
Before Driving
Exhaust Gas Hazard
Carbon Monoxide Gas
The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless,
and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon monoxide
gas will not get into the interior.
Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever:
The exhaust system is making an unusual noise.
The exhaust system may have been damaged.
The vehicle is raised for an oil change.
When you operate a vehicle with the trunk open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into
the interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the trunk open,
open all the windows and set the climate control system as shown below.
[1 ] Select the fresh air mode.
[2 ] Select the mode.
[3 ] Set the fan speed to high.
[4 ] Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.
Adjust the climate control system in the same manner if you sit in your parked
vehicle with the engine running.
3 WARNING
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and even kill you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that expose you to carbon monoxide.
!
Do not run the engine with the garage door closed.
An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up with carbon monoxide
gas. Even when the garage door is open, drive out of the garage immediately
after starting the engine.
Modifications and Accessories
Modifications
Do not modify your vehicle in a manner that may affect its handling, stability, or reliability, or
install non-Genuine Honda parts or accessories that may have a similar effect.
Even minor modifications to vehicle systems can affect overall vehicle performance.
1
Before Driving > Check Before Driving
26
Always make sure all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and do not make any
modification to your vehicle or its systems that might cause your vehicle to no longer meet
federal, state, province, territory, and local regulations.
The on-board diagnostic port (OBD-II/SAE J1962 connector) installed on this vehicle is
intended to be used with automobile system diagnostic devices or with other devices that
Honda has approved. Use of any other type of device may adversely affect the vehicle’s
electronic systems or allow them to be compromised, possibly resulting in a system
malfunction, a drained 12-volt battery, or other unexpected problems.
Do not modify or attempt to repair your vehicle’s high voltage hybrid power system or
otherwise modify vehicle electrical systems. Disassembling or modifying electrical equipment
can result in a crash or a fire.
If you ever need to replace your vehicle’s High Voltage battery assembly outside of
warranty coverage, we highly recommend that you only use a genuine Honda High
Voltage battery assembly. Genuine Honda High Voltage battery assemblies are
designed to work with your vehicle’s hybrid power system and have been designed,
engineered, and manufactured to avoid overcharging situations. Non-genuine High
Voltage battery assemblies may not have been similarly designed, engineered, and
manufactured, and installation of such assemblies could result in overcharging, fires,
loss of power, or other conditions that may increase the likelihood of a crash or injury.
3 WARNING
Improper accessories or modifications can affect your vehicle’s handling,
stability, performance, and cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt
or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner’s manual regarding accessories and
modifications.
3 WARNING
Use of improperly designed, engineered or manufactured High Voltage
battery assemblies could cause a fire in your vehicle.
A vehicle fire could result in a crash or injury.
Only use a genuine Honda High Voltage battery assembly, or its equivalent,
in your vehicle.
!
Honda Genuine Accessories are recommended to ensure proper
operation of your vehicle.
Accessories
When installing accessories, check the following:
Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and delay your
reaction to driving conditions.
1
Before Driving > Check Before Driving
27
1
Before Driving
Do not install any items other than Honda Genuine Accessories designated for your vehicle
over areas containing airbags.
Items other than Honda Genuine Accessories designated for your vehicle installed in these
areas may interfere with proper operation of the vehicle’s airbags or may be propelled into
you or another occupant if the airbags deploy.
Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with proper
operation of your vehicle.
Checking Fuses
u
P.374
Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for assistance. If
possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation.
If any Honda Genuine Accessories become inoperable, refer to the separate
accessory owner’s manual (if applicable) or consult a dealer for assistance to
troubleshoot the potential faulty condition.
1
Before Driving > Check Before Driving
28
1
Before Driving >
Child Safety
Protecting Child Passengers
Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are
either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle crashes are the number
one cause of death of children ages 12 and under.
To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state and Canadian province
and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride
in a vehicle.
Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because:
An inflating front airbag can injure or kill a child sitting in the front seat.
A child in the front seat is more likely to interfere with the driver’s ability to safely control the
vehicle.
Statistics show that children of all sizes and ages are safer when they are properly restrained
in a rear seat.
Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the event of a
collision.
Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would likely press deep
into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries.
Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very seriously injured in
a crash.
Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an approved
child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either the seat belt or the lower
anchors of the LATCH system.
Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows, or seat adjustments.
Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when the inside of
the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate vehicle controls causing it
to move unexpectedly.
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada
recommend that all children ages 12 and under be properly restrained in a rear seat.
Some states or provinces/territories have laws restricting where children may ride.
To remind you of the passenger’s front airbag hazards and child safety, your vehicle
has warning labels on the dashboard (U.S. models) and on the front visors. Please
read and follow the instructions on these labels.
29
1
Before Driving
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle and allow the seat belt to wind
up all the way.
3 WARNING
Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or wrap one around their neck can
result in serious injury or death.
Instruct children not to play with any seat belt and make sure any unused
seat belt a child can reach is buckled, fully retracted, and locked.
3 WARNING
Children who are unrestrained or improperly restrained can be seriously
injured or killed in a crash.
Any child too small for a seat belt should be properly restrained in a child
seat. A larger child should be properly restrained with a seat belt, using a
booster seat if necessary.
Safety of Infants and Small Children
Protecting Infants
An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat until the infant
reaches the seat manufacturer’s weight or height limit for the seat.
Positioning a rear-facing child seat
Child seats must be placed and secured in a rear
seating position.
Experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat for a child so long as the child’s height
and weight are appropriate for a rear-facing seat.
Infants should never be seated in a forward-facing position.
Always refer to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions before installation.
Do not allow a front seat to rest against a child seat installed in a rear seating position.
The weight sensor in the front seat may not correctly detect the actual weight of the
occupant.
1
Before Driving > Child Safety
30
When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front
passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back in
the desired position. Make sure that there is no contact between the child seat and
the seat in front of it.
It can also interfere with proper operation of the passenger’s advanced front airbag
system.
About Your Airbags
u
P.40
If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front
passenger’s seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied.
Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.
3 WARNING
Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury
or death during a crash.
Always place a rear-facing child seat in the rear seat, not the front.
Protecting Smaller Children
If a child has exceeded the weight and height limitations of a rear-facing child seat,
the child should be properly restrained in a firmly secured forward-facing child seat
until they exceed the weight and height limitations for the forward-facing child seat.
Educate yourself about the laws and regulations regarding child seat use where you
are driving, and follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Forward-facing child seat placement
We strongly recommend placing a forward-facing
child seat in a rear seating position.
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with
advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passenger’s front airbag off. A rear
seat is the safest place for a child.
1
Before Driving > Child Safety
31
1
Before Driving
3 WARNING
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious
injury or death if the front airbag inflates.
If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, move the vehicle seat
as far back as possible, and properly restrain the child.
Selecting a Child Seat
Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children).
Some have a rigid-type connector while others have a flexible-type connector. Both
are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be
installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat
manufacturer’s use and care instructions including recommended expiration dates as
well as the instructions in this manual. Proper installation is key to maximizing your
child’s safety.
In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child
seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security. This is
because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured with a
lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat manufacturer
may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat once a child
reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owner’s manual for proper
installation instructions.
Important consideration when selecting a child seat
The child seat is the correct type and size for the child.
The child seat is the correct type for the seating position.
The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed to simplify the installation
process and reduce the likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation.
Installing a Child Seat
Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in either of the two outer rear seats. A
child seat is attached to the lower anchors with either the rigid or flexible type of
connectors.
1
Before Driving > Child Safety
32
a Marks
b Cover
[1 ] Locate the anchor marks affixed to the base
of the seat cushion.
[2 ] Pull out the anchor covers under the marks
to expose the lower anchors.
a Probes
[3 ] Place the child seat so that the probes are
on the cover.
a Rigid Type
b Lower Anchors
a Flexible Type
b Lower Anchors
[4 ] Attach the child seat to the lower anchors
according to the instructions that came with
the child seat.
≫
When installing the child seat, make sure that
the lower anchors are not obstructed by the
seat belt or any other object.
≫
Install the child seat so that the gap between it
and the seat-back is as small as possible.
1
Before Driving > Child Safety
33
1
Before Driving
4
Straight top tether type
a Anchor
b Tether Strap Hook
4
Other top tether type
a Anchor
b Tether Strap Hook
[5 ] Open the tether anchor cover behind the
head restraint.
4
Straight top tether type
[6 ] Route the tether strap over the top of the
head restraint.
Make sure the strap is not twisted.
4
Other top tether type
[6 ] Route the tether strap over the side of the
head restraint.
Make sure the strap is not twisted.
4
All types
[7 ] Secure the tether strap hook to the anchor.
[8 ] Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer.
[9 ] Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by
rocking it forward and back and side to side;
little movement should be felt.
[
10
] Make sure any unused seat belt that a child
can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor
is activated, and the belt is fully retracted
and locked.
3 WARNING
Using the outer rear seats’ inner anchors to secure a LATCH-compatible
child seat in the center seating position may result in failure of the child
seat, causing injury or death.
Only use the outer rear seats’ inner anchors to install a child seat in the
center seating position if the manufacturer’s instructions expressly permit.
Installing a LATCH-compatible child seat in the rear center seat
Each outer rear seat is equipped with a pair of lower anchors which are used to
secure a LATCH-compatible child seat. The rear center seat, however, is not equipped
with anchors of any kind.
The inner and outer anchors are spaced apart at a standard distance of 11 inches
(280 mm). The distance between the two inner anchors is 15.4 inches (390 mm).
1
Before Driving > Child Safety
34
LATCH-compatible restraint systems that are fitted with rigid-type attachments
cannot be installed in the rear center seat. However, a system fitted with flexible-type
attachments can be installed in the center seat, provided that the manufacturer’s
instructions for that system permit the use of the inner anchors with the stated
spacing.
Before seating a child, make sure that the system is properly attached to both the
lower anchors and tether anchors.
For your child’s safety, when using a child seat installed using the LATCH system,
make sure that the child seat is properly secured to the vehicle.
A child seat that is not properly secured will not adequately protect a child in a crash
and may cause injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.
3 WARNING
Never attach two child seats to the same anchor. In a collision, one anchor
may not be strong enough to hold two child seat attachments and may
break, causing serious injury or death.
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
A child seat can be installed with a lap/shoulder belt in any rear seat or, if absolutely
necessary, the front passenger seat.
[1 ] Place the child seat on the vehicle seat.
[2 ] Route the seat belt through the child seat
according to the seat manufacturer’s
instructions, and insert the latch plate into
the buckle.
≫
Insert the latch plate fully until it clicks.
[3 ] Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all
the way out until it stops. This activates the
lockable retractor.
[4 ] Let the seat belt retract a few inches and
check that the retractor has switched modes
by pulling on the webbing. It should not pull
out again until it is reset by removing the
latch plate from the buckle.
≫
If you are able to pull the shoulder belt out, the
lockable retractor is not activated. Slowly pull
the seat belt all the way out, and repeat steps 3
– 4.
1
Before Driving > Child Safety
35
1
Before Driving
[5 ] Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near
the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack
from the lap part of the belt.
≫
When doing this, place your weight on the child
seat and push it into the vehicle seat.
[6 ] Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by
rocking it forward and back and side to side;
less than one inch of movement should
occur near the seat belt.
[7 ] Make sure any unused seat belt that a child
can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor
is activated, and the belt is fully retracted
and locked.
A child seat that is not properly secured will not adequately protect a child in a crash
and may cause injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle and allow the seat belt to wind
up all the way.
Adding Security with a Tether
a Cover
b Anchor
c Tether Anchor Points
A tether anchor point is provided behind each
rear seating position.
If you have a child seat that comes with a tether
but can be installed with a seat belt, the tether
may be used for additional security.
[1 ] Locate the appropriate tether anchor point
and lift the cover.
Always use a tether for forward-facing child seats whether using the seat belt or
lower anchors.
1
Before Driving > Child Safety
36
4
Straight top tether type
a Anchor
b Tether Strap Hook
4
Other top tether type
a Anchor
b Tether Strap Hook
4
Straight top tether type
[2 ] Route the tether strap over the top of the
head restraint. Make sure the strap is not
twisted.
4
Other top tether type
[2 ] Route the tether strap over the side of the
head restraint. Make sure the strap is not
twisted.
4
All types
[3 ] Secure the tether strap hook to the anchor.
[4 ] Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer.
Safety of Larger Children
Protecting Larger Children
The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind
of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who
must sit in front.
Checking Seat Belt Fit
When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/
shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the
following questions.
1
Before Driving > Child Safety
37
1
Before Driving
Checklist
Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the edge
of the seat?
Does the shoulder belt cross between the child’s
neck and arm?
Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs?
Will the child be able to stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder
seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a
booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat.
Booster Seats
If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used
properly, position the child in a booster seat in the
rear seat. For the child’s safety, check that the
child meets the booster seat manufacturer’s
recommendations.
When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the instructions that came with it, and
install the seat accordingly. There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a booster
seat that allows the child to wear the seat belt correctly.
Some U.S. states and Canadian provinces and territories require children to use a
booster seat until they reach a given age or weight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Be sure to
check current laws in the state, province, or territory where you intend to drive.
Protecting Larger Children - Final Checks
Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever
have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front:
Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information in this
manual.
Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible.
Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat.
Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in the seat.
1
Before Driving > Child Safety
38
Monitoring child passengers
We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older,
more mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts
and sit up properly.
3 WARNING
Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in front can result in injury or death if
the passenger’s front airbag inflates.
If a larger child must ride in front, move the vehicle seat as far to the rear as
possible, have the child sit up properly and wear the seat belt properly, and
use a booster seat if needed.
1
Before Driving > Child Safety
39
1
Before Driving
1
Before Driving >
Airbags
About Your Airbags
Your vehicle is equipped with four types of airbags:
Front airbags: Airbags in front of the driver’s and front passenger’s seats.
Knee airbags: Airbags under the steering column and under the glove box.
Side airbags: Airbags in the driver’s and front passenger’s outer seat-backs and next to the
outer rear seating positions.
Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows.
Each is discussed in the following pages.
The airbags can inflate whenever the power mode is in ON.
After an airbag inflates in a crash, you may see a small amount of smoke. This is from
the combustion process of the inflator material and is not harmful. People with
respiratory problems may experience some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get
out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
Airbag System Components
The front, driver’s knee, front passenger’s knee, side, and side curtain airbags are
deployed according to the direction and severity of impact. Both side curtain airbags
are deployed in a rollover. The airbag system includes:
40
aTwo SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) front airbags. The driver’s airbag is
stored in the center of the steering wheel; the front passenger’s airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked SRS AIRBAG.
bTwo knee airbags. The driver’s knee airbag is stored under the steering column;
the front passenger’s knee airbag is stored under the glove box. Both are marked SRS
AIRBAG.
cFour side airbags. One for the driver, one for the front passenger, and two for the
rear outboard seating positions. The airbags are stored in the outer edges of the seat-
backs. All are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
dTwo side curtain airbags, one for each side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored in
the ceiling, above the side windows. The front and rear pillars are marked SIDE
CURTAIN AIRBAG.
eAn electronic control unit that, when the power mode is in ON, continually
monitors information about the various impact sensors, seat and buckle sensors,
rollover sensor, airbag activators, seat belt tensioners, and other vehicle information.
During a crash event, the unit can record such information.
fSeat belt tensioners for the front seats and outer rear seats.
gDriver’s seat position sensor. This sensor detects the driver’s seat slide position to
help determine the optimal deployment of the driver’s airbag.
hWeight sensors in the front passenger’s seat. The sensors are used for occupant
classification to activate or deactivate the front passenger’s airbag.
iImpact sensors that can detect a moderate-to-severe front or side impact.
jAn indicator on the roof console that alerts you that the front passenger’s front
airbag has been turned off.
kAn indicator on the instrument panel that alerts you to a possible problem with
your airbag system or seat belt tensioners.
lA rollover sensor that can detect if your vehicle is about to roll over and signal the
control unit to deploy both side curtain airbags.
mPressure sensors that can detect a moderate-to-severe side impact.
Important Facts About Your Airbags
Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with
tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause burns, bruises,
and other minor injuries, sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not wearing
their seat belts properly and sitting correctly.
What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly and sit upright and as far
back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle. A
front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as possible.
Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that can
occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags
deploy.
Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag. Carrying
hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp object in your
mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates.
1
Before Driving > Airbags
41
1
Before Driving
Do not attach or place objects on the front, driver’s knee, and front passenger’s
knee airbag covers. Objects on the covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with
the proper operation of the airbags or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt
someone if the airbags inflate.
Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together, airbags and seat belts provide
the best protection.
When driving, keep hands and arms out of the deployment path of the front airbag by
holding each side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over the airbag cover.
Front Airbags (SRS)
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant’s primary
restraint system.
The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help protect
the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger.
During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or both front airbags to deploy, the
airbags can inflate at different rates, depending on the severity of the crash, whether
or not the seat belts are latched, and/or other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to
supplement the seat belts to help reduce the likelihood of head and chest injuries in
frontal crashes.
Housing Locations
The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, and in
the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG.
Operation
Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions.
When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control
unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate.
A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a
vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall.
1
Before Driving > Airbags
42
How the Front Airbags Work
While your seat belt restrains your torso, the front
airbag provides supplemental protection for your
head and chest.
The front airbags deflate immediately so that they
won’t interfere with the driver’s visibility or the
ability to steer or operate other controls.
The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not aware
that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them.
Although the driver’s and front passenger’s airbags normally inflate within a split
second of each other, it is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can happen if
the severity of a collision is at the margin, or threshold, that determines whether or
not the airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will provide sufficient
protection, and the supplemental protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.
When front airbags should not deploy
Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and
help save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might
occur during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash.
Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration
causes a driver or front passenger to move toward the front of the vehicle.Side
airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help reduce the
severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which
can cause the driver or passenger to move toward the side of the vehicle.
Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear
impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not
designed to deploy in such collisions.
Rollovers: In a rollover, your best form of protection is a seat belt or, if your vehicle
is equipped with a rollover sensor, both a seat belt and a side curtain airbag. Front
airbags, however, are not designed to deploy in a rollover as they would provide
little, if any, protection.
When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the
vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy.
Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object
that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is
underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent.
1
Before Driving > Airbags
43
1
Before Driving
When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage
appears severe
Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of
visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some
collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the
airbags would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if
they had deployed.
Advanced Airbags
The airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag related
injuries to smaller occupants.
a Driver’s Seat Position Sensor
The driver’s advanced airbag system includes a seat position sensor.
Based on information from this sensor and the severity of the impact, the advanced
airbag system determines the optimal deployment of the driver’s airbag.
The front passenger’s advanced airbag system has weight sensors. The sensors are
used for occupant classification to activate or deactivate the front passenger’s airbag.
For adult size occupants, the system will automatically activate the front passenger’s
airbag. If a small adult sits in the front passenger seat and the system does not
recognize him/her as an adult, see below.
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
u
P.50
a Passenger’s Seat Weight Sensors
We advise against allowing a child age 12 or under to ride in the front passenger’s
seat. However, if you do allow a small child or infant to ride in the front passenger’s
seat, the system is designed to automatically deactivate the front passenger’s airbag.
Do not let a small child or infant ride in the front passenger’s seat if the airbag does
not automatically deactivate.
1
Before Driving > Airbags
44
If there is a problem with the driver’s seat position sensor or the passenger’s seat
weight sensors, the SRS indicator will come on, and in the event of a crash, the airbag
will deploy (regardless of the driver’s seating position or passenger’s occupant
classification) with a force corresponding to the severity of the impact.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator
u
P.50
For the advanced front airbags to work properly, confirm that:
The occupant is sitting in an upright position wearing the seat belt properly and the seat-back
is not excessively reclined.
The occupant is not leaning against the door or center console.
The occupant’s feet are placed on the floor in front of them.
There are no objects hanging from the front passenger’s seat.
Only small, lightweight objects are in the seat-back pocket.
The steering wheel and passenger’s side dashboard are not obstructed by any object.
No liquid has been spilled on or under the seat.
There is no child seat or other object pressing against the rear of the seat or seat-back.
There is no rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger’s seat.
There are no objects placed under or beside the front passenger’s seat. Improperly
positioned objects can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
The head restraint is not contacting the roof.
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
u
P.50
The floor mat behind the front passenger’s seat is set in the correct position evenly on the
floor. An improperly placed mat can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
Floor mats
u
P.347
Knee Airbags
The knee SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help keep
the driver and/or front passenger in the proper position and to help maximize the
benefit provided by the vehicle’s other safety features.
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant’s primary
restraint system.
Do not attach accessories on or near a knee airbag as they can interfere with the
proper operation of the airbag, or even hurt someone if the airbag inflates.
The driver and front passenger should not store any items under the seat or behind
their feet. The items can interfere with proper airbag deployment in the event of a
moderate to severe frontal collision and may result in inadequate protection.
Housing Locations
The knee airbag for the driver and the one for the front passenger are housed under
the steering column and the glove box respectively.
Both are marked SRS AIRBAG.
1
Before Driving > Airbags
45
1
Before Driving
Operation
a Knee Airbag
a Knee Airbag
The driver’s and front passenger’s knee airbags
deploy at the same time as the driver’s and front
passenger’s airbags respectively.
Even if the collision is not severe enough to deploy the front airbag, the knee airbag
may inflate alone.
When knee airbags deploy with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the
vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy.
Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed objects
that cause a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is
underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent.
When knee airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage
appears severe
Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of
visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some
collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the
airbags would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if
they had deployed.
1
Before Driving > Airbags
46
Side Airbags
The side airbags help protect the torso and pelvis of the driver, front passenger, or an
outer rear seat occupant during a moderate-to-severe side impact.
Housing Locations
The side airbags are housed in the outside edge of the driver’s and passenger’s seat-
backs and next to the outer rear seating positions.
Each is marked SIDE AIRBAG.
Operation
a Side Airbag
a Side Airbag
When the sensors detect a moderate-to-severe
side impact, the control unit signals the side
airbag on the impact side to immediately inflate.
When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side
of the vehicle’s framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there
may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough
impact to deploy the airbag.
1
Before Driving > Airbags
47
1
Before Driving
When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible damage
appears severe
It is possible for a side airbag not to deploy during an impact that results in
apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was toward the
far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicle’s crushable body parts absorbed
most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have been
needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed.
!
Do not cover or replace the front and rear seat-back covers without
consulting a dealer.
Improperly replacing or covering front and rear seat-back covers can prevent
your side airbags from properly deploying during a side impact.
!
Make sure you and your front seat and rear outboard passengers
always sit upright. Leaning into the path of a side airbag can prevent
the airbag from deploying properly and increases the risk of serious
injury.
!
Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags. They can
interfere with the proper operation of the airbags, or hurt someone if
an airbag inflates.
!
Side airbag deployment is controlled by a pressure sensor inside each
front door. Damage or changes to the inside or outside of the doors
may negatively affect side airbag deployment. Contact an authorized
dealer before changing or repairing a front door.
Side Curtain Airbags
The side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and passengers in the
outer seating positions during a moderate-to-severe side impact. The side curtain
airbags equipped in this vehicle are also designed to help reduce the likelihood of
partial and complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in crashes,
particularly rollover crashes.
If the SRS control unit senses that your vehicle is about to rollover, it immediately
deploys both side curtain airbags and activates the seat belt tensioners for the front
seats and outer rear seats.
1
Before Driving > Airbags
48
!
Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof pillars as they
can interfere with the proper operation of the side curtain airbags.
!
To get the best protection from the side curtain airbags, occupants
should wear their seat belts properly and sit upright and well back in
their seats.
Housing Locations
The side curtain airbags are located in the ceiling above the side windows on both
sides of the vehicle.
Operation
a Side Curtain Airbag
The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy in a
rollover or a moderate-to-severe side impact.
If the impact is on the passenger’s side, the passenger’s side curtain airbag deploys
even if there are no occupants on that side of the vehicle.
When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision
One or both side curtain airbags may also inflate in a moderate-to-severe angled
frontal collision.
Airbag System Indicators
If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on and a
message appears on the driver information interface.
1
Before Driving > Airbags
49
1
Before Driving
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator
When the power mode is set to ON
The indicator comes on for a few seconds, then
goes off. This tells you the system is working
properly.
If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, have the
system checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
If you don’t, your airbags and seat belt tensioners may not work properly when they
are needed.
3 WARNING
Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in serious injury or death if the airbag
systems or tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible if the SRS
indicator alerts you to a possible problem.
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
a U.S.
b Canada
When the passenger airbag off indicator
comes on
The indicator comes on to alert you that the
passenger’s airbag has been turned off.
This occurs if the seat is empty or when the
weight sensors determine that a small child or
infant is on the passenger seat.
Children age 12 or under should always ride properly restrained in a back seat.
Protecting Child Passengers
u
P.29
If the indicator is on, in the event of a crash the passenger’s airbag will not deploy.
The passenger’s knee airbag will not deploy, either.
When you set the power mode to ON, the indicator comes on and goes off a few
seconds later to indicate that system checks are being performed. After that, the
indicator comes on or off depending on the passenger’s occupant classification.
To ensure the passenger is detected properly, confirm that:
1
Before Driving > Airbags
50
The occupant is sitting in an upright position wearing the seat belt properly and the seat-back
is not excessively reclined.
The occupant is not leaning against the door or center console.
The occupant’s feet are placed on the floor in front of them.
There are no objects hanging from the front passenger’s seat.
Only small, lightweight objects are in the seat-back pocket.
No liquid has been spilled on or under the seat.
There is no child seat or other object pressing against the rear of the seat or seat-back.
There is no rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger’s seat.
There are no objects placed under or beside the front passenger’s seat. Improperly
positioned objects can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
The floor mat behind the front passenger’s seat is set in the correct position evenly on the
floor. An improperly placed mat can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
The head restraint is not contacting the roof.
The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and go off periodically if the total
weight on the seat is near the airbag cutoff threshold. For a small adult, depending on
physique and posture, the system may not recognize him/her as an adult and thus
deactivate the passenger’s airbag.
If this occurs, please confirm that the conditions set forth in the above bullet points
previously mentioned are met.
If the above conditions are met and the indicator is still on, then with the transmission
in P , set the power mode to OFF and back to ON.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible if:
All of the above conditions are met, and the indicator comes on with an adult seated in the
front passenger seat.
The seat is empty and the indicator is off.
The indicator does not come on and go off after setting the power mode to ON as described.
Do not allow an adult passenger to ride in the front seat when the indicator is on.
Airbag Care
You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any
airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle inspected
by a dealer in the following situations:
When the Airbags Have Deployed
If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be replaced.
Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it must be
replaced.
1
Before Driving > Airbags
51
1
Before Driving
!
We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag system
components, including the airbag, tensioners, sensors, and control
unit.
When the Vehicle Has Been in a Moderate-to-Severe
Collision
Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the driver’s
seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passenger’s seat, seat belt tensioners for
the front seats and outer rear seats, and each seat belt that was worn during the
crash.
Do Not Remove or Modify a Front Seat Without Consulting a
Dealer
This would likely disable or affect the proper operation of the driver’s seat position
sensor or the weight sensors in the passenger’s seat. If it is necessary to remove or
modify a front seat to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact a Honda
dealer. For U.S. vehicles, contact American Honda Automobile Customer Service at
1-800-999-1009. For Canadian vehicles, contact Honda Canada Customer Relations
at 1-888-9-HONDA-9.
1
Before Driving > Airbags
52
1
Before Driving >
Safety Labels
Label Locations
These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can
cause serious injury or death. Read these labels carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label,
which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer for a replacement.
a Sun Visor (U.S. models)
b Sun Visor (Canadian models)
c Dashboard (U.S. models only)
d Air Conditioner System (U.S. models)
e Air Conditioner System (Canadian models)
f High Voltage System Coolant Tank Cap
g Radiator Cap
53
1
Before Driving
1
Before Driving >
Key
Details on the Key
Use the keys to turn on and off the power system, and lock and unlock all the doors,
trunk, and fuel fill door.
You can remotely turn the power system on using the remote engine start.
Remote Engine Start
u
P.99
Low Keyless Remote Signal Strength
The vehicle transmits radio waves to locate the keyless remote to activate the power
system, lock and unlock all the doors and the fuel fill door, and open the trunk.
In the following cases, activating the power system, locking/unlocking the doors/fuel
fill door, or opening the trunk may be inhibited, or operation may be unstable:
Strong radio waves are being transmitted by nearby equipment.
You are carrying the keyless remote together with telecommunications equipment, laptop
computers, cell phones, or wireless devices.
A metallic object is touching or covering the keyless remote.
Battery life is about two years, but this varies depending on regularity of use.
Communication between the keyless remote and the vehicle consumes the keyless
remote’s battery.
!
Follow the advice below to prevent damage to the keys:
Do not leave the keys in direct sunlight, or in locations with high temperature
or high humidity.
Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them.
Keep the keys away from liquids, dust, and sand.
Do not take the keys apart except to replace the battery.
!
Do not leave the keyless remote in the vehicle when you get out. Carry
it with you.
!
The battery is consumed whenever the keyless remote is receiving
strong radio waves. Avoid placing it near electrical appliances such as
televisions and personal computers.
54
Keyless Remote Reminder
When the power mode is in ON
If you remove the keyless remote from the vehicle and shut the door, a warning
indicator will display in the instrument panel, and warning buzzers will sound from
both inside and outside the vehicle.
When the power mode is in ACCESSORY
If you remove the keyless remote from the vehicle and shut the door, a warning
buzzer will sound from outside the vehicle.
Do not put the keyless remote on the dashboard or in the glove box. It may cause the
warning buzzer to sound.
Under some other conditions that can prevent the vehicle from locating the remote, the
warning buzzer may also sound even if the remote is within the system’s operational range.
If the keyless remote is taken out of the vehicle after the power system has been turned on,
you can no longer change the POWER button mode or restart the power system. Always
make sure that the keyless remote is in your vehicle when you operate the POWER button.
Removing the keyless remote from the vehicle through a window does not activate the
warning buzzer.
Stopping the warning buzzer
When the keyless remote is within the system’s operational range and the driver’s
door is closed, the warning function cancels.
≫
If the alarm continues to sound, place the keyless remote in another location.
Immobilizer System
This system prevents a key that has not been pre-registered from starting the power
system.
Pay attention to the following:
Do not allow objects that emit strong radio waves near the POWER button.
Make sure the key is not covered by or touching a metal object.
Do not bring a key from another vehicle’s immobilizer system near the POWER button.
Do not put the key near magnetic items. Electronic devices, such as televisions and audio
systems, emit strong magnetic fields. Note that even a key chain can become magnetic.
1
Before Driving > Key
55
1
Before Driving
a Immobilizer System
Indicator
The immobilizer system indicator will blink in the
instrument panel if the immobilizer system
cannot recognize the key information when you
have pressed POWER button.
Do not alter the system or add other devices to it. Doing so may damage the system
and make your vehicle inoperable.
4
Canadian models
Apply and hold the brake pedal before turning the vehicle on the first time after the
12-volt battery has been disconnected.
4
All models
!
Leaving the key in the vehicle can result in theft or accidental
movement of the vehicle. Always take the key with you whenever you
leave the vehicle unattended.
Security System Alarm
The security system alarm activates when the trunk, hood, or doors are forcibly
opened. The alarm does not activate if the trunk or doors are opened with the remote
transmitter or keyless access system.
Unlock the vehicle using the remote transmitter or keyless access system, or turn the
power mode to ON. The system, along with the horn and flashing lights, is
deactivated.
The security system alarm continues for a maximum of two minutes until the security
system alarm deactivates.
Do not set the security system alarm when someone is in the vehicle or a window is
open. The system can accidentally activate when:
Unlocking the door with the lock tab.
Opening the trunk with the trunk opener or the emergency trunk opener.
Opening the hood with the hood release.
Taking the transmission out of
P
.
If the 12-volt battery goes dead after you have set the security system alarm, the
security alarm may sound once the 12-volt battery is recharged or replaced.
1
Before Driving > Key
56
If this occurs, deactivate the security system alarm by unlocking a door using the
remote transmitter or keyless access system.
Do not alter the system or add other devices to it. Doing so may damage the system
and make your vehicle inoperable.
If you unlock a door with the built-in key while the security system is activated, the
alarm will sound.
Setting the security system alarm
The security system alarm automatically sets when the following conditions have
been met:
The power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF.
The hood is closed.
All doors and the trunk are locked from outside with the remote transmitter or keyless
access system.
When the security system alarm sets
The security system alarm indicator in the instrument panel blinks and the blinking
interval changes after about 15 seconds.
To cancel the security system alarm
The security system alarm is canceled when the vehicle is unlocked using the
remote transmitter or keyless access system, or when the power mode is set to ON.
The security system alarm indicator goes off at the same time.
Panic mode
a
Panic Button
The panic button on the remote transmitter
If you press the panic button for approximately one second, the following will occur
for about 30 seconds:
The horn sounds.
Some exterior lights flash.
Canceling panic mode
Press any button on the remote transmitter.
1
Before Driving > Key
57
1
Before Driving
Set the power mode to ON.
Built-in Key
The built-in key can be used to unlock the doors when the keyless remote battery
becomes weak and the power door unlock operation is disabled.
Removing the Built-in Key
a Release Button
b Built-in Key
To remove the built-in key, push the release
button and then pull out the key. To reinstall the
built-in key, push the built-in key into the keyless
remote until it clicks.
Key Number Tag
Contains a number that you will need if you
purchase a replacement key.
If you lose your key and you cannot activate the power system, contact a dealer.
!
Keep the key number tag separate from the key in a safe place outside
of your vehicle.
1
Before Driving > Key
58
1
Before Driving >
Locking/Unlocking
Using the Remote Transmitter
Locking the doors
a Lock Button
Press the lock button.
Once:
≫
Some exterior lights flash; all the doors and fuel fill
door lock, and the security system sets.
Twice (within five seconds after the first push):
≫
The beeper sounds and verifies the security system is
set.
Unlocking the doors
a Unlock Button
Press the unlock button.
Once:
≫
Some exterior lights flash twice, and the driver’s door
and fuel fill door unlock.
Twice:
≫
The remaining doors unlock.
If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of unlocking the vehicle with the remote
transmitter, the doors will automatically relock.
Using the Keyless Access System
When you carry the keyless remote, you can lock/
unlock the doors and fuel fill door, and open the
trunk.
You can lock/unlock the doors and fuel fill door
within a radius of about 32 inches (80 cm) from
the outside door handle.
You can open the trunk within about 32 inches
(80 cm) radius from the trunk release button.
59
1
Before Driving
The door may be locked/unlocked if the door handle is covered with water in heavy
rain or in a car wash if the keyless remote is within range.
The light flash, beep, and door unlock mode settings can be customized using the
audio/information screen.
Customized Features
u
P.202
!
Please wipe off any residue such as car shampoo, groundwater, or
anti-freeze in the vicinity of the outside door handle, as there is a risk
that the keyless access system may not work properly.
Locking the doors and trunk
a Door Lock Sensor
Touch the door lock sensor on the front door.
≫
All the doors, fuel fill door, and trunk lock, and the
security system sets.
≫
Some exterior lights flash once and the beeper
sounds once.
Unlocking the doors and trunk
Grab the driver’s door handle:
≫
The driver’s door and fuel fill door unlock.
≫
Some exterior lights flash twice and the beeper
sounds twice.
Grab the front passenger’s door handle:
≫
All the doors, fuel fill door, and trunk unlock.
≫
Some exterior lights flash twice and the beeper
sounds twice.
a Trunk Release Button
Press the trunk release button:
≫
The trunk unlocks and opens.
≫
Some exterior lights flash twice and the beeper
sounds once.
Using the Trunk Release Button
u
P.90
1
Before Driving > Locking/Unlocking
60
If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of unlocking the vehicle with the keyless
access system, the doors and trunk will automatically relock.
You cannot lock or unlock doors using the keyless access system when the power
mode is set to any mode other than VEHICLE OFF.
Conditions under which you may not be able to lock/unlock the doors
and trunk
If you grip a front door handle or touch a door lock sensor wearing gloves, the door sensor
may be slow to respond or may not respond by unlocking or locking the doors.
After locking the door, you have up to two seconds during which you can pull the door
handle to confirm whether the door is locked. If you need to unlock the door immediately
after locking it, wait at least two seconds before gripping the handle, otherwise the door will
not unlock.
The door might not open if you pull it immediately after gripping the door handle. Grip the
handle again and confirm that the door is unlocked before pulling the handle.
Even within the 32 inches (80 cm) radius, you may not be able to lock/unlock the doors
with the keyless remote if it is above or below the outside handle.
The keyless remote may not operate if it is too close to the door, door glass, or trunk.
Locking the Doors and Trunk (Walk Away Auto
Lock®)
When you walk away from the vehicle that is power mode OFF while carrying the
keyless remote, the doors, trunk, and fuel fill door will automatically lock.
[1 ] While within about 5 feet (1.5 m) radius of
the vehicle.
≫
The beeper sounds; the auto lock function will
be activated.
[2 ] Carry the keyless remote beyond about 5
feet (1.5 m) from the vehicle and remain
outside this range for 2 or more seconds.
≫
Some exterior lights flash; the beeper sounds;
all doors will then lock.
When you stay beside the vehicle within the operation range, the doors will automatically lock
approximately 30 seconds after the auto lock function activating beeper sounds.
Auto lock function operation stop beeper
After the auto lock function has been activated, the auto lock operation stop beeper sounds
for approximately two seconds in the following cases.
≫
The keyless remote is put inside the vehicle through a window.
≫
You are located too close to the vehicle.
≫
The keyless remote is put inside the trunk.
If the warning beeper sounds, check that you are carrying the keyless remote. Then,
open/close a door and confirm the auto lock activation beeper sounds once.
1
Before Driving > Locking/Unlocking
61
1
Before Driving
When you open a door after the auto lock function activating beeper sounds, the auto lock
function will be canceled.
The auto lock function is set to Off as the factory default setting. The auto lock function can
be set to On using the audio/information screen.
If you set the auto lock function to On using the audio/information screen, only the
remote transmitter that was used to unlock the driver’s door prior to the setting
change can activate auto lock.
Customized Features
u
P.202
To temporarily deactivate the function:
[1 ] Set the power mode to OFF.
[2 ] Open the driver’s door.
[3 ] Using the master door lock switch, operate the lock as follows: Lock ➔ Unlock
➔ Lock ➔ Unlock.
≫
The beeper sounds, and the function is deactivated.
To restore the function:
Set the power mode to ON.
Lock the vehicle without using the auto lock function
With the keyless remote on you, move out of the auto lock function operation range.
Open any door.
Lock Presetting
a Door Lock Sensor
The vehicle will automatically lock after you lock
the doors in advance then close the doors.
Activate lock presetting after closing the driver’s
door.
[1 ] Touch the door lock sensor or press the lock
button on the remote transmitter.
≫
Alert sounds and lock presetting is activated.
[2 ] Close all the doors.
≫
Some exterior lights flash and a beeper sounds
when vehicle locks.
Make sure the doors are locked before moving
away from the vehicle.
Lock presetting will be reset if a door is opened before the vehicle has locked completely.
You can turn this function on and off.
Customized Features
u
P.202
1
Before Driving > Locking/Unlocking
62
Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
If the unlock button of the keyless remote does not work, use the built-in key instead.
The keyhole is behind the door handle.
Pull and hold the outer handle.
Insert the built-in key into the key cylinder from
below the handle and then turn it.
≫
When unlocking, the driver’s door and fuel fill door
unlock first.
≫
Turning the key a second time within a few seconds
does not unlock the remaining doors.
If you unlock a door with the built-in key while the security system is activated, the
alarm will sound.
If the lock button of the keyless remote does not work, refer to the following.
Locking a Door Without Using a Key
u
P.63
Locking a Door Without Using a Key
If you do not have the key on you, or if for some reason you cannot lock a door using
the key, you can lock the door without it.
Locking the front doors
Push the lock tab forward (
a) or push the master
door lock switch in the lock direction (b), and
close the door.
≫
When you lock the driver’s door, all the other doors
and fuel fill door lock at the same time.
Locking the rear doors
Push the lock tab forward and close the door.
Lockout Protection Function
If the vehicle cannot detect the keyless remote, lockout protection activates:
1
Before Driving > Locking/Unlocking
63
1
Before Driving
≫
A beeper sounds, some exterior lights flash, the doors unlock, and a message appears on the
driver information interface.
≫
This allows you to open a door in case the keyless remote is still inside the vehicle.
If you do not open a door, all doors relock after 15 seconds.
To avoid non-detection, make sure to keep the keyless remote away from cell phones
and other devices that may cause signal interference.
You can change the lockout protection operation setting.
Customized Features
u
P.202
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
Using the lock tab
a Lock Tab
b To Lock
c To Unlock
Locking a door: Push the lock tab forward.
Unlocking a door: Pull the lock tab rearward.
≫
When you lock the door using the lock tab on the
driver’s door, all the other doors and fuel fill door lock
at the same time. When you unlock the door using the
lock tab on the driver’s door, only the driver’s door
and fuel fill door will unlock.
Unlocking using the front door inner handle
a
Inner Handle
Pull the front door inner handle.
≫
The door unlocks and opens in one motion.
Unlocking and opening the driver’s door from the inner handle unlocks all the other
doors.
To avoid all the doors unlocking, use the lock tab on the driver’s door to unlock, then
lock again before opening the door.
1
Before Driving > Locking/Unlocking
64
This setting works for one time only. If you do not want all the doors to be unlocked
all the time, customize the Auto Door Unlock setting to Off using the audio/
information screen.
Customized Features
u
P.202
!
The front door inner handles are designed to allow front seat
occupants to open the door in one motion. However, this feature
requires that front seat occupants never pull a front door inner handle
while the vehicle is in motion.
!
Children should always ride in a rear seat where childproof door locks
are provided.
Childproof Door Locks
u
P.66
Using the master door lock switch
a Master Door Lock Switch
b To Lock
c To Unlock
Press the master door lock switch in as shown to
lock or unlock all the doors and fuel fill door.
≫
When you lock/unlock either front door using the
master door lock switch, all the other doors, fuel fill
door, and trunk lock/unlock at the same time.
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
Your vehicle locks or unlocks all doors automatically when a certain condition is met.
Drive Lock Mode
All doors lock when the vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).
You can turn off or change to another auto door locking setting.
Customized Features
u
P.202
1
Before Driving > Locking/Unlocking
65
1
Before Driving
Driver’s Door Open Mode
All doors unlock when the driver’s door is opened.
You can turn off or change to another auto door unlocking setting.
Customized Features
u
P.202
Childproof Door Locks
The childproof door locks prevent the rear doors from being opened from the inside
regardless of the position of the lock tab.
Setting the childproof door locks
a Lock
b Unlock
Slide the lever in the rear door to the lock
position, and close the door.
Open the door using the outside door handle.
To open the door from the inside when the childproof door lock is on, put the lock tab in the
unlock position, lower the rear window, put your hand out of the window, and pull the outside
door handle.
What to Do If
The rear door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle. Why?
Check if the childproof lock is in the lock position. If so, open the rear door with the
outside door handle.
To cancel this function, slide the lever up to the unlock position.
Childproof Door Locks
u
P.66
Why does the beeper sound when I open the driver’s door?
The beeper sounds when:
The power mode is in ACCESSORY.
The exterior lights are left on.
1
Before Driving > Locking/Unlocking
66
Why does a beeper sound when I walk away from the vehicle after I
close the door?
The beeper sounds if you move outside the walk away auto door lock operating
range before the door completely closes.
Locking the Doors and Trunk (Walk Away Auto Lock®)
u
P.61
Why is the keyless remote not working properly?
If the distance at which the remote transmitter works varies, the battery is probably
low.
If the LED does not come on when you press a button, the battery is dead.
Replacing the Remote Battery
u
P.352
If there are buildings and obstacles between your vehicle and the keyless remote,
the range will be reduced.
This distance may vary by external electrical interference.
1
Before Driving > Locking/Unlocking
67
1
Before Driving
1
Before Driving >
Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel
The steering wheel height and distance from your body can be adjusted so that you
can comfortably grip the steering wheel in an appropriate driving posture.
a To Release
b Adjust
c To Lock
[1 ] While the vehicle is stopped, push the
steering wheel adjustment lever down.
≫
The steering wheel adjustment lever is under
the steering column.
[2 ] Move the steering wheel up or down, and in
or out.
≫
Make sure you can see the instrument panel
gauges and indicators.
[3 ] Pull the steering wheel adjustment lever up
to lock the steering wheel in position.
≫
After adjusting the position, make sure you have
securely locked the steering wheel in place by
trying to move it up, down, in, and out.
3 WARNING
Adjusting the steering wheel position while driving may cause you to lose
control of the vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only when the vehicle is stopped.
68
1
Before Driving >
Seats
Adjusting the Seat
Always make seat adjustments before driving.
Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
a Allow sufficient space.
b Move back.
Adjust the driver’s seat as far back as possible
while allowing you to maintain full control of the
vehicle. You should be able to sit upright, well
back in the seat and be able to adequately press
the pedals without leaning forward, and grip the
steering wheel comfortably. The passenger’s seat
should be adjusted in a similar manner so that it
is as far back from the front airbag in the
dashboard as possible.
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a comfortable,
upright position, leaving ample space between
your chest and the airbag cover in the center of
the steering wheel.
The front seat passenger should also adjust their
seat-back to a comfortable, upright position.
Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the
occupant’s chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the
chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a
seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury.
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada
recommend that drivers allow at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the
steering wheel and the chest.
3 WARNING
Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious injury or death if the
front airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the front airbags as possible while maintaining
control of the vehicle.
69
1
Before Driving
3 WARNING
Reclining the seat-back too far can result in serious injury or death in a
crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an upright position, and sit well back in the seat.
3 WARNING
Sitting improperly or out of position can result in serious injury or death in a
crash.
Always sit upright, well back in the seat, with your feet on the floor.
Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints in all seating positions.
In order for the head restraint system to work properly:
Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or from the restraint legs.
Do not place any objects between an occupant and the seat-back.
Install each restraint in its proper location.
Adjusting the front head restraint position
Head restraints are most effective for protection
against whiplash and other rear impact crash
injuries when the center of the back of the
occupant’s head rests against the center of the
restraint. The tops of the occupant’s ears should
be level with the center height of the restraint.
3 WARNING
Improperly positioning head restraints reduces their effectiveness and
increases the likelihood of serious injury in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are in place and positioned properly before
driving.
3 WARNING
Failure to reinstall or correctly reinstall the head restraints can result in
severe injury during a crash.
Always replace the head restraints before driving.
1
Before Driving > Seats
70
Adjusting the Front Seat Positions
Adjusting the front power seat(s)
*
a Release Button
To raise the head restraint:
Pull it upward.
To lower the head restraint:
Push it down while pressing the release button.
To remove the head restraint:
Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then, push
the release button and pull the restraint up and
out.
To reinstall a head restraint:
Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head
restraint to an appropriate height while pressing
the release button.
≫
Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked in
position.
Seat-back Angle Adjustment
Push forward or pull backward the switch to
change the angle.
Height Adjustment (Driver’s seat only)
Pull up or push down the switch to raise or lower
the seat.
Horizontal Position Adjustment
Slide the switch to move the seat.
*: Not available on all models
1
Before Driving > Seats
71
1
Before Driving
Lumbar support adjustment (Driver’s seat only)
a Lumbar Support Adjustment
Switch
Lumbar Support Adjustment Switch
Press the front: To increase the entire lumbar
support.
Press the rear: To decrease the entire lumbar
support.
Adjusting the front manual seat
*
Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and forth to make sure it is locked in
position.
a Release Button
To raise the head restraint:
Pull it upward.
To lower the head restraint:
Push it down while pressing the release button.
To remove the head restraint:
Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then, push
the release button and pull the restraint up and
out.
To reinstall a head restraint:
Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head
restraint to an appropriate height while pressing
the release button.
≫
Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked in
position.
a Lever
Seat-back Angle Adjustment
Pull up the lever to change the angle.
*: Not available on all models
1
Before Driving > Seats
72
a Bar
Horizontal Position Adjustment
Pull up on the bar to move the seat, then release
the bar.
Using the front seat armrest
The console lid can be used as an armrest.
Adjusting the Rear Seat Positions
Using the rear seat armrest
Pull down the armrest in the center seat-back.
1
Before Driving > Seats
73
1
Before Driving
Folding down the rear seats
a Guide
b Center Shoulder Belt
[1 ] Put the armrest back into the seat-back.
[2 ] Remove the center shoulder belt from the
guide.
a Release Lever
[3 ] Pull the release lever in the trunk to release
the lock.
[4 ] Fold the seat-back down.
The rear seat-backs can be folded down to accommodate bulkier items in the trunk.
Never drive with the seat-back folded down and the trunk lid open.
Exhaust Gas Hazard
u
P.26
Make sure that the folded seat-back does not press against the front passenger seat,
as this can cause the weight sensors in the front passenger seat to work improperly.
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
u
P.50
Remove any items from the rear seat cushion and floor before you fold down the rear
seat.
The front seat(s) must be far enough forward so they do not interfere with the rear
seats as they fold down.
To lock a seat-back upright, push it backwards until it locks.
1
Before Driving > Seats
74
When returning the seat-back to its original position, push it firmly back. Also, make
sure all rear shoulder belts are positioned in front of the seat-back, and the center
shoulder belt is re-positioned in the guide.
!
Make sure all items in the trunk or items extending through the
opening into the rear seat are properly secured. Loose items can fly
forward if you have to brake hard.
Driving Position Memory System
*
You can store two driver’s seat positions (except for power lumbar) with the driving
position memory system.
When you unlock and open the driver’s door with a keyless remote or keyless access
system, the seat automatically adjusts to retracted positions of one of the two preset
positions.
The driver’s seat moves rearward depending on the set seating position once you:
Stop the vehicle.
Put the transmission in P .
Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF.
Open the driver’s door.
Once the power mode is in the ACCESSORY position, the driver’s seat moves forward
to the DRIVER 1 or 2 preset position.
System Operation
The system will not operate if:
The transmission is out of the P position.
Either memory button is pressed while the seat is in motion.
The seat position is adjusted while in operation.
Either of the memorized positions is set fully to the rear.
The system may not recognize a key if:
The key is in close proximity to a cell phone or other wireless device.
Both keys are in the vehicle at the same time.
The Driving Position Memory System is disabled in customized features.
You open the driver’s door without fully grabbing the door handle.
*: Not available on all models
1
Before Driving > Seats
75
1
Before Driving
Storing a Position in Memory
a Memory Button 1
b Memory Button 2
c SET Button
[1 ] Set the power mode to ON. Adjust the
driver’s seat to the desired position.
[2 ] Press the SET button.
≫
The SET button indicator light will come on.
[3 ] Press the memory button 1 or 2 within
five seconds of pressing the SET button.
≫
The beeper sounds, and the SET button
indicator light goes off.
The position of the lumbar support is not stored.
After you press the SET button, the storing operation will be canceled when:
You do not press the memory button within five seconds.
You readjust the seat position before the double-beep.
You set the power mode to any position except ON.
Recalling the Stored Position
a Memory Button 1
b Memory Button 2
[1 ] Put the transmission into P .
[2 ] Apply the parking brake.
[3 ] Press a memory button ( 1 or 2 ).
≫
The seat will automatically move to the
memorized position.
The seat will stop moving if you:
Press the SET button or a memory button ( 1 or 2 ).
Adjust the seat position.
Put the transmission to a position other than P .
Using the audio/information screen, you can disable the automatic seat adjustment
function.
Customized Features
u
P.202
Multiple separate accounts can be created for each owner of a transmitter.
See the following page for details.
1
Before Driving > Seats
76
Registering a User
u
P.186
The transmitter settings may not be switched when you change owner accounts.
If this happens, change to a different account and then try switching to the desired
account again.
For details, please refer to the following page.
Switching Users
u
P.187
When the door is opened, the driver‘s seat moves to the seat position of the account
that last used the transmitter.
The driver’s seat easy exit feature can be turned on/off.
Customized Features
u
P.202
Rear Seat Reminder
This feature alerts you to the possible presence of passengers or items in the rear
seats before you exit the vehicle. It activates when the vehicle is set to VEHICLE OFF
if the rear doors were opened shortly before or after the vehicle was set to ON.
A reminder appears on the driver information
interface and an alert will sound when the power
mode is set to VEHICLE OFF.
When the power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF, the reminder comes on briefly, then the
function is deactivated.
The reminder will not work if the power mode has not been set to ON within 10 minutes of
operating the rear doors.
The system does not detect passengers in the rear seats. Instead, it can detect when a rear
door is opened and closed, indicating that there may be something in the rear seats.
You can turn off the notification setting.
Customized Features
u
P.202
1
Before Driving > Seats
77
1
Before Driving
1
Before Driving >
Seat Belts
About Your Seat Belts
Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you
connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety
features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the vehicle,
against any passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat belts also
keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full advantage of
the additional protection provided by the airbags.
Lap/shoulder seat belts
All five seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with emergency
locking retractors. In normal driving, the retractor lets you move freely while keeping
some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop, the retractor locks to
restrain your body.
The front passenger’s and rear seat belts also have a lockable retractor for use with
child seats.
Protecting Child Passengers
u
P.29
In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including:
frontal impacts
side impacts
rear impacts
rollovers
Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every crash. But in most cases, seat belts
can reduce your risk of serious injury.
Most states and all Canadian provinces and territories require you to wear seat belts.
If a passenger moves around and extends the seat belt, the lockable retractor may
activate. If this happens, release the retractor by unfastening the seat belt and allow
the belt to retract completely. Then, refasten the belt.
3 WARNING
Not wearing a seat belt properly increases the chance of serious injury or
death in a crash, even though your vehicle has airbags.
Be sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts and wear them
properly.
78
!
Follow these guidelines for proper use:
All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that
position for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduce the
effectiveness of the belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a
crash.
Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or
behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash.
Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be
very seriously injured in a crash.
Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve
comfort or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the
protective capability and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
!
If you extend the seat belt too quickly, it will lock in place.
If this happens, slightly retract the seat belt, then extend it slowly.
Seat Belt Reminder
The beeper will periodically sound and the indicator will blink.
The indicator will also come on if a front passenger does not fasten their seat belt
within six seconds after the power mode is set to ON.
When no one is sitting in the front passenger’s seat, the indicator will not come on
and the beeper will not sound.
The indicator also may not come on and the beeper may not sound when the
occupant is not heavy enough to trigger the weight sensor. Such occupants (e.g.,
infants and smaller children) should be moved to the rear seat as a deploying front
airbag likely will injure or kill them.
Protecting Child Passengers
u
P.29
The driver information interface uses colors to aid the driver in checking the status of
the passengers.
For the front seating positions:
Green indicates the seat belt is fastened.
An unfastened gray graphic indicates the seat belt is not fastened and an occupant has not
been detected.
An unfastened red graphic indicates the seat belt is unfastened and an occupant has been
detected.
1
Before Driving > Seat Belts
79
1
Before Driving
Front seats
a Fastened
b Unfastened
The seat belt system includes an indicator on the
instrument panel to remind the driver or a front
passenger or both to fasten their seat belts.
If you set the power mode to ON and a seat belt is
not fastened, a beeper will sound and the
indicator will blink. After a few seconds, the
beeper will stop and the indicator will come on
and remain illuminated until the seat belt is
fastened.
Rear seats
a Fastened
b Unfastened
Your vehicle monitors rear seat belt use.
The rear seat belt reminder notifies you with the
driver information interface, the beeper sounds,
or both if any of the rear seat belts are not used.
The rear seat belt reminder operates under any of
the following circumstances:
Any of the rear passengers have not fastened their
seat belts since the power mode was set to ON.
Any of the rear seat belts have come off while driving.
The system will not detect a passenger in the rear seats who has not fastened the
seat belt.
The driver should check the status of the rear passengers’ seat belts at the start of
each trip and each time a passenger is seated in the rear seats, using the driver
information interface as an aid.
An alert will sound if a passenger in the rear seats unfastens the seat belt while the
vehicle is in motion or if motion resumes while the graphic is red.
The system does not monitor harnesses that are part of a child seat, nor the anchors
of the LATCH system. While the system can inform you that a seat belt is fastened, it
cannot determine whether a child seat is properly installed or used.
Protecting Child Passengers
u
P.29
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
The front seats and the outer rear seats are equipped with automatic seat belt
tensioners to enhance safety.
1
Before Driving > Seat Belts
80
The tensioners automatically tighten the front seat belts and the outer rear seat belts
during a moderate-to-severe frontal or side collision, sometimes even if the collision
is not severe enough to inflate the front airbags or the driver’s and passenger’s knee
airbag.
The seat belt tensioners can only operate once. If a tensioner is activated, the SRS
indicator will come on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and thoroughly inspect
the seat belt system as it may not offer protection in a subsequent crash.
Fastening a Seat Belt
After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well
back in the seat:
Adjusting the Seat
u
P.69
[1 ] Pull the seat belt out slowly.
[2 ] Insert the latch plate (a) into the buckle
(b), then tug on the belt to make sure the
buckle is secure.
≫
Make sure that the belt is not twisted or caught
on anything.
[3 ] Position the lap part of the belt as low as
possible across your hips (see illustration),
then pull up on the shoulder part of the belt
so the lap part fits snugly. This lets your
strong pelvic bones take the force of a crash
and reduces the chance of internal injuries.
[4 ] If necessary, pull up on the belt again to
remove any slack, then check that the belt
rests across the center of your chest and
over your shoulder. This spreads the forces
of a crash over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
1
Before Driving > Seat Belts
81
1
Before Driving
To release the belt, push the red PRESS button and then guide the belt by hand until
it has retracted completely.
When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is properly stowed so that it will not get
caught in the closing door.
!
If the seat belt appears to be locked in a fully retracted position, firmly
pull out on the shoulder belt once, then push it back in.
Then, smoothly pull it out of the retractor and fasten. If you are unable to
release the seat belt from a fully retracted position, do not allow anyone to sit in
the seat, and take your vehicle to a dealer for repair.
About Your Seat Belts
u
P.78
!
No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat belt or one that
does not appear to be working correctly.
Using a seat belt that is not working properly may not protect the occupant in a
crash. Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible.
3 WARNING
Improperly positioning the seat belts can cause serious injury or death in a
crash.
Make sure all seat belts are properly positioned before driving.
!
Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or retractor
mechanism.
Advice for Pregnant Women
Consider alternative:
If you are pregnant, the best way to protect
yourself and your unborn child when driving or
riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt.
When positioning the seat belt, wear the shoulder
belt section across the chest, avoiding the
abdomen, and keep the lap belt portion as low as
possible across the hips (see illustration).
Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is okay for you to drive.
1
Before Driving > Seat Belts
82
!
To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your unborn child that
can be caused by an inflating front airbag:
When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far back as possible while
allowing full control of the vehicle.
When sitting in the front passenger’s seat, adjust the seat as far back as
possible.
Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor
The front seats have adjustable shoulder anchors to accommodate taller and shorter
occupants.
[1 ] Move the anchor up and down while holding
the release button (a).
[2 ] Position the anchor so that the belt rests
across the center of your chest and over your
shoulder.
The shoulder anchor height can be adjusted to four levels. If the belt contacts your neck,
lower the height one level at a time.
After an adjustment, make sure that the shoulder anchor position is secure.
Seat Belt Inspection
Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows:
Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear.
Check that the latch plates and buckles work smoothly and the belts retract easily.
≫
If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only use a mild
soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make sure the belt is
completely dry before allowing it to retract.
Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper
protection and should be replaced as soon as possible.
A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of protection
in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after any collision.
1
Before Driving > Seat Belts
83
1
Before Driving
3 WARNING
Not checking or maintaining seat belts can result in serious injury or death if
the seat belts do not work properly when needed.
Check your seat belts regularly and have any problem corrected as soon as
possible.
1
Before Driving > Seat Belts
84
1
Before Driving >
Mirrors
Interior Rearview Mirror
Adjust the angle of the rearview mirror when you are sitting in the correct driving
position.
Adjust the mirrors before you start driving.
Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Rearview Mirror with Day and Night Positions
*
a Tab
b Night Position
c Daytime Position
Flip the tab to switch the position. The night
position will help to reduce the glare from
headlights behind you when driving after dark.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
*
a Button/Indicator
b Sensor
When you are driving after dark, the automatic
dimming rearview mirror reduces the glare from
headlights behind you. Press the button to
turn this function on and off. When activated, the
indicator comes on.
≫
The auto dimming function cancels when the
transmission is in R .
Power Door Mirrors
You can adjust the door mirrors when the power mode is in ON.
*: Not available on all models
85
1
Before Driving
a L/R Selector Switch:
Select the left or right mirror. After adjusting the
mirror, return the switch to the center position.
b Mirror Position Adjustment Switch:
Press the switch left, right, up, or down to move
the mirror.
Reverse Tilt Door Mirror
*
a Selector Switch
If activated, the passenger side door mirror
automatically tilts downward when you put the
transmission into R : this improves close-in
visibility on the passenger side of the vehicle
when backing up. The mirror automatically
returns to its original position when you take the
transmission out of
R
.
To activate this feature, set the power mode to ON and slide the selector switch to the
passenger’s side.
*: Not available on all models
1
Before Driving > Mirrors
86
1
Before Driving >
Windows
Opening/Closing the Power Windows
The power windows can be opened and closed when the power mode is in ON using
the switches on the doors.
The driver’s side switches can be used to open and close all the windows. The power
window lock button on the driver’s side must be switched off to open and close the
windows from anywhere other than the driver’s seat.
When the power window lock button is pushed in, the indicator comes on and you can
only operate the driver’s window. Turn the power window lock button on if a child is in
the vehicle.
a Driver’s Window Switch
b Front Passenger’s Window Switch
c Rear Passenger’s Window Switch
d Open
e Close
Manual operation
To open:
Push the switch down lightly, and hold it until the desired position is
reached.
To close: Pull the switch up lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached.
Automatic operation (Front window switch only)
To open:
Push the switch down firmly.
To close:Pull the switch up firmly.
The window opens or closes completely. To stop the window at any time, push or
pull the switch briefly.
The power windows can be operated for up to 10 minutes after you set the power mode to
VEHICLE OFF.
Opening either front door cancels this function.
Auto Reverse
If a power window senses resistance when closing automatically, it will stop closing and
reverse direction.
If the auto reverse function is activated due to a malfunction or impact caused by
the road surface or driving conditions and the window cannot be closed
automatically, you can close it by continuously pulling up the switch briefly.
87
1
Before Driving
While driving with any of the windows open, you may hear a booming, throbbing, or
helicopter-type noise or pressure. This is called wind buffeting. This is a normal
occurrence that can be minimized.
If you hear a wind buffeting noise with any of the windows open, lower all of the
other windows slightly or open the moonroof.
3 WARNING
Closing a power window on someone’s hands or fingers can cause serious
injury.
Make sure your passengers are away from the windows before closing
them.
The driver’s window auto reverse function is disabled when you continuously pull up the
switch.
The auto reverse function stops sensing when the window is almost closed to ensure that it
fully closes.
Power Window Lock Button
a Power Window Lock Button
b Indicator
When the power window lock button is set to ON
(indicator on), any window other than that on the
driver’s side will not operate.
!
Turn the power window lock button on if a child is in the vehicle.
1
Before Driving > Windows
88
Opening the Windows with the Remote
a Unlock Button
To open:
Press the unlock button, and then within 10
seconds, press it again and hold it.
If the windows stop midway, repeat the procedure.
If you open the windows with the remote transmitter, the moonroof will open automatically
along with them.
You can turn off or on to open the windows with the keyless remote setting using the
audio/information screen.
Customized Features
u
P.202
1
Before Driving > Windows
89
1
Before Driving
1
Before Driving >
Trunk
Precautions for Opening/Closing the Trunk
Keep the trunk lid closed while driving to:
≫
Avoid possible damage.
≫
Prevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle.
Exhaust Gas Hazard
u
P.26
If the driver’s door is locked, the trunk will automatically lock when you close it.
Using the Trunk Opener
a Trunk Opener
Pressing and holding the trunk opener under the
driver’s side corner of the dashboard unlocks and
opens the trunk.
What to Do If Unable to Open the Trunk
u
P.382
Using the Trunk Release Button
a Trunk Release Button
Push up the release button on the trunk lid after
the doors are unlocked.
What to Do If Unable to Open the Trunk
u
P.382
Even if the trunk is locked, you can open the trunk
if you carry the keyless remote.
≫
Some exterior lights flash twice and the beeper
sounds once.
If you forget the keyless remote inside, the beeper will sound and the trunk will not close.
If the beeper sounds after you close the trunk, move the keyless remote away from the trunk
and close again.
90
Using the Remote Transmitter
a Trunk Release Button
Press the trunk release button for approximately
one second to unlock and open the trunk.
Trunk Main Switch
a Main Switch
b ON
c OFF
The trunk main switch disables the trunk release
button on the remote transmitter, the trunk
release button on the trunk lid, and trunk opener
under the driver’s side corner of the dashboard to
protect luggage in the trunk.
[1 ] Make sure the rear seat-back is not folded
down.
[2 ] Turn off the trunk main switch in the glove
box.
[3 ] Lock the glove box.
If you need to give the key to someone else, remove the built-in key from the keyless
remote by pressing the release button, and give the remote as a valet key.
Emergency Trunk Opener
a Lever
The trunk release lever allows you to open the
trunk from inside for your safety.
Slide the release lever in the direction of the
arrow.
Parents should decide if their children should be shown how to use this feature.
1
Before Driving > Trunk
91
1
Before Driving
1
Before Driving >
Maximum Load Limit
About Maximum Load Limit
The maximum load for your vehicle is 850 lbs (385 kg). See the Tire and Loading
Information label attached to the driver’s doorjamb.
3 WARNING
Overloading or improper loading can affect handling and stability and cause
a crash in which you can be hurt or killed. Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this manual.
Label Example
This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and accessories, and the
tongue load if you are towing a trailer.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit -
[1 ] Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle’s placard.
[2 ] Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
[3 ] Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
[4 ] The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers
in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 − 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)
92
[5 ] Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed
the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
step 4.
[6 ] If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, accessories, cargo, and
trailer tongue load must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all accessories, all cargo, and the tongue load.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle.
Towing a Trailer: See Towing a Trailer to determine whether your vehicle is designed to tow a
trailer.
About Towing a Trailer
u
P.95
Load Limits Example
Example 1
a
Max Load: 850 lbs (385 kg)
b Passenger Weight: 150 lbs × 2 = 300 lbs (68 kg × 2 = 136 kg)
c Cargo Weight: 550 lbs (249 kg)
1
Before Driving > Maximum Load Limit
93
1
Before Driving
Example 2
a Max Load: 850 lbs (385 kg)
b Passenger Weight: 150 lbs × 5 = 750 lbs (68 kg × 5 = 340 kg)
c Cargo Weight: 100 lbs (45 kg)
1
Before Driving > Maximum Load Limit
94
1
Before Driving >
Towing a Trailer
About Towing a Trailer
Your vehicle is not designed to, and cannot safely, tow a trailer nor have a tow hitch
installed. Do not install a tow hitch on, or tow with, your vehicle.
Towing Behind a Motorhome
Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motorhome. If your vehicle needs
to be towed in an emergency, refer to the emergency towing information.
About Towing
u
P.380
95
1
Before Driving
Turn Power System On or Off
POWER Button･･････････････････････････････････ 97
Turn on Power System･･････････････････････････ 98
Turn off Power System･･････････････････････････ 99
Remote Engine Start････････････････････････････ 99
What to Do If･･････････････････････････････････ 101
Shifting
About Shift Operation･････････････････････････ 102
Braking
Foot Brake･････････････････････････････････････ 104
Parking Brake･･････････････････････････････････104
Automatic Brake Hold･････････････････････････ 107
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)･････････････････ 110
Starting and Driving
Starting to Drive･･･････････････････････････････ 111
Parking Your Vehicle
When Stopped･････････････････････････････････113
Rear View Camera
About Rear View Camera･･････････････････････ 114
Refueling
Fuel Information･･･････････････････････････････116
How to Refuel･････････････････････････････････ 117
Fuel Economy and CO
2
Emissions･････････････ 118
Turn Signals/Light Switches
Turn Signals･･･････････････････････････････････ 120
Headlights/Parking Lights･････････････････････ 120
Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wiper/Washer･････････････････････ 126
What to Do If･･････････････････････････････････ 128
Defroster
Defrosting the Windshield and Windows･･････ 130
What to Do If･･････････････････････････････････ 131
Driving Features
AUTO/EV/CHARGE Mode･････････････････････ 132
Drive Mode System････････････････････････････ 132
Deceleration Paddle Selector･･････････････････134
Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System･･････････････ 136
Vehicle Stability Assist™ (VSA®), aka Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), System･･･････････････136
Motion Management System･･････････････････ 137
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)･･････ 138
Driving Operation
96
2
Driving Operation >
Turn Power System On or Off
POWER Button
Changing the Power Mode
If you carry the keyless remote and press the
POWER button without depressing the brake
pedal, the power mode will change in this order:
VEHICLE OFF ➔ ACCESSORY ➔ ON ➔ VEHICLE
OFF.
VEHICLE OFF:
Vehicle power is turned OFF.
ACCESSORY:
The audio system and some accessories can be
used.
ON:
All accessories can be used.
ON mode:
The POWER button is on (in red) if the power system is on.
Do not leave the power mode in ACCESSORY or ON when you get out.
If the keyless remote is set in a storage box or another place where its signal can be
interrupted, the power mode may not change.
Automatic Power Off
If you leave the vehicle for 30 to 60 minutes with the transmission in P and the
power mode in ACCESSORY, the vehicle automatically goes into the mode similar to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to avoid draining the 12-volt battery.
Power Mode Reminder
If you open the driver’s door when the power mode is set to ACCESSORY, a warning
beep sounds.
97
2
Driving Operation
Turn on Power System
[1 ] Make sure the parking brake is applied.
Parking Brake
u
P.104
[2 ] Depress the brake pedal, then press the
POWER button while the transmission is in
P .
≫
The READY indicator (a) comes on when the
power system is on and you can start driving.
≫
Keep depressing the brake pedal until the
indicator comes on.
≫
If the outside temperature is extremely low, the
indicator does not come on and a warning
message appears on the gauge.
Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when starting the power system.
The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000
feet (2,400 meters).
When turning on the power system in cold weather, turn off all electrical accessories such as
the lights, climate control system, and rear defogger in order to reduce the 12-volt battery
drain.
If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold, an engine block heater will improve
starting and warming of the engine. Consult a dealer for details.
Do not hold the POWER button to start the power system. If the power system does not start,
wait at least 30 seconds before trying again.
The power system may not activate if the keyless remote is subjected to strong radio waves.
The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from theft. If an improperly coded device is
used, the power system does not activate.
Immobilizer System
u
P.55
!
To prevent unexpected accidents, do not depress the accelerator
pedal when turning on the power system.
2
Driving Operation > Turn Power System On or Off
98
Turn off Power System
While the vehicle is completely stopped, change the shift position to P , then press
the POWER button.
After shutting off the engine, you may hear certain noises coming from under vehicle.
This noise is caused by the vacuum pump inside the fuel evaporation leakage check
module (ELCM). Depending on conditions, the pump will come on for about 15
minutes about 5 to 10 hours after engine shutoff. This noise doesn’t indicate a vehicle
problem.
The power mode will automatically turn to VEHICLE OFF about 20 minutes after the
following conditions have been met:
A door has been opened, such as when leaving the vehicle.
The transmission is in P .
The driver’s seat belt is not fastened.
Remote Engine Start
You can remotely turn on the power system using the keyless remote. Depending on
the outside temperature, functions such as the climate control system, rear defogger,
and each of the heating features will also be activated.
Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
u
P.130
Using the Front Seat Heaters/Ventilators*
u
P.152
Using the Heated Steering Wheel
u
P.154
If there are buildings and obstacles between your vehicle and the keyless remote, the range
will be reduced. This distance may vary by external electrical interference.
3 WARNING
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic and can rapidly accumulate in closed or even
partly enclosed areas. Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and even kill
you.
Never use the remote engine starter with the vehicle parked in a garage or
other areas with limited ventilation.
!
Before using the remote engine start, check your local laws.
The remote engine start may violate local laws.
2
Driving Operation > Turn Power System On or Off
99
2
Driving Operation
To Turn the Power System On
Press the button (a), then press and hold
the button (b).
≫
Some exterior lights flash once.
≫
If the power system is turn on successfully, some
exterior lights flash six times.
≫
If the power system does not turn on, exterior lights
will not flash. Go within the range, and try again.
The power system is on for up to 10 minutes. To extend the time for another 10
minutes during the first 10 minutes, press the button, then press and hold the
button.
≫
Some exterior lights flash six times if a 10-minute extension request was transmitted
successfully.
To Turn the Power System Off
Press the button for one second.
≫
If the power system is turned off successfully, the exterior lights flash once.
≫
When the keyless remote is out of the keyless access system range, the exterior lights will not
flash. The power system will not be turned off. Go within the range, and try again.
Remote Engine Start Limitations
The power system may not be turned on by the remote engine start if:
You have disabled a remote engine start setting.
Customized Features
u
P.202
The power mode is not in VEHICLE OFF.
The transmission is in a position other than
P
.
The hood is open, or any door or the trunk is unlocked.
You have already used the remote twice to turn the power system on.
Another registered keyless remote is in the vehicle.
There is any antenna failure.
The door is unlocked with the built-in key.
The engine oil pressure is low.
The engine coolant temperature is extremely high.
The security system alarm is not set.
The shift lever release button is pressed.
The 12-volt battery charge is too low.
The system is updating.
The power system may be turned off while it is running if:
The security system alarm is activated.
2
Driving Operation > Turn Power System On or Off
100
The door is unlocked with the built-in key.
The hood is open.
The trunk or any door is unlocked without using the keyless remote or keyless access system.
You press the shift lever release button.
The engine coolant temperature is extremely high.
The engine oil pressure is low.
The Malfunction Indicator Lamp comes on.
What to Do If
If the keyless remote battery is weak
Bring the keyless remote close to the POWER button if the battery in the keyless
remote is weak.
If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak
u
P.365
When the power system does not start
A pre-registered key is required.
Immobilizer System
u
P.55
If the keyless remote is set on the instrument panel, in a storage box, or another
place where its signal can be interrupted, the power mode may not change.
Why does the brake pedal sink down slightly when the power mode is
turned on?
This is related to the activation of the electric brake system, and it is normal.
Why does the exhaust system sound abnormal, or why is there an
exhaust gas or gasoline smell in the vehicle?
There may be a problem with the engine or exhaust system. Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
Why is a motor sound coming from under the hood?
Immediately after starting the power system or while driving, you may hear a motor
sound coming from under the hood due to a system check.
The power mode does not change from ACCESSORY to VEHICLE OFF.
Why?
The shift lever should be moved to
P .
2
Driving Operation > Turn Power System On or Off
101
2
Driving Operation
2
Driving Operation >
Shifting
About Shift Operation
a Shift Lever Release Button
b Depress the brake pedal and press the shift lever release button to shift.
c Shift without pressing the shift lever release button.
d Press the shift lever release button and shift.
P Park: Used when parking and before turning off or starting the power system.
R Reverse: Used when reversing.
N Neutral: Transmission is not locked.
D Drive: Used for normal driving.
≫
The deceleration paddle selector can be used temporarily.
≫
The deceleration paddle selector can be used while locked when the M indicator is on.
Gauge display
a
Shift Position Indicator/Transmission
System Indicator
Use the shift position indicator to check the lever position before and after pulling away.
It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the brake pedal is applied while the shift
lever release button is held down. Depress the brake pedal first.
When shifting positions in extremely low temperatures (-22ºF/-30ºC), there may be a short
delay before the shift position is displayed.
!
To avoid damage to the transmission, always shift between forward
and reverse when the vehicle has come to a complete standstill.
102
!
If the transmission system indicator blinks when driving in any shift
position, there is a problem with the transmission.
Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission checked by a dealer as
soon as possible.
2
Driving Operation > Shifting
103
2
Driving Operation
2
Driving Operation >
Braking
Foot Brake
The foot brake is used to slow down or stop your vehicle, which is operated by a brake
pedal.
≫
When you depress the brake pedal, you may hear an operating sound from the engine
compartment.
!
Check the brakes after driving through deep water, or if there is a
buildup of road surface water. If necessary, dry the brakes by lightly
depressing the pedal several times.
!
If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when applying the
brakes, this is caused by the brake wear indicator rubbing on the brake
rotor and indicates that the brake pads need to be replaced. Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer. If you hear only an occasional squeak or
squeal when you initially apply the brake pedal, this may be normal
and caused by high frequency vibration of the brake pads against the
rotating brake disc.
!
Do not constantly depress the brake pedal while going downhill, as it
builds up heat.
If you constantly depress the brake pedal while going downhill, it will build up
heat, which reduces the brake effectiveness. Apply regenerative braking by
taking your foot off the accelerator pedal and downshifting to a speed position.
Brake Assist System
Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress
the brake pedal hard during emergency braking. Press the brake pedal firmly for more
powerful braking.
≫
When brake assist operates, the pedal may wiggle slightly and an operating noise may be
heard.
Parking Brake
Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parking.
You may hear the electric parking brake system motor operating from the rear wheel area
when you apply or release the parking brake. This is normal.
104
The brake pedal may slightly move due to the electric parking brake system operation when
you apply or release the parking brake. This is normal.
You cannot apply or release the parking brake if the 12-volt battery goes dead.
Emergency Power System On
u
P.365
If you pull up and hold the electric parking brake switch while driving, the brakes on all four
wheels are applied by the system until the vehicle comes to a stop. The electric parking brake
then applies, and the switch should be released.
To Apply Manually
The electric parking brake can be applied any
time the vehicle has 12-volt battery, no matter
which position the power mode is in. Pull the
electric parking brake switch (a) up gently and
securely.
≫
The indicator in the switch comes on.
≫
The parking brake and brake system indicator (red)
comes on.
To Release Manually
Depress the brake pedal, then press the electric
parking brake switch (a).
≫
The indicator in the switch goes off.
≫
The parking brake and brake system indicator (red)
goes off.
The power mode must be in ON in order to release the electric parking brake.
Manually releasing the parking brake using the switch helps your vehicle start slowly and
smoothly when facing downhill on steep hills.
To Release Automatically
Gently depress the accelerator pedal (a) to start
the vehicle.
≫
The parking brake and brake system indicator (red)
goes off.
2
Driving Operation > Braking
105
2
Driving Operation
The parking brake may not be released automatically while the following indicators
are on:
Malfunction indicator lamp
Transmission system indicator
Parking brake and brake system indicator (amber)
Vehicle Stability Assist™ (VSA®) System indicator
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) indicator
Supplemental restraint system indicator
!
If the driver’s seat belt is unfastened, the parking brake will not
release automatically.
Automatic Parking Brake Feature
The parking brake is applied automatically when you set the power mode to VEHICLE
OFF.
≫
The default setting for this feature is OFF.
Activating and deactivating the automatic parking brake feature
With the power mode is in ON, carry out the following steps to either activate or
deactivate the automatic parking brake feature.
[1 ] Change the shift position to P .
[2 ] Without depressing the brake pedal, pull up the electric parking brake switch.
≫
Check that the parking brake and brake system indicator (red) has come on.
[3 ] Pull up and hold the parking brake switch. When you hear a beeping sound,
release the switch and within three seconds pull up and hold the switch again.
[4 ] When you hear a sound indicating that the procedure is completed, release
the switch.
≫
Two beeps indicate that the feature has been activated.
≫
One beep indicates that the feature has been deactivated.
≫
To confirm that the parking brake is applied, check if the parking brake and brake
system indicator (red) is on.
In the following situations, the parking brake automatically operates.
When the vehicle has been stopped for more than 10 minutes by Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) with Low Speed Follow or the automatic brake hold system.
When the driver’s seat belt is unfastened while your vehicle is stopped by ACC with Low
Speed Follow or the automatic brake hold system.
When the power mode is turned off while your vehicle is stopped by ACC with Low Speed
Follow or the automatic brake hold system.
When there is a problem with the automatic brake hold system while it is activated.
2
Driving Operation > Braking
106
!
In cold climates, the parking brake may freeze in place if applied.
When parking the vehicle, chock the wheels and make sure the
automatic parking brake feature is deactivated. Also, when putting
your vehicle through a conveyor-type car wash, when having your
vehicle towed, etc., deactivate the automatic parking brake feature
and leave the parking brake released.
Temporarily deactivate the automatic parking brake feature
If you need to temporarily deactivate the feature when putting your vehicle through
a conveyor-type car wash or when having your vehicle towed, follow the procedure
explained below.
[1 ] Depress the brake pedal and bring the vehicle to a stop.
[2 ] Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF and then within two seconds push down
the electric parking brake switch.
≫
Activation and deactivation settings for the feature will not be affected.
≫
Before temporarily deactivating the feature, make sure to first turn off both ACC with
Low Speed Follow and the automatic brake hold system.
≫
To confirm that the parking brake is applied, check if the parking brake and brake
system indicator (red) is on.
Automatic Brake Hold
Keeps the brake applied after releasing the brake pedal until the accelerator pedal is
pressed. You can use this system while the vehicle is temporarily stopped, like at
traffic lights and in heavy traffic.
2
Driving Operation > Braking
107
2
Driving Operation
3 WARNING
Activating the automatic brake hold system on steep hills or slippery roads
may still allow the vehicle to move if you remove your foot from the brake
pedal.
If a vehicle unexpectedly moves, it may cause a crash resulting in serious
injury or death.
Never activate the automatic brake hold system or rely on it to keep a
vehicle from moving when stopped on a steep hill or slippery roads.
Using the automatic brake hold system to park the vehicle may result in the
vehicle unexpectedly moving.
If a vehicle moves unexpectedly, it may cause a crash, resulting in serious
injury or death.
Never leave the vehicle when braking is temporarily kept by automatic
brake hold and always park the vehicle by putting the transmission in P
and applying the parking brake.
When using the automatic brake hold, keep your foot on the brake pedal
until the automatic brake hold indicator comes on. If the vehicle
unexpectedly moves, it may cause a crash resulting in serious injury or
death. Release your foot from the brake pedal after the automatic brake
hold indicator comes on.
Turning on the System
[1 ] Fasten your seat belt properly, then start the
power system. Press the automatic brake
hold button (a).
≫
The automatic brake hold system indicator (b)
comes on, and then the system goes into
standby mode.
2
Driving Operation > Braking
108
b U.S. models
c Canadian models
[2 ] Depress the brake pedal to come to a
complete stop while the transmission into
D .
≫
The automatic brake hold indicator (a) comes
on, and then the automatic brake hold activates.
Take your foot off the brake pedal.
≫
The automatic brake is held for up to 10
minutes.
The next time the power system is turned on, if the driver’s seat belt is fastened, the
system will return to standby mode.
!
Make sure to turn off the automatic brake hold system before using an
automated car wash.
System OFF
When you press the automatic brake hold button
(a), the system is turned off.
If the indicator (b) is lit up, turn off the system
while depressing the brake pedal.
If the system is turned off, it will remain off the next time the power system is started.
The system automatically cancels when:
You engage the parking brake.
You depress the brake pedal and put the shift position into P or R .
The system will automatically cancel and the parking brake will be applied when
the following conditions are met:
Braking is kept for more than 10 minutes.
The driver’s seat belt is unfastened.
The power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF.
There is a problem with automatic brake hold system.
2
Driving Operation > Braking
109
2
Driving Operation
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
ABS helps maintain steering control and vehicle posture by preventing the wheels
from locking up during sudden braking or braking on slippery surfaces when driving at
speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h).
≫
The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also balances the
front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading.
≫
You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always keeping firm,
steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as “stomp and steer.”
The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is working. Depress the brake pedal and
keep holding the pedal firmly down.
The ABS is not designed for the purpose of reducing the time or distance it takes for a vehicle
to stop: it is designed to limit brake lockup which can lead to skidding and loss of steering
control.
!
The ABS may not function properly if tire type and size are mixed.
Make sure to use the same size and type of tire, and the air pressures
as specified.
!
If the ABS indicator comes on while driving, there may be a problem
with the system.
While normal braking will not be affected, have your vehicle checked by a
dealer immediately.
2
Driving Operation > Braking
110
2
Driving Operation >
Starting and Driving
Starting to Drive
[1 ] Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, select the shift position.
≫
If you turned off the power system with the remote engine start feature, depress the
brake pedal and press the POWER button before changing the shift position.
[2 ] Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to
pull away.
≫
The parking brake will release automatically. You can also release it by operating the
parking brake switch.
Parking Brake
u
P.104
When the power system was turned on with the remote engine start feature, the
power system stops when the shift position is taken out of P before the POWER
button is pressed.
≫
To start driving, restart the power system and follow step 1.
Turn on Power System
u
P.98
!
Do not select N while driving as you will lose regenerative braking
(and acceleration) performance.
!
As a hybrid vehicle, the sounds and vibrations from the engine may be
absent even though the vehicle is ready for driving. It also makes you
fail to recognize that you can start.
Check the vehicle status with the READY indicator.
!
If the power mode is set to ACCESSORY while driving, the power
system will shut down and all steering and brake power assist
functions will stop, making it difficult to control the vehicle.
!
During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation, avoid sudden
acceleration or full throttle operation so as not to damage the engine
or powertrain.
111
2
Driving Operation
!
Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km) after purchasing
your new vehicle or replacing the brake pads or rotors to allow for
proper break-in.
Hill Start Assist System
Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from
rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.
≫
Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from rolling downhill on a very steep slope, and
will not operate on small inclines.
Creeping
This vehicle creeps when the shift position is in D or R .
≫
Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped or ensure that brake-hold is engaged.
Automatic Brake Hold
u
P.107
2
Driving Operation > Starting and Driving
112
2
Driving Operation >
Parking Your Vehicle
When Stopped
[1 ] Depress the brake pedal firmly and come to a complete stop.
[2 ] With the brake pedal depressed, pull up the electric parking brake switch slowly,
but fully.
[3 ] Change the shift position to P .
3 WARNING
The vehicle can roll away if left unattended without confirming that Park is
engaged. A vehicle that rolls away could cause a crash resulting in serious
injury or death.
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal until you have confirmed that
P
is shown on the shift position indicator.
!
Always set the parking brake, especially if you are parked on an incline.
!
The following may damage the driveline or cause the power system to
overheat and fail:
Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals simultaneously.
Changing to P before the vehicle stops completely.
Holding the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal when facing uphill.
!
Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects. Heat from the
exhaust can cause a fire.
!
In extremely cold temperatures, do not apply the parking brake but, if
parking on a slope, either turn the front wheels so they will contact the
curb if the vehicle rolls down the slope or block the wheels to keep the
vehicle from moving.
If you do not take either precaution, the vehicle may roll unexpectedly, leading
to a crash.
113
2
Driving Operation
2
Driving Operation >
Rear View Camera
About Rear View Camera
When the shift position is changed to R , the vehicle’s rear view is automatically
displayed on the screen.
If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture, use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens
clean and free of debris.
Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing up. Certain conditions (such as weather,
lighting, and high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do not rely on the rearview
display which does not give you all information about conditions at the back of your vehicle.
The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see the corner ends of the bumper or what is
underneath the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects appear closer or farther than they
actually are.
!
If the vehicle’s rear view is not displayed on the screen while the shift
position is in R , there may be a problem with the system. Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
Switching Camera Modes
You can view three different camera modes on the screen. Select the appropriate icon
to switch the mode.
a Wide view mode
b Normal view mode
c Top down view mode
d Bumper
If you were last using Wide view mode or Normal view mode, the same view mode will be
displayed the next time you change the shift position to R .
If you were using Top down view mode before you turned off the power mode, Wide view
mode will be displayed the next time you turn on the power mode and change the shift
position to
R .
114
If you were using Top down view mode and about 10 seconds elapsed after you changed the
shift position out of R , Wide view mode will be displayed the next time you change the shift
position to R .
If you were using Top down view mode and change the shift position back to R within about
10 seconds after you changed it out of R , Top down view mode will be displayed.
Distance between the vehicle and guideline
a Camera
b Approx. 39 inches (1m)
c Approx. 20 inches (50 cm)
Both the Fixed Guideline (which indicates distance between your vehicle and the
rear surroundings) and Dynamic Guideline (which moves based on steering
operation) can be turned on and off.
Customized Features
u
P.202
!
The guidelines should be used as a reference only.
The positions/distances indicated by the guidelines and camera views on the
display may differ from the actual positions/distances due to the changes in the
vehicle height, road conditions, and other factors.
2
Driving Operation > Rear View Camera
115
2
Driving Operation
2
Driving Operation >
Refueling
Fuel Information
Fuel Recommendation
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher
Use of a lower octane gasoline can cause a persistent, heavy metallic knocking noise
that can lead to engine damage.
≫
Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such as ethanol. Your vehicle is designed to
operate on oxygenated gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol by volume. Do not use gasoline
containing methanol. If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try another service
station or switch to another brand of gasoline.
!
We recommend quality gasoline containing detergent additives that
help prevent fuel system and engine deposits. In addition, in order to
maintain good performance, fuel economy, and emissions control, we
strongly recommend the use of gasoline that does NOT contain
harmful manganese-based fuel additives such as MMT, if such
gasoline is available.
Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely affect performance, and
cause the malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on. If
this happens, contact a dealer for service.
Top Tier Detergent Gasoline
Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Honda
endorses the use of “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” where available to help maintain
the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline meets a
new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive manufacturers to
meet the needs of today’s advanced engines.
Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met
“TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” standards at the retail location. This fuel is
guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic
additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic
additives in gasoline, help avoid buildup of deposits in your engine and emission
control system.
For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on
gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit www.hondacars.com. In Canada, visit
www.honda.ca (English), www.honda.ca/fr (French) for additional information on
gasoline. For more information on top tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.
116
Fuel Tank Capacity
12.81 US gal (48.5L)
How to Refuel
Your fuel tank is not equipped with a fuel filler cap. You can insert the filler nozzle
directly into the filler neck. The tank seals itself again when you pull out the filler
nozzle.
[1 ] Stop your vehicle with the service station
pump on the left side of the vehicle in the
rear.
[2 ] Set the power mode to OFF and then unlock
the driver’s door.
≫
The fuel fill door (a) will unlock.
[3 ] Press and release the area indicated by the
arrow (b). You will hear a click and the lid
will open slightly.
[4 ] Manually pull the fuel fill door to a fully open
position.
[5 ] Place the end of the filler nozzle on the lower
part of filler opening, then insert it slowly
and fully.
≫
Make sure that the end of the filler nozzle goes
down along with the filler pipe.
≫
Keep the filler nozzle level.
≫
When the tank is full, the filler nozzle will click
off automatically.
≫
If you do not fill up the tank to full, always add a
minimum of 1.3 US gal (5 L) of fuel.
≫
After filling, wait about five seconds before
removing the filler nozzle.
[6 ] Shut the fuel fill door by hand.
The fuel filler opening is designed to accept only service station filler nozzles for refueling. Use
of smaller diameter tubes (e.g., those used to siphon fuel for other uses) or other non-service
station devices can damage the area in and around the filler opening.
The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in the fuel tank so that fuel does not
overflow as a result of changes in air temperature. Do not continue to add fuel after the filler
nozzle has automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed the full tank capacity and cause
fuel to spill.
If you repeatedly fill the tank with less than the specified minimum amount of fuel, the
malfunction indicator lamp may come on. If this happens, have your vehicle checked by a
dealer.
2
Driving Operation > Refueling
117
2
Driving Operation
Use the lock tab or the master door lock switch to unlock the fuel fill door. The vehicle doors
and fuel fill door automatically relock if the remote unlock function is used. This can be
deactivated by briefly opening then closing the driver’s door.
Using the Walk Away Auto Lock® feature will also lock the fuel fill door. Always make sure both
the driver’s door and fuel fill door are unlocked before attempting to open the fuel fill door.
Locking the Doors and Trunk (Walk Away Auto Lock®)
u
P.61
If the filler nozzle keeps turning off when the tank is not full, there may be a problem with the
pump’s fuel vapor recovery system. Try filling at another pump. If this does not fix the
problem, consult a dealer.
If you have to refuel your vehicle from a portable container, use the funnel provided with your
vehicle.
Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container
u
P.383
3 WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive.
You can be burned or seriously injured when handling fuel.
Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks, and flames away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
Fuel Economy and CO
2
Emissions
Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO
2
Emissions
Achieving fuel economy and reducing CO
2
emissions is dependent on several factors,
including driving conditions, load weight, idling time, driving habits, and vehicle
condition. Depending on these and other factors, you may not achieve the rated fuel
economy of this vehicle.
Direct calculation is the recommended method to determine actual fuel consumed
while driving.
Miles driven ÷ Gallons of fuel = Miles per Gallon
100 × Liters of fuel ÷ Kilometers driven = L per 100 km
In Canada, posted fuel economy numbers are established following a simulated test.
For more information on how this test is performed, please visit https://
www.nrcan.gc.ca and search for “fuel consumption testing” in the search field at the
top of the page.
Maintenance and Fuel Economy
You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle.
Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the
driver information interface.
2
Driving Operation > Refueling
118
Use engine oil with the viscosity recommended.
Recommended Engine Oil
u
P.322
Maintain the specified tire pressure.
Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo.
Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicle’s underside adds weight
and increases wind resistance.
2
Driving Operation > Refueling
119
2
Driving Operation
2
Driving Operation >
Turn Signals/Light Switches
Turn Signals
Turn signal (a)
Push the lever up or down based on the direction
you want to turn, and the turn signal will blink.
≫
The turn signal indicator will blink when the
external turn signal blinks.
One-touch turn signal (b)
When you lightly push the lever up or down and
release it, the turn signal will blink three times.
≫
If you lightly push the lever in the opposite direction
while it is blinking, the blinking will stop.
Headlights/Parking Lights
The lights will turn on automatically depending on
the ambient brightness.
They can also be switched on and off manually.
≫
The lights on indicator in the instrument panel
will turn on.
The exterior lights will switch on automatically
when the light switch is set to AUTO while the
power mode is in ON.
Manual operation
Headlights/parking lights:
Turn the light switch to .
Parking lights:
Turn the light switch to .
Headlight/parking lights off:
Turn the light switch to OFF and release it while the transmission is in P and the
parking brake is applied.
The lights will come back on automatically when:
≫
The light switch is turned to OFF again and released.
≫
The transmission is changed out of P and the parking brake is released.
When the parking lights are on, the side marker, tail, and rear license plate lights will
also switch on.
120
The light sensor is in the location shown below.
Do not cover the light sensor.
4
Models without automatic
intermittent wipers
a Light Sensor
4
Models with automatic
intermittent wipers
a Light Sensor
4
U.S. models
You can change the auto light sensitivity setting.
Customized Features
u
P.202
4
All models
!
When the light switch is turned to or and the power is turned
to OFF, a beeper sounds when the driver’s door is opened.
2
Driving Operation > Turn Signals/Light Switches
121
2
Driving Operation
!
When the light switch is turned to AUTO and the ambient light levels
are low, the headlights and parking lights will switch on if you unlock a
door. They will switch off when the door is locked.
!
If you suspect that the headlights are not positioned properly, have the
vehicle inspected by a dealer.
High Beams
When the headlights are on, push the lever
forward.
Pull the lever back to return to low beams.
The high beam indicator in the instrument
panel will turn on when the high beams are on.
Flashing the high beams: Pull the lever back, and
release it.
Headlight Integration with Wipers
The headlights automatically come on when the wipers are used several times within
a certain number of intervals with the headlight switch in AUTO.
The headlights automatically go off a few minutes later if the wipers are stopped.
This feature activates while the headlights are off in AUTO.
The instrument panel brightness does not change when the headlights come on.
At dark ambient light levels, the automatic lighting control feature turns on the
headlights, regardless of the number of wiper sweeps.
You can turn the headlight integration with wipers function on and off.
Customized Features
u
P.202
Automatic Lighting Off Feature
The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off 15
seconds after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF, take the keyless remote with
you, and close the driver’s door.
If you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF with the headlight switch on, but do not
open the door, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (3 minutes, if the switch is in the
AUTO position).
The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the driver’s door.
If you unlock the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off.
2
Driving Operation > Turn Signals/Light Switches
122
If you open the driver’s door, you will hear a reminder chime alerting you that the
lights are on.
You can change the headlight auto off timer setting.
Customized Features
u
P.202
Daytime Running Lights
The parking/daytime running lights come on when the following conditions have been
met:
The power mode is in ON.
The headlight switch is in AUTO or .
The parking brake is released.
The lights remain on even if you set the parking brake.
Setting the power mode to VEHICLE OFF will turn off the daytime running lights.
The daytime running lights are off once the headlight switch is turned on, or when the
headlight switch is in AUTO and it is getting darker outside.
Auto High-Beam
The front sensor camera detects the light sources ahead of the vehicle such as the
lights of a preceding or oncoming vehicle, or street lights. When you are driving at
night, the system automatically switches the headlights between low beam and high
beam depending on the situation.
How to use the auto high-beam
Activating the system
When all of the following conditions have been met, the auto high-beam indicator
comes on and automatically switches between the high beam and low beam,
depending on the situation.
a Auto High-Beam Indicator
b Light Switch
The power mode is in ON.
The light switch is in AUTO.
The lever is in the low beam position.
The headlights have been automatically activated.
It is dark outside the vehicle.
If the auto high-beam indicator does not come on even when all the conditions have
been met, carry out either of the procedures below and the indicator will come on.
2
Driving Operation > Turn Signals/Light Switches
123
2
Driving Operation
Pull the lever toward you and release it.
Turn the light switch to then turn the light switch to AUTO.
The auto high-beam system does not always operate in every situation. This system is
just for assisting the driver. Always observe your surroundings and manually switch
the headlights between high beam and low beam if necessary.
The range and the distance at which the camera can recognize light sources varies
depending on conditions surrounding your vehicle.
Regarding the handling of the camera mounted to the inside of the windshield, refer
to the following.
Front Sensor Camera
u
P.233
For the auto high-beam to work properly:
Do not place an object that reflects light on the dashboard.
Keep the windshield around the camera clean.
When cleaning the windshield, be careful not to apply the windshield cleanser to the camera
lens.
Do not attach an object, sticker, or film to the area around the camera.
Do not touch the camera lens.
If the camera receives a strong impact, or repairing of the area near the camera is
required, consult a dealer.
How to turn off the Auto High-Beam System: You can turn the auto high-beam
system on and off.
Customized Features
u
P.202
If you find the timing of beam changes inconvenient for driving, change the headlight
beams manually.
If the Some driver assist systems cannot operate: Camera temperature too high
message appears:
Use the climate control system to cool down the interior and, if necessary, also use defroster
mode with the airflow directed toward the camera.
Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield temperature, which cools down the area
around the camera.
If the Some driver assist systems cannot operate: Clean front windshield or poor
viewing condition. message appears:
Park your vehicle in a safe place, and make sure the windshield is clean. Clean the windshield
if it is dirty. If the message does not disappear after the vehicle has been driven for a while,
have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Automatic switching between high-beam and low-beam
When the auto high-beam indicator comes on, the headlights switch between high
beam and low beam based on the following conditions.
High beam
All of the following conditions must be met before the high beams turn on.
Your vehicle speed is 25 mph (40 km/h) or more.
There are no preceding or oncoming vehicles with headlights or taillights turned on.
There are few street lights on the road ahead.
2
Driving Operation > Turn Signals/Light Switches
124
Low beam
One of the following conditions must be met before the low beams turn on.
Your vehicle speed is 15 mph (24 km/h) or less.
There is a preceding or oncoming vehicle with headlights or taillights turned on.
There are many street lights on the road ahead.
Manual switching between high-beam and low-beam
If you want to manually switch the headlights between high beam and low beam,
follow either of the procedures below. Note that when you do this, the auto high-
beam indicator will turn off and the auto high-beam will be deactivated.
Using the lever:
Pull the lever toward you for flashing the high beams and then release it.
≫
To reactivate the auto high-beam, follow either of the procedures below and the auto high-
beam indicator will come on.
Pull the lever toward you and release it.
Turn the light switch to and then to AUTO when the lever is in the low beam position.
Using the light switch:
Turn the light switch to .
≫
To reactivate the auto high-beam, turn the light switch to AUTO when the lever is in the low
beam position, and the auto high-beam indicator will come on.
In the following cases, the auto high-beam system may not switch the headlights
properly or the switching timing may be changed. If the automatic switching
operation does not fit your driving habits, please switch the headlights manually.
The brightness of the lights from a preceding or oncoming vehicle is intense or poor.
Visibility is poor due to the weather (rain, snow, fog, windshield frost, etc.).
Surrounding light sources like street lights, electric billboards, and traffic lights are
illuminating the road ahead.
The brightness level of the road ahead constantly changes.
The road is bumpy or has many curves.
A vehicle suddenly appears in front of you, or a vehicle in front of you is not in the preceding or
oncoming direction.
Your vehicle is tilted with a heavy load in the rear.
A traffic sign, mirror, or other reflective object ahead is reflecting strong light toward the
vehicle.
The oncoming vehicle frequently disappears under roadside trees or behind median barriers.
The preceding or oncoming vehicle is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter, or other small
vehicle.
The auto high-beam system keeps the headlight low beamon when:
Windshield wipers are operating at a high speed.
The camera has detected a dense fog.
2
Driving Operation > Turn Signals/Light Switches
125
2
Driving Operation
2
Driving Operation >
Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wiper/Washer
4
Models with manual intermittent
operation
a MIST
The wipers run at high speed until you release the
lever.
b OFF
c INT
Low speed with intermittent
d LO
Low speed wipe
e HI
High speed wipe
f Intermittent Time Adjustment Ring
Turn the adjustment ring to adjust the wiper
operation.
: Lower speed, fewer sweeps
: Higher speed, more sweeps
g Pull to use washer
Sprays while you pull the lever toward you.
When you release the lever for more than one
second, the spray stops, the wipers sweep two or
three more times to clear the windshield, and then
stop.
126
4
Models with automatic intermittent
operation
a MIST
The wipers run at high speed until you release the
lever.
b OFF
c AUTO
d LO
Low speed wipe
e HI
High speed wipe
f AUTO sensitivity adjustment
You can adjust the sensitivity of the rainfall sensor.
− : Low sensitivity
+ : High sensitivity
g Pull to use washer
Sprays while you pull the lever toward you.
When you release the lever for more than
one second, the spray stops, the wipers sweep twoor
three more times to clear the windshield, andthen
stop.
4
Models with manual intermittent operation
If the vehicle speeds up while the wipers are operating intermittently, the length of the wipe
interval shortens.
When the vehicle speeds up, the wiper operation’s shortest delay setting and the LO
setting become the same.
4
All models
!
When lifting the front wiper arms, move them into the maintenance
position before lifting them.
Lifting the Wiper Arms
u
P.331
!
Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry. The windshield will
get scratched, or the rubber blades will get damaged.
2
Driving Operation > Wipers and Washers
127
2
Driving Operation
!
Turn the washers off if no washer fluid comes out. The pump may get
damaged.
Automatic Intermittent Wipers
*
When you push the lever down to AUTO, the
windshield wipers sweep once, and go into the
automatic mode.
The wipers operate intermittently, at low speed,
or at high speed and stop in accordance with the
amount of rainfall the rainfall sensor detects.
≫
If the sensor reacts to something other than rain and
the wipers operate unnecessarily, you can stop them
by moving the lever to the OFF position.
a Rainfall Sensor
The rainfall sensor is located at the top of the
middle of the front windshield.
AUTO should always be turned OFF before the following situations in order to prevent
severe damage to the wiper system:
Cleaning the windshield
Driving through a car wash
No rain present
What to Do If
When the wipers are not moving
The wiper motor may stop temporarily to prevent an overload.
Wiper operation will return to normal within a few minutes.
*: Not available on all models
2
Driving Operation > Wipers and Washers
128
When the wiper blades are stuck to the windshield glass due to
freezing in cold weather
In cold weather, the blades may freeze to the windshield.
Operating the wipers in this condition may damage the wipers. Use the defogger to
warm the windshield, then turn the wipers on.
When snow has accumulated on the wipers
If the wipers stop operating due to an obstacle such as the buildup of snow, park
the vehicle in a safe place.
Rotate the wiper switch to OFF, set the power mode to ACCESSORY or VEHICLE
OFF, then remove the obstacle.
2
Driving Operation > Wipers and Washers
129
2
Driving Operation
2
Driving Operation >
Defroster
Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
When defogging the front or side windows
Pressing the button turns the air conditioning
system on and automatically switches the system
to fresh air mode.
Press the button again to turn off, and the
system returns to the previous settings.
Rear defogger/heated door mirror
*
button
Press the rear defogger and heated door mirror
*
button to defog the rear window and mirrors
*
when the power mode is in ON.
The rear defogger and heated door mirror
*
automatically switch off after 10-30 minutes,
depending on the outside temperature. However, if the outside temperature is 32°F （0°C）
or below, it does not automatically switch off.
4
Models with heated door mirror
When the power mode is set to ON and the outside temperature is below 41°F (5°C), the
heated door mirror may automatically activate for 10 minutes.
4
All models
!
For your safety, make sure you have a clear view through all the
windows before driving.
*: Not available on all models
130
!
After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air mode.
If you keep the system in recirculation mode, the windows may fog up from
humidity. This impedes visibility.
!
Do not set the temperature near the lower limit.
When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the windshield may fog up.
!
This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off when the window
has been defogged.
This may weaken the 12–volt battery, making it difficult to turn the power
system on.
What to Do If
To rapidly defrost the windows
[1 ] Press the button.
[2 ] Press the button (indicator on).
When the side window gets fogged up
Adjust the nearest climate control vent so that it blows directly on the side window.
2
Driving Operation > Defroster
131
2
Driving Operation
2
Driving Operation >
Driving Features
AUTO/EV/CHARGE Mode
You can press the e-button (a) to select EV mode. Press and hold the e-button to
select CHARGE mode. Press and hold again to select AUTO mode.
≫
Depending on vehicle or driving conditions, you may not be able to change out of AUTO mode,
or AUTO mode may be selected automatically.
b AUTO Mode Indicator
c EV Mode Indicator
d CHARGE Mode Indicator
AUTO Mode
When driving, your vehicle is propelled exclusively by the electric motor, exclusively
by the gasoline engine, or by a combination of the two. The system selects which
propulsion source is most appropriate and automatically switches to it.
EV Mode
When
EV mode is activated, your vehicle is propelled exclusively by the electric
motor.
CHARGE Mode
When
CHARGE mode is activated, the engine starts and the High Voltage battery
begins charging.
Drive Mode System
Selecting the Drive Mode
Press the DRIVE MODE switch (a) to select a mode. The mode you select appears
on the driver information interface.
132
The mode may not be able to be changed under some driving conditions. If there is a
vehicle system failure, a message will also appear on the driver information interface,
and you cannot change the mode.
INDIVIDUAL Mode
Customize each category to suit the driver’s preference.
Customizing the INDIVIDUAL Settings
u
P.134
SPORT Mode
Enhances responsiveness to the driver’s input.
NORMAL Mode
Optimizes the balance between operability and comfort.
ECON Mode
Facilitates
fuel-efficient driving.
≫
While in ECON mode, the climate control system will be less effective and the vehicle
slower to accelerate.
Next Start-Up Mode
The mode for the next start-up is saved according to the following chart.
4
Models with driving position memory system
Each keyless remote has its own mode saved.
Last Mode Next Mode
Any mode other than ECON NORMAL
ECON ECON
2
Driving Operation > Driving Features
133
2
Driving Operation
Customizing the INDIVIDUAL Settings
[1 ] Select INDIVIDUAL mode.
[2 ] Press the DRIVE MODE switch up and hold or select Customize to open the
INDIVIDUAL Settings.
≫
You can also select from customized features on the audio/information screen.
Customized Features
u
P.202
[3 ] Select the setting category.
[4 ] Select the desired setting.
When you select Reset to Default on the INDIVIDUAL Settings screen, all
INDIVIDUAL settings are reset to their factory defaults.
Deceleration Paddle Selector
You can use the paddles on the steering wheel to change the rate of deceleration
(between six stages) when you release the accelerator pedal.
When descending a hill, you can use the deceleration paddle selector to help
maintain the rate of deceleration, thereby allowing you to keep a safe distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
3 CAUTION
Increasing the deceleration rate by quickly shifting the deceleration paddle
selector can cause the tires to skid, resulting in a crash that could injure or
kill someone. Always maintain a reasonable rate of deceleration.
How to Operate the Deceleration Paddle Selector
Each paddle operation changes the deceleration level by 1.
≫
The deceleration rate only changes by one stage even if you keep the paddle pulled back.
≫
If you pull back the right and left paddle selector at the same time, the deceleration stage
may not change.
2
Driving Operation > Driving Features
134
a Pull back on the − paddle (left side)
≫
Rate of deceleration increases.
b Pull back on the + paddle (right side)
≫
Rate of deceleration decreases.
c Deceleration Paddle Selector Indicator: Shows the rate of deceleration.
d M Indicator: Appears when the rate of deceleration is fixed.
Using the deceleration paddle selector
The deceleration rate display comes on when you pull back on the paddle while the
shift position is in D .
When you decelerate to a near stop or press down on the accelerator, the
deceleration rate selector is automatically canceled, and the deceleration rate
display goes off.
Using the paddle selector with a fixed rate of deceleration
If you keep the
− paddle pulled back or switch to SPORT mode while the shift
position is in D , the M display and deceleration rate display appear, and you can
use the deceleration rate selector with a fixed setting.
To unlock the fixed deceleration paddle selector, pull and hold back the + paddle
or turn off the SPORT mode.
Deceleration Paddle Selector Limitations
In the following situations, the stage may not change and the stage icon will blink
even if you pull back the selector. The deceleration stage may decrease or cancel
automatically when:
Hybrid system protection is needed.
The brake pad temperature is too hot.
2
Driving Operation > Driving Features
135
2
Driving Operation
When the parking brake and brake system indicator (amber) comes on.
Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System
This system makes a sound to alert people that your vehicle is nearby when you are
driving at a speed of about 22 mph (36 km/h) or less.
Vehicle Stability Assist™ (VSA®), aka Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), System
VSA® helps stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less than
what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces. It does
so by regulating propulsion output and selectively applying the brakes.
≫
The main function of the VSA® system is generally known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC).
The system also includes a traction control function.
!
VSA® cannot enhance stability in all driving situations and does not
control the entire braking system. You still need to drive and corner at
speeds appropriate for the conditions and always leave a sufficient
margin of safety.
!
The VSA® may not function properly if tire type and size are mixed.
Make sure to use the same size and type of tire and the air pressures
as specified.
VSA® Operation
When VSA® activates, the VSA® system indicator
(a) will also blink.
≫
The engine and motor do not respond to the
accelerator.
≫
You may also notice some noise from the hydraulic
brake system.
2
Driving Operation > Driving Features
136
!
When the VSA® system indicator comes on and stays on while driving,
there may be a problem with the system.
While this may not interfere with normal driving, have your vehicle checked by a
dealer immediately.
VSA® On and Off
a VSA OFF Indicator
You can partially disable VSA® features using the
driver information interface.
The traction control function becomes less
effective. This allows for the wheels to spin more
freely at low speed.
Switching the Display
u
P.297
Vehicle Stability Assist Mode
u
P.304
Even if the system is turned off, it will automatically turn on every time the power
mode is turned on.
!
In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets stuck in shallow
mud or fresh snow, it may be easier to free it with the VSA® temporarily
switched off. Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to switch
VSA® on again.
Motion Management System
Lightly decelerates, as needed, when you turn the steering wheel, and helps support
the vehicle’s stability and performance during cornering.
When the brake system indicator comes on and stays on while driving, the motion
management system may not activate.
You may hear an operating noise while the motion management system is activated.
The brake lights may come on while the motion management system is activated.
!
The motion management system cannot enhance stability in all driving
situations. You still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate for
the conditions and always leave a sufficient margin of safety.
2
Driving Operation > Driving Features
137
2
Driving Operation
4 U.S. models
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
b Appears when any one tire is
significantly under-inflated.
(e.g., a front right side tire)
c Appears when two or more
tires are significantly under-
inflated.
Instead of directly measuring the pressure in
each tire, the TPMS on this vehicle monitors and
compares the rolling radius and rotational
characteristics of each wheel and tire while you
are driving to determine if one or more tires are
significantly under-inflated.
This will cause the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator (a) to come on and a message to
appear.
The system does not monitor the tires when driving at low speed.
Conditions such as low ambient temperature and altitude change directly affect tire pressure
and can trigger the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come on.
Tires can become under-inflated in colder weather.
Tires can become overinflated in warmer weather.
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator will not come on as a result of overinflation.
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on with a delay or may not come on
at all when:
You rapidly accelerate, decelerate, or turn the steering wheel.
You drive on snowy or slippery roads.
The tire loses air pressure rapidly.
Tire chains
*
are used.
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on under the following conditions:
There is a heavier and uneven load on the tires than the condition at calibration.
Tire chains
*
are used.
System Calibration
You must start calibration every time you adjust the pressure in one or more tires,
rotate the tires, or replace one or more tires.
*: Not available on all models
2
Driving Operation > Driving Features
138
When you calibrate the system, do the following:
Audio System Basic Operation with 12.3" Color
Touchscreen
u
P.162
[1 ] Select Home.
[2 ] Select Vehicle Settings.
[3 ] Select TPMS Calibration.
[4 ] Select Calibrate.
≫
Calibration starts.
≫
If the Calibration Failed to Start message
appears, repeat the procedure.
≫
The calibration process finishes automatically.
Make sure the vehicle is at a complete stop and the shift position is in P when you calibrate
the system.
Set the cold tire pressure in all four tires before calibrating the system.
Checking Tires
u
P.333
If the tire chains
*
are installed, remove them before calibrating.
The calibration process requires approximately 30 minutes of cumulative driving at speeds
between 30-60 mph (48-97 km/h). During this period, if the ignition is turned on and the
vehicle is not moved within a certain amount of time, you may notice the low tire pressure
indicator comes on briefly. This is normal and indicates that the calibration process is not yet
complete.
!
The system may not function properly if tire type and size are mixed.
Make sure to use the same size and type of tire as specified.
!
If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on even when the
properly inflated specified regular tires are installed, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal
Explanation
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label.
*: Not available on all models
2
Driving Operation > Driving Features
139
2
Driving Operation
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,
you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped
with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a
low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction
indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire
pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the
telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
2
Driving Operation > Driving Features
140
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may
not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on
the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one
or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
2
Driving Operation > Driving Features
141
2
Driving Operation
Interior Lights
Interior Light Switches････････････････････････ 143
Map Light Switches････････････････････････････ 143
Interior Convenience Items
Glove Box･･････････････････････････････････････145
Center Console Box････････････････････････････145
Accessory Power Socket･･･････････････････････145
Wireless Charger･･････････････････････････････ 146
Coat Hook･････････････････････････････････････ 149
Sunglasses Holder･････････････････････････････149
Beverage Holders
･･････････････････････････････
150
Cargo Hooks
･･･････････････････････････････････
151
Under-Floor Storage Area
･････････････････････
151
Seat Heaters/Ventilators
*
Using the Front Seat Heaters/Ventilators
*
･････ 152
Using the Rear Seat Heaters
*
･･････････････････
153
Heated Steering Wheel
*
Using the Heated Steering Wheel
･･････････････
154
Moonroof
Opening/Closing the Moonroof････････････････ 155
What to Do If･･････････････････････････････････ 156
Climate Control System
Automatic Climate Control System････････････ 157
Using Automatic Climate Control･･････････････ 158
In-Vehicle Infotainment
About Your In-Vehicle Infotainment･･･････････ 161
Audio System Basic Operation････････････････ 162
USB Ports･･････････････････････････････････････164
Audio Remote Controls････････････････････････ 165
Connecting a Device･･･････････････････････････ 166
About System Updates････････････････････････ 168
12.3" Color Touchscreen Basic
Operations
Start Up･･･････････････････････････････････････ 169
Reboot Audio･･････････････････････････････････ 170
Home Screen･･････････････････････････････････ 170
System Updates･･･････････････････････････････ 171
Trip Computer･････････････････････････････････ 173
Clock･･････････････････････････････････････････ 173
Adjusting the Sound･･･････････････････････････ 175
Changing the Display Settings･････････････････ 176
Alexa Built-In･･････････････････････････････････ 176
Playing AM/FM Radio･･････････････････････････ 178
About Audio Playback･････････････････････････ 180
Google built-in
*
････････････････････････････････ 184
User Information･･････････････････････････････ 185
Power Flow････････････････････････････････････ 187
12.3" Color Touchscreen Other
Operations
HondaLink®････････････････････････････････････ 190
HondaLink® Service････････････････････････････191
Wi‑Fi Connection･･････････････････････････････ 191
AT&T Hotspot･･････････････････････････････････ 192
Apple CarPlay･････････････････････････････････ 193
Android Auto™･････････････････････････････････ 195
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®････････････････････197
12.3" Color Touchscreen Customized
Features
Customized Features･･････････････････････････ 202
General Information on the Audio
System
Compatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives･･･
･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 212
Honda App License Agreement････････････････ 213
About Open Source Licenses･･････････････････ 225
License Information･･･････････････････････････ 225
Legal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto
･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 227
*: Not available on all models
Controls
142
3
Controls >
Interior Lights
Interior Light Switches
Front
Rear
a : ON
The interior lights come on regardless of whether
the doors are open or closed.
b : OFF
The interior lights remain off regardless of
whether the doors are open or closed.
c : Door activated
The interior lights come on in the following
situations:
When any doors are opened
When the driver’s door is unlocked
When the power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF
In the door activated position, the interior lights turn off about 30 seconds after the doors are
closed. When you unlock the driver’s door but do not open it, the lights turn off after about 30
seconds.
If you leave any of the doors open in VEHICLE OFF mode, the interior lights turn off after
about 15 minutes.
You can change the interior light’s dimming time.
Customized Features
u
P.202
!
To avoid draining the 12-volt battery, do not leave the interior light on
for an extended length of time when the power system is off.
Map Light Switches
This light is used for situations such as viewing a map at night while your vehicle is
stopped.
Press the switch to turn on the light; press it again to turn off the light.
143
3
Controls
Front seat
The map lights can be turned on and off by
pressing the buttons.
!
When the interior light switch is in the door activated position and any
door is open, the map lights will not turn off when you press the
buttons.
3
Controls > Interior Lights
144
3
Controls >
Interior Convenience Items
Glove Box
a Handle
b To Lock
Pull the handle to open the glove box. You can
lock the glove box with the built-in key.
3 WARNING
An open glove box can cause serious injury to your passenger in a crash,
even if the passenger is wearing the seat belt.
Always keep the glove box closed while driving.
Center Console Box
a Knob
Push in the lock knob to open the center console
box.
Accessory Power Socket
The accessory power socket can be used when the power mode is in ACCESSORY or
ON. Open the console lid and the cover to use it.
The accessory power socket is designed to supply power for 12-volt DC accessories
that are rated 180 watts (15 amps) or less.
145
3
Controls
Center console box
!
Do not insert an automotive–type cigarette lighter element.
This can overheat the accessory power socket.
!
To prevent 12-volt battery drain, only use the accessory power socket
with the power system on.
!
When the accessory power socket is not in use, close the cover to
prevent any small foreign objects from getting into the accessory
power socket.
Wireless Charger
About Wireless Charger
To use the wireless charger, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.
Charge any devices compatible with Qi wireless charging on the area indicated by the
mark as follows:
3
Controls > Interior Convenience Items
146
a (Power) Button
b Green Indicator
c Amber Indicator
d Charging Area
[1 ] To turn the system on and off, press and hold
the (power) button.
≫
When the system is activated, the green
indicator light comes on.
[2 ] Place the device you want to charge on the
charging area.
≫
The system will automatically start charging the
device, and the amber indicator light will come
on.
≫
Make sure that the device is compatible with
the system, and placed with the chargeable side
in the center of the charging area.
[3 ] When charging is completed, the green
indicator light will come on.
≫
Depending on the device, the amber indicator
light will stay on.
3 CAUTION
Metal objects between the charge pad and the device to be charged will get
hot and can burn you.
Always remove foreign objects from the charge pad before charging
the device.
Be sure the surface is clear of dust and other debris before charging.
Do not spill liquids (e.g., water, drinks, etc.) on the charger and the
device.
Do not use oil, grease, alcohol, benzine, or thinner for cleaning the
charge pad.
Do not cover the system with towels, clothing, or other objects while
charging.
Avoid spraying aerosols which may come in contact with the charge
pad surface.
!
This system consumes a lot of power. Do not use the system for a long
period of time when the power system is off. This may weaken the 12-
volt battery, making it difficult to turn the power system on.
!
When using the wireless charger, check the user’s manual that came
with the compatible device you want to charge.
3
Controls > Interior Convenience Items
147
3
Controls
!
Do not place any magnetic recording media or precision machines
within the charge area while charging. The data on your cards such as
credit cards can be lost because of the magnetic effect. Also, precision
machines such as watches can be affected.
!
Do not charge more than one device at a time on a charging area.
RF Radiation Exposure Statement:
4
U.S. models
This equipment complies with FCC RF Radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment.
This device and its antenna must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with
any other antenna or transmitter.
4
Canadian models
This equipment complies with ISED RF Radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment.
This device and its antenna must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with
any other antenna or transmitter.
4
All models
The wireless charger can support up to 15 W, but the charging rate varies based on
the device and other conditions.
appears on the audio/information screen when the device is being charged by the
wireless charger.
During the charging phase, it is normal for the charging area and the device to heat
up.
“Qi” and marks are the registered trademarks owned by Wireless Power
Consortium (WPC).
Charging may be briefly interrupted when:
All doors or the trunk are closed to avoid interference with the proper functioning of the
keyless access system.
In the following cases, charging may stop or not start:
The device is already fully charged.
The temperature of the device is extremely high while charging.
You are at a place that emits strong electromagnetic waves or noises, such as a TV station,
electric power plant, or gas station.
The device has a cover, case, or accessories which are not compatible with wireless charging.
A device may not charge if the size or shape of its chargeable side is not appropriate for use
with the charging area.
3
Controls > Interior Convenience Items
148
Indicator is blinking
Perform one of the following solutions:
When the Indicators (Green & Amber) Blink Simultaneously
≫
Remove the obstacle(s).
≫
Pick up and reset the device to the center of the charging area where is located.
≫
Temporarily suspend charging the device. Wait for the temperature to drop and attempt to
charge the device again.
When Indicator (Amber) is Blinking
≫
Contact a dealer for repairs.
Coat Hook
There is a coat hook on the rear left grab handle.
The coat hook is not designed for large or heavy items.
Sunglasses Holder
To open the sunglasses holder, press and release
the indent.
To close, press it again until it latches.
You can store sunglasses and other small items in
this holder.
!
Keep the holder closed while driving except when accessing stored
items.
3
Controls > Interior Convenience Items
149
3
Controls
Beverage Holders
Spilled liquids can damage the upholstery, carpeting, and electrical components in
the interior.
Front seat beverage holders
Located in the console between the front seats.
Door side beverage holders
Front
Located on both of the front and rear door side
pockets.
Rear
3
Controls > Interior Convenience Items
150
Rear seat beverage holders
Fold the armrest down to use the rear seat
beverage holders.
Cargo Hooks
The cargo hooks in the trunk can be used to
install a net for securing items.
!
Heavy objects may damage the hook. Make sure any items put on this
hook weigh less than 6.6 lbs (3 kg).
Distribute cargo evenly on the floor of the trunk, placing the heaviest items on the bottom and
as far forward as possible.
About Maximum Load Limit
u
P.92
Under-Floor Storage Area
a Floor Lid
b Under-Floor Storage Area
Pull up the trunk floor lid.
3
Controls > Interior Convenience Items
151
3
Controls
3
Controls >
Seat Heaters/Ventilators
*
Using the Front Seat Heaters/Ventilators
*
The seat heaters or ventilators
*
can be used when the power mode is in ON.
The seat heaters:
Use them to warm up the seat.
The seat ventilators:
Use them when you want to ventilate the surface of the seats.
When used with the air conditioning, the surface of the seats will become easier to
cool.
a Seat Heater Button
b Seat Ventilator Button
*
c AUTO Button
Press the seat heater or the seat ventilator
button:
Once - The HI setting (three indicators on)
Twice - The MID setting (two indicators on)
Three times - The LO setting (one indicator on)
Four times - The OFF setting (no indicators on)
When the power mode is turned on after it is turned off, the previous setting is maintained.
After a certain period of time, the strength setting for the front seat heaters will automatically
be reduced by one level at a time until the front seat heaters shut off. The elapsed time varies
according to the interior environment.
Press the AUTO button:
Both the air conditioner and seat temperature will automatically change to the setting most
suitable to the ambient environment.
≫
When the seat heater or the seat ventilator* button is pressed, settings will switch to
manual mode.
As time passes, the set temperature will fall, and eventually the seat heater will shut off.
The seat heater and seat ventilation may turn on if sensors detect weight on the passenger
seat due to cargo, etc.
To prevent automatic activation, you can turn off automatic climate control for the
front seat.
Customized Features
u
P.202
*: Not available on all models
152
3 WARNING
Heat induced burns are possible when using seat heaters.
Persons with a diminished ability to sense temperature (e.g., persons with
diabetes, lower limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or with sensitive skin
should not use seat heaters.
!
Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the power system is off.
Under such conditions, the 12-volt battery may be weakened, making
the power system difficult to start.
Using the Rear Seat Heaters
*
The seat heaters can be used when the power mode is in ON.
a Rear Seat Heater Button
Press the seat heater button:
Once - The HI setting (three indicators on)
Twice - The MID setting (two indicators on)
Three times - The LO setting (one indicator on)
Four times - The OFF setting (no indicators on)
There is no heater in the rear center seating position.
After a certain period of time, the strength setting for the rear seat heaters will automatically
be reduced by one level at a time until the rear seat heaters shuts off. The elapsed time varies
according to the interior environment.
3 WARNING
Heat induced burns are possible when using seat heaters.
Persons with a diminished ability to sense temperature (e.g., persons with
diabetes, lower limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or with sensitive skin
should not use seat heaters.
!
Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the power system is off.
Under such conditions, the 12-volt battery may be weakened, making
the power system difficult to start.
*: Not available on all models
3
Controls > Seat Heaters/Ventilators
*
153
3
Controls
3
Controls >
Heated Steering Wheel
*
Using the Heated Steering Wheel
The heated steering wheel can be used when the power mode is in ON.
When a comfortable temperature is reached, press the button again to turn it off.
a Heated Steering Wheel
Button
Press the button on the lower side of the steering
wheel.
The heated steering wheel is turned off every time you turn the power system on, even if you
turned it on the last time you drove the vehicle.
!
Do not use the heated steering wheel continuously when the power
system is off. Under such conditions, the 12-volt battery may be
weakened, making the power system difficult to start.
*: Not available on all models
154
3
Controls >
Moonroof
Opening/Closing the Moonroof
You can operate the moonroof when the power mode is in ON. Use the switch in the
front of the ceiling to open and close the moonroof.
a Open
b Close
c Tilt
Automatic operation
To open: Pull the switch back firmly.
To close: Push the switch forward firmly.
The moonroof automatically opens or closes all
the way. To stop the moonroof midway, pull or
push the switch briefly.
Manual operation
To open: Pull the switch back lightly, and hold it
until the desired position is reached.
To close: Push the switch forward lightly, and
hold it until the desired position is reached.
Tilting the moonroof up
To tilt: Push on the center of the moonroof
switch.
To close: Push the switch forward firmly, then
release.
3 WARNING
Opening or closing the moonroof on someone’s hands or fingers can cause
serious injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of the moonroof before opening or
closing it.
!
Opening the moonroof in below freezing temperature or when it is
covered with snow or ice can damage the moonroof panel or motor.
The moonroof can be operated for up to 10 minutes after you set the power mode to OFF.
Opening either front door cancels this function.
155
3
Controls
When resistance is detected, the auto reverse function causes the moonroof to change
directions, then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the moonroof is almost closed to
ensure that it fully closes.
Make sure that all objects, including fingers, are clear of the moonroof.
When you tilt open the moonroof, if the air conditioner is set to AUTO it will automatically
switch to fresh air mode to reduce wind noise. When you close the moonroof, depending on
the situation, it will change to recirculation or fresh air mode.
You can use the remote transmitter to operate the moonroof.
Opening the Windows with the Remote
u
P.89
What to Do If
When the moonroof does not close
The moonroof may get stuck if the auto reverse function activates in response to an
object preventing it from closing.
If this happens, lightly press and hold the switch in the closing direction for about
15 seconds to release the auto reverse function.
Continue holding the switch until the moonroof closes completely.
After taking these steps, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
3
Controls > Moonroof
156
3
Controls >
Climate Control System
Automatic Climate Control System
About Automatic Climate Control System
Explanations of Switches
a AUTO Button
Switches to automatic control.
b Driver’s Side Temperature Control Dial
Adjusts the driver’s side interior temperature.
c Fan Control Dial
Adjusts the fan speed.
d Passenger’s Side Temperature Control Dial
Adjusts the passenger’s side interior temperature.
e SYNC (Synchronization) Button
Synchronizes the temperature for the driver’s side and the passenger’s side.
f A/C (Air Conditioning) Button
Toggles of cooling/dehumidification function.
g (ON/OFF) Button
Activates or deactivates the climate control system.
h MODE Control Button
Dashboard vents and back of the center console
Floor vents
Dashboard and floor vents, and back of the center console
Floor and defroster vents
157
3
Controls
i (Recirculation) Button
Switches between Recirculation mode/Fresh air mode.
Recirculation (indicator light on):
Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior through the system.
Fresh air (indicator light off):
Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in fresh air mode in normal situations.
Using Automatic Climate Control
a AUTO Button
b Driver’s Side Temperature Control Dial
c Passenger’s Side Temperature Control Dial
d (ON/OFF) Button
The automatic climate control system maintains the interior temperature you select.
The system also selects the proper mix of heated or cooled air that raises or lowers
the interior temperature to your preference as quickly as possible.
Use the system when the power system is on.
[1 ] Press the AUTO button.
[2 ] Adjust the interior temperature using the driver’s side or passenger’s side
temperature control dial.
[3 ] Press the (ON/OFF) button to cancel.
If any buttons are pressed while using the climate control system in auto, the function of the
button that was pressed will take priority.
The auto button indicator will go off, but functions unrelated to the button that was pressed
will be controlled automatically.
While ECON mode is active, the climate control system may have reduced cooling
performance.
To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the fan may not start immediately when the
AUTO button is pressed.
For directions on the proper handling of the front seat heaters and seat ventilation, refer to
the following page.
Using the Front Seat Heaters/Ventilators*
u
P.152
3
Controls > Climate Control System
158
!
If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down more rapidly by
partially opening the windows, turning the system on auto, and setting
the temperature to low. Change the fresh air mode to recirculation
mode until the temperature cools down.
Synchronization Mode
You can set the temperature synchronously for the driver’s side and the passenger’s
side in synchronization mode.
Using synchronization mode
a Driver’s Side Temperature Control Dial
b SYNC Button
[1 ] Press the SYNC button.
≫
The system switches to synchronization mode.
[2 ] Adjust the temperature using the driver’s side temperature control dial.
Press the SYNC button or adjust the interior temperature using the passenger’s side
temperature control dial to return to dual mode.
When you press the button, the system changes to synchronization mode.
When the system is in synchronization mode, the driver’s side temperature and the
passenger’s side temperature cannot be set separately.
3
Controls > Climate Control System
159
3
Controls
Automatic Climate Control Sensors
a Sensor
a Sensor
The automatic climate control system is equipped
with sensors. Do not cover or spill any liquid on
them.
3
Controls > Climate Control System
160
3
Controls >
In-Vehicle Infotainment
About Your In-Vehicle Infotainment
The audio system features AM/FM radio. It can also play USB flash drives, iPod,
iPhone, smartphones, and Bluetooth® devices.
You can operate the audio system from the knob on the panel, the remote controls on
the steering wheel, or the icons on the touchscreen interface.
≫
To use this system, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.
Audio System Theft Protection
The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as
when the 12-volt battery is disconnected or goes dead. In certain conditions, the
system may display a code entry screen. If this occurs, reactivate the audio system.
Reactivating the audio system
[1 ] Set the power mode to ON.
[2 ] Turn on the audio system.
[3 ] Press and hold the audio system power knob for more than two seconds.
≫
The audio system is reactivated when the audio control unit establishes a connection
with the vehicle control unit. If the control unit fails to recognize the audio unit, you
must go to a dealer and have the audio unit checked.
161
3
Controls
Audio System Basic Operation
Audio System Basic Operation with 12.3" Color Touchscreen
Swiping the screen left or right changes to the next screen.
Select (Home) icon to go directly back to the first page of the home screen from
any page.
a (Home) Icon
b A-Zone
c Status Bar
d B-Zone
e Swipe
f Current Page Position
g VOL/ AUDIO(Volume/Power) Knob
h Mode Change Switch Bar
i
(Back) icon
j Audio/Information Screen
Touchscreen operation
Use simple gestures - including touching, swiping, and scrolling - to operate certain audio
functions.
Some items may be grayed-out during driving to reduce the potential for distraction. You can
select them when the vehicle is stopped.
Wearing gloves may limit or prevent touchscreen response.
You can change the touchscreen sensitivity setting.
How to Customize the General Settings
u
P.202
3
Controls > In-Vehicle Infotainment
162
Selecting an audio source
Select audio source icon in the header area, then select an icon on the source list to
switch the audio source.
A-Zone
The A-Zone is the main operation area in the 12.3″ Color Touchscreen.
System status
Displays information about your vehicle, connected devices, etc. You can select the
status bar to view more details in the status area.
B-Zone
The B-Zone displays a card that is useful while the driver is using another
application in the A-Zone.
The following cards are available:
Suggestions from Google Assistant
Audio source
Compass
Clock
Navigation (Apple CarPlay or Android Auto)
Power Flow
You can swipe up and down on the B-Zone to view a different card.
Page position is indicated at the right of the B-Zone.
Mode change switch bar
You can also select any application from the mode change switch bar. Shortcuts can
be edited to open other applications; however, Home, Back, and Google
Assistant
*1
or Alexa
*1
cannot be edited.
*1: Only whichever one was set as the default assist app is displayed here.
3
Controls > In-Vehicle Infotainment
163
3
Controls
USB Ports
On the front panel
On the back of the console
compartment
USB charging/connector port ( )
The USB port (3.0A) is for charging devices,
playing audio files, and connecting compatible
phones with Apple CarPlay or Android Auto.
≫
To prevent any potential issues, be sure to use an
Apple MFi Certified Lightning Connector for Apple
CarPlay. USB cables should be certified by USB-IF to
be compliant with USB 2.0 Standard.
USB charging port ( )
The USB ports (3.0A) are only for charging
devices.
≫
You cannot play audio files even if an audio device is
connected.
We recommend backing up your data before using the device in your vehicle.
Messages displayed on the Audio System may vary depending on the device model and
software version.
Some devices may not work even if they are connected to the USB ports.
Supplementary information about USB Charging:
Charging may not start or may operate slowly depending on the connected devices and
cables. Using only one port while not connecting anything (including cables) to the other port
may solve the issue.
!
Do not leave the device or USB flash drive in the vehicle. Direct
sunlight and high temperatures may damage it.
!
Do not connect the device or USB flash drive using a hub, as they will
not operate if you do.
!
Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard disk drive, as the
device or your files may be damaged.
3
Controls > In-Vehicle Infotainment
164
Audio Remote Controls
Allow you to operate the audio system while
driving. The information is shown on the driver
information interface or head-up display
*
.
a / (Seek/Skip) Buttons
b VOL+/VOL- (Volume) Switch
c Left Selector Wheel
d (Talk) Button
!
Depending on the device you connect, some functions may not be
available.
Seek/Skip Buttons
When listening to the radio
Press : To select the next preset radio station.
Press : To select the previous preset radio station.
Press and hold : To select the next strong station.
Press and hold : To select the previous strong station.
When listening to a wired connection, USB flash drive, Bluetooth® Audio, or Smartphone
Connection
≫
Depending on a connected device, operations may be changed.
Press : To skip to the next song.
Press : To go back to the beginning of the current or previous song.
When listening to a USB flash drive
Press and hold : To skip to the next folder.
Press and hold : To go back to the previous folder.
VOL+/VOL- (Volume) Switch
Press Up: To increase the volume.
Press Down: To decrease the volume.
Left Selector Wheel
To switch between audio modes, roll up or down and then press the left selector
wheel.
*: Not available on all models
3
Controls > In-Vehicle Infotainment
165
3
Controls
Connecting a Device
With a connected device you can play various files, as well as use Apple CarPlay or
Android Auto on the audio/information screen.
≫
Depending on the app used, device battery may decrease even with a wired connection.
!
Always make sure your vehicle is parked in a safe location before
connecting a device.
About Wired Connections
Connect a smartphone or USB flash drive to the USB charging/connector port ( ).
≫
You may need to operate the device.
a USB Flash Drive
b Device
c USB Cable
About Wireless Connections
You can modify Bluetooth® function settings.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it displayed on the screen with one or
more icons on the right side. These icons indicate the following:
: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio and HFL.
: The phone is compatible with Apple CarPlay.
: The phone is compatible with Android Auto.
Phone Pairing Tips:
Up to six phones can be paired.
Your phone’s battery may drain faster when it is paired to the system.
3
Controls > In-Vehicle Infotainment
166
Bluetooth® setup
You can turn Bluetooth® function on and off.
[1 ] Select (Home) icon.
[2 ] Select General Settings.
[3 ] Select Connections.
[4 ] Select Manage Device Connections.
[5 ] Select Options.
[6 ] Select Bluetooth.
[7 ] Select ON.
To pair a cell phone
[1 ] Select (Home) icon.
[2 ] Select Phone.
[3 ] Select Connect New Device.
[4 ] Make sure your phone is in search or discoverable mode, then select Search
for Devices.
≫
HFL automatically searches for a Bluetooth® device.
[5 ] Select your phone when it appears on the list.
≫
If your phone still does not appear, search for Bluetooth® devices using your phone.
From your phone, search for Vehicle Name.
[6 ] The system gives you a pairing code on the audio/information screen.
≫
Confirm if the pairing code on the screen and your phone matches. This may vary by
phone.
[7 ] Select Yes.
To change the currently paired phone
[1 ] Go to the phone screen.
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
u
P.197
[2 ] Select Change Devices.
[3 ] Select Go to Device List.
[4 ] Select a phone to connect.
≫
HFL disconnects the connected phone and starts searching for another paired phone.
[5 ] Select Bluetooth or Apple CarPlay/Android Auto.
[6 ] Select Yes.
To pair other phones, select + Connect New Device from the Bluetooth® screen.
To delete a paired phone
[1 ] Go to the phone screen.
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
u
P.197
[2 ] Select Change Devices.
[3 ] Select Go to Device List.
[4 ] Select a phone you want to delete.
[5 ] Select Delete Device.
3
Controls > In-Vehicle Infotainment
167
3
Controls
≫
A confirmation message appears on the screen.
[6 ] Select Delete.
About System Updates
When a software update is available for your vehicle, a notification will be displayed
on the meter or the audio/information screen.
Instructions for performing updates via the audio/information screen are included in
this manual.
For details on other methods of performing an update, please refer to the HondaLink
manual, or ask a dealer.
System updates that change specifications may result in some discrepancies with the
information in this owner’s manual.
Instructions
System Updates
u
P.171
3
Controls > In-Vehicle Infotainment
168
3
Controls >
12.3" Color Touchscreen Basic Operations
Start Up
The 12.3" color touchscreen starts automatically when you set the power mode to
ACCESSORY or ON. At start-up, the disclaimer screen will be displayed. When adding
a new user, entry of user information is required at start-up.
Select OK on the disclaimer screen.
≫
If you want to change the settings for data upload, select Data Sharing with Honda, then
select the Enable/Disable settings on the Data Sharing with Honda screen.
≫
If you do not select OK, the system will automatically be switched to the home screen, or the
top screen of the last executed application, after a certain period of time.
≫
If there is no registered device, the Bluetooth® pairing screen will be displayed after selecting
OK or after a certain period of time.
≫
If you check the box with Do not show this again, this screen will not be displayed.
About Wireless Connections
u
P.166
Data Sharing with Honda
Enable: Data communication available.
Disable: Data communication unavailable.
Registering New User Information
[1 ] Read the disclaimer screen and select OK.
[2 ] Select Set up profile.
≫
If you want to change the language, select English (United States).
[3 ] Name your profile and select Next.
4
Models with Google built-in
[4 ] You can view the terms and conditions of the Google Services agreement.
4
All Models
[5 ] On the System-wide permission Settings screen, select the data you give
permission for the system to access, and select Accept.
4
Models with Google built-in
[6 ] Select Done for now.
≫
By selecting Profile lock, you can set security settings for your profile.
≫
By selecting Set up Google Assistant and apps, you can customize settings related to
Google. An internet connection is required to change settings.
Wi‑Fi Connection
u
P.191
169
3
Controls
4
Models without Google built-in
[6 ] Select Done for now.
≫
By selecting Profile lock, you can set security settings for your profile.
Refer to the Google website for more information on how to set up a profile.
Additional information for Google apps and services is available at
mygarage.honda.com (U.S.) or www.honda.ca (English) / www.honda.ca/fr (French)
(Canada).
Specifications may be changed via system updates, etc.
Reboot Audio
You can reboot the audio system.
[1 ] Select and hold (Home) icon until the reboot dialog screen appears.
[2 ] Select Reboot.
≫
If Safe Mode is selected, the audio system will be rebooted with third-party applications
turned off. After the power mode has been turned off once, third-party applications can
be used again.
Home Screen
App icons can be added, deleted, or moved on the home screen.
You cannot delete the All Apps icon.
Apps will not be deleted by deleting the icon on the home screen.
Select Tips to show tips. To hide them, select it again.
To Add/Remove App Icons on the Home Screen
App icons can be added or removed on the home screen.
[1 ] Select (Home) icon.
[2 ] Select All Apps.
[3 ] Select the apps you want to add or remove and check/uncheck the box.
3
Controls > 12.3" Color Touchscreen Basic Operations
170
To Move/Remove App Icons on the Home Screen
You can change icon locations on the home screen.
[1 ] Select (Home) icon.
[2 ] Select and hold an app icon.
[3 ] Drag and drop the app icon to where you want it to be.
≫
Drag and drop the icon you want to remove to the Hide icon.
[4 ] Select (Home) icon or (Back) icon.
≫
The screen will return to the home screen.
To Store Shortcut Icons on the Home Screen
You can store up to three
*1
or four icons on the mode change switch bar.
[1 ] Select (Home) icon.
[2 ] Select and hold an app icon.
[3 ] Select Edit Shortcuts.
[4 ] Drag and drop the icon you want to store to
the left of the home screen.
≫
You can also store app icons in the mode
change switch bar by selecting icon ➔ shortcut
location.
[5 ] Select (Home) icon or (Back) icon.
≫
The screen will return to the home screen.
*1: Models with Google built-in
System Updates
System Updates uses the telematics control unit (TCU) or Wi‑Fi communication
capability to operate.
When an update for your system becomes available, a screen prompting you to
update your system will be displayed on the audio/information screen.
!
When a system update is started, the vehicle will be unable to move.
If new software has been released, perform an update as soon as possible.
If a system update fails, please consult a dealer.
System updates that change specifications may result in some discrepancies with the
information in this owner’s manual. For the most up-to-date information, please refer to the
Honda website.
Certain features may not be available during system updates.
3
Controls > 12.3" Color Touchscreen Basic Operations
171
3
Controls
Performing/Scheduling System Updates
[1 ] Select
(Home) icon.
[2 ] Select System Updates or Status bar ➔ system update message.
[3 ] Select Agree to Update to give permission for the update.
[4 ] When the power mode is turned to OFF, the permission screen is displayed.
Once a system update is started, the vehicle will become unable to move.
≫
When you select Proceed Now, the system update begins immediately.
≫
If you select Set Update Time, you can set a time for the update to be performed.
≫
If you select Remind me Later, you can delay the system update. The permission
screen will be displayed again the next time the power mode is turned to OFF.
[5 ] The next time the power mode is turned to ON, the system update results screen
will be displayed.
≫
System update results can also be viewed from Settings ➔ Update History within
System Updates.
!
For important updates, Remind me Later will stop displaying after it
has been selected a certain number of times.
!
Make sure your vehicle is stopped in a safe location before starting a
system update.
!
If you have selected Agree to Update on the agreement screen when
an update is being offered, or Automatic Update
*
is set to ON, and the
permission screen is not displayed even though the power mode is set
to OFF, it may be due to one or more of the conditions listed below. For
more information, consult a dealer.
The hood is open.
The shift position is not in P .
The vehicle is providing one or more emergency notifications.
The High Voltage Battery’s charge is too low.
The 12-volt battery is depleted.
!
If the system is being updated via Wi‑Fi, you will not be able to use this
feature in some situations based on Wi‑Fi authentication methods.
For example:
The connection requires you to log in.
Agreement to terms of use is required.
*: Not available on all models
3
Controls > 12.3" Color Touchscreen Basic Operations
172
!
If you are disconnected from the network, the download will be
stopped. Download is resumed when a new network connection is
established.
System Updates Settings
By selecting Settings and selecting a settings item, you can change or confirm the
system update settings.
The following settings items can be set.
Automatic Update
*
Automatic Download
Control Unit Versions
Connection Setup
Wi‑Fi Connection
u
P.191
Update History
!
To perform a system update via Wi‑Fi, change settings for connecting
to Wi‑Fi.
Wi‑Fi Connection
u
P.191
Trip Computer
Displays the trip computer information.
[1 ] Select (Home) icon.
[2 ] Select Trip Computer.
Current Drive tab: Displays the current trip information.
TripA/TripB tab: Displays information for the current and three previous drives. The
information is stored every time you reset Trip A/B.
To reset Trip A/B, select Menu, then select Delete Trip History.
To change the setting of how to reset Trip A/B, select Menu, then select “Trip A” Reset
Timing or “Trip B” Reset Timing.
Clock
Adjusting the Clock
You can adjust the time manually in the audio/information screen when the power
mode is in ON.
*: Not available on all models
3
Controls > 12.3" Color Touchscreen Basic Operations
173
3
Controls
≫
The clock is automatically updated through the audio system.
≫
The Guest user cannot adjust the clock.
[1 ] Select (Home) icon.
[2 ] Select General Settings.
[3 ] Select System.
[4 ] Select Date & Time.
[5 ] Select Set Date & Time.
[6 ] Select Automatic Date & Time, then select Off.
4
To adjust time
[7 ] Select Set Time.
[8 ] Select / .
≫
AM/PM icon can be switched to each other either by selecting
/ , or by directly
touching the icon.
[9 ] Select the (Back) icon to set the time.
4
To adjust date
[7 ] Select Set Date.
[8 ] Select / .
[9 ] Select the (Back) icon to set the time.
You can also adjust the clock by selecting the clock image or time displayed on the B-
Zone.
[1 ] Select Date & Time on the A-Zone.
[2 ] Select Set Date & Time.
[3 ] Select Automatic Date & Time.
[4 ] Select Off.
[5 ] Select Set Date or Set Time.
[6 ] Select / to adjust the dates, hours, and minutes.
[7 ] Select the (Back) icon to set the date or time.
You can customize the clock display to show the 12 hour clock or 24 hour clock.
How to Customize the General Settings
u
P.202
You can customize the date display.
How to Customize the General Settings
u
P.202
Wallpaper Setup
You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.
≫
The maximum image size is 4,096 × 2,304 pixels and the data size is less than 10 MB.
3
Controls > 12.3" Color Touchscreen Basic Operations
174
Import wallpaper
[1 ] Connect the USB flash drive to the USB charging/connector port.
USB Ports
u
P.164
[2 ] Select Clock.
[3 ] Select Menu.
[4 ] Select Clock Faces.
[5 ] Select Add More.
[6 ] Import a desired picture.
≫
Multiple pictures can be imported at the same time.
[7 ] Select Select Files.
[8 ] Select Add Files.
Select wallpaper
[1 ] Select Clock.
[2 ] Select Menu.
[3 ] Select Clock Faces.
[4 ] Select a desired wallpaper.
[5 ] Select Save.
Delete wallpaper
[1 ] Select Clock.
[2 ] Select Menu.
[3 ] Select Clock Faces.
[4 ] Select Delete Files.
[5 ] Select Select Files to Delete.
≫
If you want to delete all wallpapers, select Delete All Files.
[6 ] Select a desired wallpaper.
[7 ] Select Select Files.
[8 ] Select Delete Files.
!
Do not turn off your vehicle or remove the USB memory immediately
after changing or importing wallpaper. A saving error may occur, and
USB data may be corrupted.
Adjusting the Sound
[1 ] Select (Home) icon.
[2 ] Select an audio source icon.
4
AM/FM Radio mode
[3 ] Select Menu.
3
Controls > 12.3" Color Touchscreen Basic Operations
175
3
Controls
[4 ] Select Sound Settings.
[5 ] Select the setting you want.
4
USB Audio, Bluetooth
®
Audio mode
[3 ] Select Sound.
[4 ] Select the setting you want.
Select an item from the following choices:
Speed Volume Compensation
*2
: Sets the amount of volume increase.
Bass / Mid / Treble: Bass, Midrange, Treble
Balance / Fader
*2
: Balance, Fader
Audio Zones & Balance / Fader
*1
: Driver Only, Front Only, Rear Only, Full Vehicle, Balance,
Fader
Bose Centerpoint
*1
: Bose Centerpoint
Bose Dynamic Speed Compensation
*1
: Sets the amount of volume increase.
You can also adjust the sound by the following procedure.
[1 ] Select (Home) icon.
[2 ] Select General Settings.
[3 ] Select Sound.
To reset each setting for Bass / Mid / Treble, Balance / Fader
*2
, Audio Zones &
Balance / Fader
*1
and Speed Volume Compensation
*2
select Reset to Default in
each setting item.
*1: Models with Google built-in
*2: Models without Google built-in
Changing the Display Settings
You can change the brightness of the audio/information screen.
[1 ] Select (Home) icon.
[2 ] Select General Settings.
[3 ] Select Display.
[4 ] Select the setting you want.
≫
To reset the settings, select Reset to Default.
Alexa Built-In
You can talk to Amazon Alexa through the audio system. With Alexa, you can:
Stream music.
Check the weather.
Answer questions.
3
Controls > 12.3" Color Touchscreen Basic Operations
176
Control smart home devices.
And more with supported Alexa skills.
Support Resources
For more information or client support:
Call Honda Customer Service at 1 (800) 999-1009.
Go to https://www.amazon.com/alexasupport.
You can change the voice assistant from Alexa to Google Assistant.
How to Customize the General Settings
u
P.202
Using Alexa
Once you sign into Alexa in the vehicle, you can use Alexa without opening the app.
You can trigger Alexa by doing any of the following:
Say the wake word “Alexa” from anywhere in the audio system.
Press the (Talk) button on the steering wheel.
Select the Alexa icon from inside the app.
Troubleshooting Tips:
Make sure you are connected to Alexa via Wi‑Fi network, AT&T Vehicle Data Plan (U.S.)/Bell
Data Plan (Canada).
If using an AT&T Vehicle Data Plan, confirm that your subscription is active.
Make sure you are logged into your Amazon account.
Deleting Your Alexa Settings from the Vehicle
For your privacy and security, if you transfer the vehicle to a third-party, reset all
vehicle settings to default and delete all personal data. Also, remove the vehicle from
the list of devices in your phone’s Alexa app.
Defaulting All the Settings
u
P.211
3
Controls > 12.3" Color Touchscreen Basic Operations
177
3
Controls
Playing AM/FM Radio
a Menu Icon
b HD Radio™ Icon
c Station List
d Scan Icon
e Press & Hold to Add
f Preset Icons
g Tune Icon
h Seek Icons
4 Models with HD Radio™ feature
HD Subchannel
Displays the subchannel list when an HD Radio™ station is selected while listening to
an FM station.
[1 ] Select Station List.
[2 ] Select the channel number.
AM/FM Settings
By selecting Menu and selecting a settings item, you can change the AM/FM settings.
The following settings items can be set.
HD Radio: Automatically choose a digital or an analog channel, or listen to analog only.
Artwork: Turns the artwork display on and off.
3
Controls > 12.3" Color Touchscreen Basic Operations
178
Station List
Lists the strongest stations on the selected band.
[1 ] Select Station List to display a list.
[2 ] Select the station.
Manual update
Updates your available station list at any time.
[1 ] Select Station List to display a list.
[2 ] Select Refresh.
Radio Data System (RDS)
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.
≫
When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS automatically turns on, and the
frequency display changes to the station name. However, when the signals of that station
become weak, the display changes from the station name to the frequency.
To find an RDS station from station list
[1 ] Select Station List to display a list while listening to an FM station.
[2 ] Select the station.
Manual update
Updates your available station list at any time.
[1 ] Select Station List to display a list while listening to an FM station.
[2 ] Select Refresh.
Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for a few seconds. To
turn off scan, select Stop or select (Back) icon.
Favorite Station
To switch the favorite station, select the preset icon.
≫
Swipe the preset icon area to display the next preset icons.
To add a station:
[1 ] Tune to the selected station.
[2 ] Select and hold Press & Hold to Add.
≫
You can store 12 AM/FM stations into preset memory.
Editing a favorite station
Select and hold the desired favorite station icon.
3
Controls > 12.3" Color Touchscreen Basic Operations
179
3
Controls
The following items are available:
Remove Favorite: Delete the favorite station icon from the favorite station list.
Replace with (number): Replace the stored favorite station icon.
Add to Home: Add the shortcut icon of the stored favorite station to the home screen.
Tune
Select to use the on-screen keyboard for entering the radio frequency directly.
Seek
Select or to search up and down on the selected band for a station with a
strong signal.
About Audio Playback
By connecting a device to the audio system, you can play audio files.
!
It may be illegal to perform some data device functions while driving.
Available operating functions vary on models or versions. Some functions may not be
available on the vehicle’s audio system.
Depending on the connected device, the name of the artist, album, or track may not appear
correctly.
About Play Modes
Shuffle/Repeat
Repeatedly select the shuffle or repeat icon until you
find a play mode option of
your preference.
・ Shuffle off: Shuffle mode to off.
・ Shuffle all: Plays all available songs in random order.
・ Shuffle in folder
*1
: Plays all songs in the current folder in random order.
・ Repeat off: Repeat mode to off.
・ Repeat track: Repeats the current song.
・ Repeat folder/group
*2
: Repeats all songs in the current folder/group.
・ Repeat all: Repeats all songs (in the current folder
*2
).
*1: When playing a song via USB device
*2: When playing a song using Bluetooth® Audio
3
Controls > 12.3" Color Touchscreen Basic Operations
180
Audio Playback via Wired Connection
Connect a device, such as an iPod or iPhone to the USB charging/connector port, then
select the USB icon.
About Wired Connections
u
P.166
a Cover Art
b Sound Icon
c Music Library Icon
d Shuffle Icon
e Track Icons
f Repeat Icon
g Play/Pause Icon
If an iPhone is connected via Apple CarPlay, the USB source will be unavailable and
audio files on the phone will be playable only within Apple CarPlay.
Track icons
Select
or to change songs.
Select and hold to move rapidly within a song.
How to select a song from the music search list
[1 ] Select Music Library.
[2 ] Select a search category (e.g., Artists, Albums, etc.).
[3 ] Continue making selections until you find the song of your choice.
3
Controls > 12.3" Color Touchscreen Basic Operations
181
3
Controls
Audio Playback via USB Device
Connect your USB flash drive to the USB charging/connector port, then select the
USB icon.
About Wired Connections
u
P.166
The audio system can read certain USB drive formats to play audio files.
Compatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives
u
P.212
a Cover Art
b Sound Icon
c Music Library Icon
d Shuffle Icon
e Track Icons
f Repeat Icon
g Play/Pause Icon
!
WMA files protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be
played.
Track icons
Select
or to change songs.
Select and hold to move rapidly within a song.
How to select a song from the music search list
[1 ] Select Music Library.
3
Controls > 12.3" Color Touchscreen Basic Operations
182
[2 ] Select a search category (e.g., Artists, Albums, etc.).
[3 ] Continue making selections until you find the song of your choice.
Audio Playback via Bluetooth® Device
Your audio system allows you to listen to audio files from your Bluetooth®-compatible
phone.
This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
About Wireless Connections
u
P.166
a Change Devices
b Sound Icon
c Music Library Icon
d Shuffle Icon
e Track Icons
f Repeat Icon
g Play/Pause Icon
h Cover Art
Not all Bluetooth®-enabled phones with streaming audio capabilities are compatible with the
system. For a list of compatible phones:
U.S.: Visit https://mygarage.honda.com/s/honda-handsfreelink-compatibility-check, or call
1-888-528-7876.
Canada: Call 1-855-490-7351.
3
Controls > 12.3" Color Touchscreen Basic Operations
183
3
Controls
Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time. When there is more than one paired phone in
the vehicle, the system automatically connects to the prioritized phone. You can assign
priority to a phone in the Bluetooth® device list.
About Wireless Connections
u
P.166
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL, there may be a delay before the system begins to
play.
If a phone is currently connected via Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, Bluetooth® Audio from
that phone is unavailable.
To play the audio files, you may need to operate your phone. If so, follow the phone
manufacturer’s operating instructions.
Switching to another mode pauses the audio files playing from your phone.
You can change the connected phone by selecting Change Devices.
About Wireless Connections
u
P.166
Track icons
Select or to change songs.
Select and hold to move rapidly within a song.
How to select a song from the music search list
[1 ] Select Music Library.
[2 ] Select a search category (e.g., Albums).
[3 ] Select an item.
Google built-in
*
You can use the features available with Google built-in on the audio/information
screen.
Google, Google Play, and Google Maps are trademarks of Google LLC.
For more details on Google apps and services’ features, visit the Google website.
Additional information for Google apps and services is available at
mygarage.honda.com (U.S.) or www.honda.ca (English) (Canada) / www.honda.ca/fr
(French) (Canada).
*: Not available on all models
3
Controls > 12.3" Color Touchscreen Basic Operations
184
Google Assistant
You can operate features with hands-free help from Google Assistant.
You can activate Google Assistant by:
Saying “Hey Google.”
≫
Wake words vary by region and language. Refer to the Google website for more information.
Pressing the (Talk) button on the steering wheel.
Selecting the Google Assistant icon on the audio/information screen.
Below are examples of things you can ask Google Assistant:
Play music.
Play radio.
You can customize language and other settings regarding Google Assistant.
How to Customize the General Settings
u
P.202
Google Maps
Google Maps helps you reach your next destination faster with real-time traffic info,
automatic rerouting, and voice control.
Operate when vehicle is stopped in a safe location.
When your Google Account is linked with a valid user, destinations stored on other devices
(home, work, favorites, previous searches, etc.) can be displayed. When the device and the
vehicle are logged into the same Google Account, changing information on the device will
change it on Google Maps as well.
Google Play
Download your favorite apps on Google Play.
The vehicle must be stopped in order to download an app.
Operate when vehicle is stopped in a safe location.
User Information
You can add and change users, as well as customize user settings. By registering a
user, you can personalize your vehicle settings. You can select a user when the audio/
information screen loads, even when the doors are open or unlocked.
3
Controls > 12.3" Color Touchscreen Basic Operations
185
3
Controls
a User Information
4
Models with Google built-in
By linking your profile with your Google Account, you can enjoy a more personalized
experience with Google built-in. For more assistance on account linking, visit the
Google website.
You can customize settings individually for each user.
How to Customize the Profile Settings
u
P.210
You can customize security settings for each user. If you have forgotten security settings, you
will need to delete the user and create a new one. If you have forgotten security settings for
the Owner user, please contact a dealer or Honda Customer Service.
Contacts
u
P.396
Certain features are unavailable when using a newly created user or the Guest user.
Registering a User
[1 ] Select User Information.
≫
You can also add users when Profile Settings ➔ Change Profile is selected.
How to Customize the Profile Settings
u
P.210
≫
You can add users even when the doors are open and unlocked.
[2 ] Select Change Profile.
[3 ] Select +Add User.
3
Controls > 12.3" Color Touchscreen Basic Operations
186
[4 ] Select OK.
[5 ] Enter user information.
Start Up
u
P.169
You can add up to four users other than the Owner user and the Guest user.
When you add a user, the audio/information screen is loaded under that user.
Switching Users
[1 ] Select User Information.
≫
You can also change users when Profile Settings ➔ Change Profile is selected.
How to Customize the Profile Settings
u
P.210
≫
You can switch users even when the doors are open and unlocked.
[2 ] Select
Change Profile.
[3 ] Select the user you want to use.
Users with customized security settings can restrict screen operations by selecting the
Screen Lock shortcut.
Deleting Users
[1 ] Select Profile Settings.
[2 ] Select Manage Profile.
[3 ] Select Your Profile.
[4 ] Select Delete.
When the profile currently being used is deleted, the audio/information screen is loaded
under the Guest user.
While using the Owner user, you can delete other users via General Settings ➔ Advanced
Settings.
How to Customize the General Settings
u
P.202
Depending on the version of your OS, the steps for deleting a user may differ from the
instructions on this page. Follow the on-screen prompts.
Power Flow
Displays the motor and engine power flow, average fuel economy, and range.
3
Controls > 12.3" Color Touchscreen Basic Operations
187
3
Controls
a Engine ON
b Engine OFF
c Engine
d Driving Range
e High Voltage Battery Level Gauge
f Power Flow
g Average Fuel Economy (Current Drive)
While the engine provides propulsion directly to the wheels, the icon appears in the power
flow monitor on the screen.
The power flow monitor is also displayed on the driver information interface.
Power Flow Monitor
u
P.297
Displays the power flow, indicating what is supplying power to the vehicle and/or
charging the battery.
≫
The indicator for the power transmission appears in blue, and for the battery charging
operation, in green.
3
Controls > 12.3" Color Touchscreen Basic Operations
188
a Power is being supplied by the High Voltage battery and the engine-driven
generator. (Blue)
b Power is being supplied by the High Voltage battery. (Blue)
c Power is being supplied by the engine-driven generator. (Blue)
d Power is being supplied directly by the engine and the High Voltage battery is
being charged by the engine-driven generator. (Blue and Green)
e The High Voltage battery is being charged through regenerative braking.
(Green)
f The High Voltage battery is being charged by the engine-driven generator.
(Green)
3
Controls > 12.3" Color Touchscreen Basic Operations
189
3
Controls
3
Controls >
12.3" Color Touchscreen Other Operations
HondaLink®
HondaLink® connects you to the latest information from Honda. You can connect your
phone wirelessly through Wi‑Fi or Bluetooth® and the HondaLink® icon is selected,
you can operate HondaLink® on the audio/information screen.
Wi‑Fi Connection
u
P.191
About Wireless Connections
u
P.166
If your vehicle has a telematics control unit (TCU), you can use HondaLink® without
connecting the phone.
The HondaLink® connect app is compatible with most iPhone and Android phones.
If the system is connected to the HondaLink® connect app through Bluetooth® and another
Bluetooth® audio device is connected, the Bluetooth® connection to the HondaLink® connect
app will be severed.
Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and smartphone data use. Check your phone’s
data subscription package.
If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, HondaLink® can only be
connected through Wi‑Fi.
To Connect to HondaLink®
Use the following procedure to connect to HondaLink®.
To enable the HondaLink® service
You must consent to location sharing to enable the HondaLink® service.
[1 ] Select (Home) icon.
[2 ] Select General Settings.
[3 ] Select Privacy.
[4 ] Select Data Sharing with Honda.
[5 ] Select Enable.
To link with HondaLink®
You can see the connection guide screen after launching HondaLink® when there is
no connection to a network. If you do not need this guide, select the check-box and
select OK.
HondaLink® Menu
The following items can be used.
Vehicle Notifications: Displays instruction messages when the vehicle needs service.
Connect Honda: Displays tips for vehicle usage and gets support via roadside assistance or
customer service center.
190
Connect: Displays your phone connection status and HondaLink® subscription status.
HondaLink® Service
Is a subscription-based service that provides convenient features such as voice
communication in case of emergency, online security, and one-on-one operator
assistance.
HondaLink® also provides services you can operate from the Internet or your smartphone. To
subscribe to HondaLink®, or to get more information about all of its features, contact a Honda
dealer, or visit: https://mygarage.honda.com/s/hondalink-marketing (U.S.) or https://
www.honda.ca/en/hondalink (English) (Canada) / https://www.honda.ca/fr/hondalink (French)
(Canada).
Wi‑Fi Connection
This vehicle is equipped with Wi‑Fi connectivity. You can connect to an external Wi‑Fi
hotspot or communication device. In addition, the vehicle can be used by other
communication devices as a Wi‑Fi hotspot via the telematics control unit (TCU).
Connect the vehicle to a Wi‑Fi hotspot
Use Wi‑Fi Inside the Vehicle
Wi‑Fi and Wi‑Fi Direct are registered trademarks of Wi‑Fi Alliance®.
Use Wi‑Fi Inside the Vehicle
[1 ] Select (Home) icon.
[2 ] Select General Settings.
[3 ] Select Connections.
[4 ] Select Wi‑Fi.
≫
To change the Wi‑Fi settings, select Options.
[5 ] Select the access point you want to connect to the system.
[6 ] Select Connect.
≫
When the connection is successful, the status text Connected next to the network name
is displayed on the list.
[7 ] Select (Home) icon to go back to the home screen.
You cannot go through the setting procedure while the vehicle is moving. Park in a safe place
to set the audio system in Wi‑Fi mode.
Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and smartphone data use. Check your phone’s
data subscription package.
Check your phone manual to find out if the phone has Wi‑Fi connectivity.
3
Controls > 12.3" Color Touchscreen Other Operations
191
3
Controls
You can confirm whether Wi‑Fi connection is on or off with the icon on the Wi‑Fi network
list. Transmission speed and others will not be displayed on this screen.
In case of Wi‑Fi connection with your phone, make sure your phone’s Wi‑Fi setting is in access
point (tethering) mode.
When you select Access Point, you can set up a wireless connection from the phone to the
vehicle.
How to Customize the General Settings
u
P.202
Connect to the In-vehicle Wi‑Fi Hotspot
You can set the network as a Wi‑Fi Hotspot of this audio system.
[1 ] Select (Home) icon.
[2 ] Select General Settings.
[3 ] Select Connections.
[4 ] Select Data Connection Options.
[5 ] Select Set Up Wi‑Fi.
[6 ] Select Options.
[7 ] Select Add Network.
[8 ] Select Connect.
The following options are available for the setup.
Network SSID: Set this network name.
Security: Set a password to be required when connecting a Wi‑Fi device to this network.
AT&T Hotspot
If you have subscribed to AT&T Hotspot services, your vehicle will provide data to
connect your mobile devices to the Internet. You can use the AT&T Hotspot app to
turn vehicle data on/off and monitor data usage left on your subscription.
To use AT&T Hotspot services, your vehicle must be subscribed to a data plan. If your vehicle
is not subscribed to a data plan, you can visit:
U.S.: www.att.com/honda
Canada: https://myvehicle.att.com/#/honda/learn?country=CA&language=en(English)
https://myvehicle.att.com/#/honda/learn?country=CA&language=fr (French)
Alternatively, you can use your mobile hotspot to connect the vehicle and other mobile
devices to the Internet.
Wi‑Fi Connection
u
P.191
3
Controls > 12.3" Color Touchscreen Other Operations
192
AT&T Hotspot Menu
a Hotspot Enable
Turns AT&T Hotspot on/off.
b Plan Info
Shows your current AT&T subscription plan for the vehicle.
c Settings
Shows the current network SSID and password for vehicle Hotspot. Settings can be
changed while the vehicle is not in motion.
d Data Usage Bar
Checks the current status of your data plan. This Usage Bar will show your current
plan and how much data remains on your plan. Subscription plans for AT&T Hotspot
can be added/modified at:
U.S.:
www.att.com/honda
Canada: https://myvehicle.att.com/#/honda/learn?country=CA&language=en (English)
https://myvehicle.att.com/#/honda/learn?country=CA&language=fr (French)
e Help
Apple CarPlay
If you connect an Apple CarPlay-compatible iPhone to the system via USB port or
wirelessly, and the Apple CarPlay icon is selected, you can operate Apple CarPlay on
the audio/information screen.
Connecting a Device
u
P.166
We recommend that you update iOS to the latest version when using Apple CarPlay.
Park in a safe place before connecting your iPhone to Apple CarPlay and when launching any
compatible apps.
3
Controls > 12.3" Color Touchscreen Other Operations
193
3
Controls
You can use the method below to change Apple CarPlay settings after you have completed the
initial setup:
Select (Home) icon ➔ Select General Settings ➔ Connections ➔ Manage Device
Connections ➔ Select device.
While connected to Apple CarPlay, it is not possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio or Bluetooth®
HandsFreeLink®. You can only make calls or listen to music through Apple CarPlay.
If you want to make a call with Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®, turn Apple CarPlay OFF or detach
the USB cable from your iPhone. Other previously paired devices can also use Bluetooth®
Audio.
Apple CarPlay and Android Auto cannot run at the same time.
When using Hands Free, you can only control it with Siri.
Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri
u
P.195
For details on countries and regions where Apple CarPlay is available, as well as information
pertaining to function, refer to the Apple website.
Apple CarPlay Operating Requirements & Limitations
Apple CarPlay requires a compatible iPhone with an active cellular connection and data plan.
Your carrier’s rate plans will apply.
Changes in operating systems, hardware, software, and other technology integral to providing
Apple CarPlay functionality, as well as new or revised governmental regulations, may result in
a decrease or cessation of Apple CarPlay functionality and services. Honda cannot and does
not provide any warranty or guarantee of future Apple CarPlay performance or functionality.
It is possible to use third-party apps if they are compatible with Apple CarPlay. Refer to the
Apple website for information on compatible apps.
Use of Apple CarPlay will result in the collection of certain user and vehicle information (such
as vehicle location, speed, and status) from your iPhone to enhance the Apple CarPlay
experience. You will need to consent to the sharing of this information on the audio/
information screen.
Use of user and vehicle information
The use and handling of user and vehicle information transmitted to/from your iPhone by
Apple CarPlay is governed by the Apple iOS terms and conditions and Apple’s Privacy Policy.
Wireless Apple CarPlay and AT&T Hotspot cannot be used at the same time. When using
Apple CarPlay and AT&T Hotspot at the same time, connect to Apple CarPlay with a USB
cable.
If there is a problem with the connection of your iPhone, an error code will be displayed.
How to Customize the General Settings
u
P.202
Apple CarPlay Menu
For details on available applications, please refer to the Apple CarPlay website.
Apps displayed on your screen can be changed with your iPhone.
Select the Honda icon on the Apple CarPlay menu screen to go back to the home
screen.
Connecting Apple CarPlay Using the USB Cable
Connect the iPhone to the USB charging/connector port.
About Wired Connections
u
P.166
3
Controls > 12.3" Color Touchscreen Other Operations
194
If another phone is already connected to the audio system, the confirmation screen
will appear, and then select Continue Connecting.
Connecting Apple CarPlay Wirelessly
[1 ] Select (Home) icon.
[2 ] Select Apple CarPlay.
[3 ] Select Check Device List or Connect New Phone.
[4 ] Pair the iPhone to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
About Wireless Connections
u
P.166
[5 ] Select Yes.
Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri
Press and hold the (Talk) button to activate Siri.
Press again to deactivate Siri.
Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system.
Audio Remote Controls
u
P.165
Below are examples of questions and commands for Siri:
What movies are playing today?
Call dad at work.
What song is this?
How’s the weather tomorrow?
Read my latest email.
For more information, please visit www.apple.com/ios/siri.
Android Auto™
If you connect an Android™ phone to the system via USB port or wirelessly, and the
Android Auto icon is selected, you can operate Android Auto on the audio/
information screen.
Connecting a Device
u
P.166
We recommend that you update Android OS to the latest version when using Android Auto.
Bluetooth® A2DP cannot be used while your phone is connected to Android Auto.
Android and Android Auto are trademarks of Google LLC.
Park in a safe place before connecting your Android phone to Android Auto and when
launching any compatible apps.
You can use the method below to change Android Auto settings after you have completed the
initial setup:
Select (Home) icon ➔ Select General Settings ➔ Connections ➔ Manage Device
Connections ➔ Select device.
Apple CarPlay and Android Auto cannot run at the same time.
3
Controls > 12.3" Color Touchscreen Other Operations
195
3
Controls
To use each of Android Auto’s features, say "Hey Google” while the Android Auto screen is
displayed, or press and hold the (Talk) button to activate Google Assistant.
Operating Android Auto with Google Assistant
u
P.197
For details on countries and regions where Android Auto is available, as well as information
pertaining to function, refer to the Android Auto website.
Android Auto Operating Requirements & Limitations
Android Auto requires a compatible Android phone with an active cellular connection and
data plan. Your carrier’s rate plans will apply.
Changes in operating systems, hardware, software, and other technology integral to providing
Android Auto functionality, as well as new or revised governmental regulations, may result in a
decrease or cessation of Android Auto functionality and services. Honda cannot and does not
provide any warranty or guarantee of future Android Auto performance or functionality.
It is possible to use third-party apps if they are compatible with Android Auto. Refer to the
Android Auto website for information on compatible apps.
Use of user and vehicle information
The use and handling of user and vehicle information transmitted to/from your phone by
Android Auto is governed by Google’s Privacy Policy.
Wireless Android Auto and AT&T Hotspot cannot be used at the same time. When using
Android Auto and AT&T Hotspot at the same time, connect to Android Auto with a USB cable.
If there is a problem with the connection of your smartphone, an error code will be displayed.
How to Customize the General Settings
u
P.202
Android Auto Menu
For details on available applications, please refer to the Android Auto website.
Apps displayed on your screen can be changed with your smartphone.
Select the Honda icon on the Android Auto menu screen to go back to the home
screen.
Connecting Android Auto Using the USB Cable
Connect the Android phone to the USB charging/connector port.
About Wired Connections
u
P.166
If another phone is already connected to the audio system, the confirmation screen
will appear, and then select Continue Connecting.
Connecting Android Auto Wirelessly
[1 ] Select (Home) icon.
[2 ] Select Android Auto.
[3 ] Select Connect Phone or Search for Devices.
[4 ] Pair the Android phone to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
About Wireless Connections
u
P.166
[5 ] Select Yes.
3
Controls > 12.3" Color Touchscreen Other Operations
196
Operating Android Auto with Google Assistant
Press and hold the (Talk) button to talk to Google Assistant.
Press and release to activate the standard voice recognition system.
Audio Remote Controls
u
P.165
Below are examples of commands you can give with Google Assistant:
Reply to text.
Call my wife.
Navigate to Honda.
Play my music.
Send a text message to my wife.
Call flower shop.
For more information, please refer to the Android Auto website.
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using
your vehicle’s audio system without handling your cell phone. Select the Phone icon
when your phone is connected to the system wirelessly.
About Wireless Connections
u
P.166
a Recents
b Change Devices
c Menu
d Contacts
e Favorite Contacts
To use the system, the Bluetooth® setting must be ON.
How to Customize the General Settings
u
P.202
3
Controls > 12.3" Color Touchscreen Other Operations
197
3
Controls
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth® SIG,
Inc., and any use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under license. Other trademarks
and trade names are those of their respective owners.
HFL Limitations
An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio system when it is playing. It will resume when
the call is ended.
When you select a name from the list in the cellular phonebook, you can see a category icon.
The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored for that name.
On some phones, it may not be possible to import the category icons to the system.
Depending on the connected cell phone, some features may not be available.
HFL Status Display
The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.
a Bluetooth® Indicator
Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.
b Signal Strength
c Battery Level Status
d Name saved in contacts/Caller’s Number (if not registered)
The information that appears on the audio/information screen varies between phone models.
Favorite Contacts
To add a favorite contact
[1 ] Select (Home) icon.
[2 ] Select Phone.
[3 ] Select and hold Press & Hold to Add.
[4 ] Select From Recents, From Contacts, or Using Enter Number.
3
Controls > 12.3" Color Touchscreen Other Operations
198
4
From Recents, From Contacts
[5 ] Select a phone number.
4
Using Enter Number
[5 ] Input number, and select Enter.
To edit a favorite contact
[1 ] Select
(Home) icon.
[2 ] Select Phone.
[3 ] Select and hold a favorite contact.
[4 ] Select Edit Favorites.
≫
To delete a favorite contact, select Remove Favorite.
[5 ] Select a setting you want.
[6 ] Select Enter or select type.
Add a favorite contact to homepage
[1 ] Select (Home) icon.
[2 ] Select Phone.
[3 ] Select and hold a favorite contact.
[4 ] Select Add to Home.
Making a Call
You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported
phonebook, call history, or favorite contact entries.
To make a call using the imported phonebook
[1 ] Select (Home) icon.
[2 ] Select Phone.
[3 ] Select Contacts.
[4 ] Select a name.
≫
You can sort by First Name or Last Name. Select the icon on the upper right of the
screen.
[5 ] Select a number.
≫
Dialing starts automatically.
To make a call using a phone number
[1 ] Select (Home) icon.
[2 ] Select Phone.
[3 ] Select Menu.
[4 ] Select Keypad.
[5 ] Select a number.
[6 ] Select Call.
3
Controls > 12.3" Color Touchscreen Other Operations
199
3
Controls
≫
Dialing starts automatically.
To make a call using the call history
Call history is stored by All, Dialed, Missed, and Received.
[1 ] Select (Home) icon.
[2 ] Select Phone.
[3 ] Select Recents.
≫
You can sort by All, Dialed, Missed, or Received when you select the icon on the
upper right of the screen.
[4 ] Select a number or contact name.
≫
Dialing starts automatically.
The call history appears only when a phone is connected to the system.
To make a call using a favorite contact entry
[1 ] Select (Home) icon.
[2 ] Select Phone.
[3 ] Select a favorite contact.
≫
Dialing starts automatically.
Receiving a Call
When there is an incoming call, an audible notification sounds (if activated) and the
Incoming Call... screen appears.
To answer the call:
Select the (Answer) icon.
You can also answer the call using the left selector wheel roll up or down to select
(Answer) on the driver information interface.
3
Controls > 12.3" Color Touchscreen Other Operations
200
To decline or end the call:
Select the (Ignore) icon.
You can also ignore the call using the left selector wheel roll up or down to select
(Ignore) on the driver information interface.
Call Waiting:
Select the (Answer) icon to put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call.
Select using the left selector wheel to return to the current call.
Select the (Ignore) icon to ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer it.
Select if you want to hang up the current call.
Options During a Call
The following options are available during a call.
Hang Up: End the call. Calls can also be ended from the driver information interface by using
the left selector wheel roll up or down.
Keypad: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-driven phone
system.
Making a Call
u
P.199
Mute: Mute your voice.
Transfer to Mobile: Transfer a call from the system to your phone.
Phone Menu Screen
By selecting Menu and selecting a settings item, you can change the Bluetooth®
HandsFreeLink® system settings.
The following settings items can be set.
Keypad: Enter a phone number to dial.
Latest Call History: Set whether the history shortcut is displayed in the phone screen.
Auto Sync Phone: Set phonebook and call history data to be automatically imported when a
phone is paired to HFL.
Auto Phone Call Transfer: Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when
you enter the vehicle.
Ringtone: Select a fixed ringtone or the one from the connected cell phone.
3
Controls > 12.3" Color Touchscreen Other Operations
201
3
Controls
3
Controls >
12.3" Color Touchscreen Customized Features
Customized Features
Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features.
!
When you customize settings, make sure that the vehicle is at a
complete stop and shift to P .
How to Customize the General Settings
With the power mode in ON, select (Home) icon, select General Settings, and
select a setting item.
List of Customizable Options
System
Date & Time ➔ Set Date & Time
Automatic Date & Time
On/Off
Set Date
Adjusts date.
Adjusting the Clock
u
P.173
Set Time
Adjusts clock.
Adjusting the Clock
u
P.173
Date & Time ➔ Time Zone
Automatic Time Zone
On/Off
(Select time zone)
Changes the time zone manually.
Date & Time ➔Auto Daylight
Saving Time
On/Off
Date & Time ➔Date Format
Day-of-week, MM DD, YYYY/
YYYY.MM.DD Day-of-week/
YYYY.MM.DD (Day-of-week)/Day-of-
week DD.MM.YYYY/DD.MM.YYYY
Date & Time ➔Time Format
12H/24H
Language
English (United States)/Espanol/
Francais
Touch Panel Sensitivity
Low/High
About ➔ IP Address
Displays the Android setting items.
202
About ➔Wi‑Fi MAC Address
Displays the Android setting items.
About ➔Bluetooth MAC Address
Displays the Android setting items.
About ➔Serial Number
Displays the Android setting items.
About ➔Up Time
Displays the Android setting items.
About ➔Model Number
Displays the Android setting items.
About ➔Android Version
Displays the Android setting items.
About ➔Kernel Version
Displays the Android setting items.
About ➔Build Number
Displays the Android setting items.
About ➔Software Version
Displays the Android setting items.
Factory Data Reset
Cancel/Continue
Connections
Manage Device Connections ➔
Options
Bluetooth
On/Off
Priority Device Information
Displays the priority device.
Change Name
Changes vehicle name for Bluetooth®
connection setting.
Smartphone Projection Screen Size
Normal/Wide
Smartphone Projection Error Code
Displays the error code(s) of the
smartphone projection.
Manage Device Connections ➔ +
Connect New Device
Pairs a new device to HFL.
About Wireless Connections
u
P.166
Manage Device Connections
➔ (Saved Devices)
Connects, disconnects, or deletes a
paired device.
About Wireless Connections
u
P.166
Wi‑Fi ➔ Options
Wi‑Fi
Off/On
Add Network
Allows you to connect to a new external
network.
Saved Networks
Deletes a saved network or changes
update permission settings for the
selected network.
Wi‑Fi ➔ (Detected Networks)
Displays the detected network(s).
3
Controls > 12.3" Color Touchscreen Customized Features
203
3
Controls
Access Point ➔ Options
Access Point
Off/On
Edit Access Point Settings
Allows you to confirm hotspot settings
and edit hotspot connection
information.
Data Connection Options ➔Set
Up Wi‑Fi
Sets personal hotspot (phone
tethering).
Wi‑Fi Connection
u
P.191
Data Connection Options ➔Set
Up Vehicle Data Plan
Sets AT&T vehicle data plan.
AT&T Hotspot
u
P.192
Privacy
Data Sharing with Honda
Disable/Enable
Microphone
Turns the microphone on and off. eCall
can still be used regardless of settings.
Location
Sets the data sharing permission for
each function.
App permissions
Sets the data sharing permission for
each function.
System-wide Permission Settings
Sets the data sharing permission for
each function.
Infotainment system data
Sets the data sharing permission for
each function.
Data sharing with Google
*1
Sets the data sharing permission for
each function.
Ads
Sets the data sharing permission for
each function.
Google legal
*1
➔ Google Terms of
Service
*1
Displays the Google URL.
Google legal
*1
➔ Google Privacy
Policy
*1
Displays the Google URL.
*1: Please confirm the details on the audio/
information screen. Specifications are
subject to change via system updates,
etc.
3
Controls > 12.3" Color Touchscreen Customized Features
204
Display
Brightness
Changes the brightness of the audio/
information screen.
Contrast
Changes the contrast of the audio/
information screen.
Black Level
Changes the black level of the audio/
information screen.
Day Mode
*1
Changes between daytime mode and
night mode.
Night Mode
*1
Changes between daytime mode and
night mode.
Display Off
Turns the audio/information screen
brightness off.
*1: When the AID sensor is disabled.
Sound
Bass / Mid / Treble ➔ Treble
Adjusts the settings of the audio
speakers’ sound.
Adjusting the Sound
u
P.175
Bass / Mid / Treble ➔ Midrange
Adjusts the settings of the audio
speakers’ sound.
Adjusting the Sound
u
P.175
Bass / Mid / Treble ➔ Bass
Adjusts the settings of the audio
speakers’ sound.
Adjusting the Sound
u
P.175
Balance / Fader
*
Adjusts the settings of the audio
speakers’ sound.
Adjusting the Sound
u
P.175
Audio Zones & Balance / Fader
*
Adjusts the settings of the audio
speakers’ sound.
Adjusting the Sound
u
P.175
Speed Volume Compensation
*
Adjusts the volume level based on the
vehicle speed.
Adjusting the Sound
u
P.175
Bose Centerpoint
*
Adjusts the settings of the audio
speakers’ sound.
Adjusting the Sound
u
P.175
Bose Dynamic Speed
Compensation
*
Adjusts the volume level based on the
vehicle speed.
Adjusting the Sound
u
P.175
*: Not available on all models
3
Controls > 12.3" Color Touchscreen Customized Features
205
3
Controls
Sound Volume
System Sounds
Adjusts the sound volume.
Voice Recognition
Adjusts the sound volume.
Navigation Guidance
Adjusts the sound volume.
Phone Calls
Adjusts the sound volume.
Camera
Rear Wide Camera ➔ Guidelines
Fixed Guideline
On/Off
Dynamic Guideline
On/Off
Cross Traffic Monitor
*
On/Off
Voice Control
Default Assist App
*1
None/Alexa/Google Assistant
Default Assist App
*2
None/Alexa
Listen for “Hey Siri”
*3
On/Off
Google Assistant
*1
Sets the functions of Google Assistant.
*1: Models with Google built-in
*2: Models without Google built-in
*3: Activates when the iPhone is connected.
Security
You can customize security settings. Please confirm the details on the audio/
information screen. Specifications are subject to change via system updates, etc.
Google
*1
You can customize Google settings. Please confirm the details on the audio/
information screen. Specifications are subject to change via system updates, etc.
*1: Models with Google built-in
Advanced Settings
You can customize advanced system settings. Please confirm the details on the
audio/information screen. Specifications may be changed via system updates, etc.
*: Not available on all models
3
Controls > 12.3" Color Touchscreen Customized Features
206
How to Customize the Vehicle Settings
With the power mode in ON, select (Home) icon ➔ Vehicle Settings ➔ setting
item.
List of Customizable Options
TPMS Calibration
*
TPMS Calibration
Calibrate
Driver Assist System Setup
Forward Collision Warning Distance
Long/Normal
*1
/Short
Head-up Warning
*
On
*1
/Off
Road Departure Mitigation Setting
Narrow/Normal
*1
/Wide/Warning Only
ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep
On/Off
*1
Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep
On/Off
*1
Blind Spot Information
Audible And Visual Alert
*1
/Visual
Alert
Traffic Sign Recognition System
Display Setting
On
*1
/Off
Traffic
Sign Recognition System
Speed Limit Warning
On/Off
*1
Speed Limit Warning Threshold
Setting
Speed Limit
*1
/Speed Limit +3mph/
Speed Limit +5mph/Speed Limit
+10mph (When mph is selected)
Speed Limit
*1
/Speed Limit +5km/h/
Speed Limit +10km/h/Speed Limit
+15km/h (When km/h is selected)
Driver Attention Monitor
Tactile And Audible Alert
*1
/Tactile
Alert/Off
Rear Sensor Setting
*
On
*1
/Off
*1: Default Setting
Meter/Head-up Display
*
Setup
Adjust Outside Temp. Display
-5°F ~ ±0°F
*1
~ +5°F (U.S.)
-3°C ~ ±0°C
*1
~ +3°C (Canada)
“Trip A” Reset Timing
When Fully Refueled/IGN Off/
Manually Reset
*1
*: Not available on all models
3
Controls > 12.3" Color Touchscreen Customized Features
207
3
Controls
“Trip B” Reset Timing
When Fully Refueled/IGN Off/
Manually Reset
*1
Adjust Alarm Volume
High/Mid
*1
/Low
Fuel Efficiency Backlight
On
*1
/Off
Turn by Turn Auto Display
On
*1
/Off
Rear Seat Reminder
On
*1
/Off
Speed/Distance Units
km/h·km/mph·miles
*1
(U.S.)
km/h·km
*1
/mph·miles (Canada)
*1: Default Setting
Driving Position Setup
*
Memory Position Link
On
*1
/Off
Seat Position Movement At Entry/
Exit
On
*1
/Off
*1: Default Setting
Keyless Access Setup
Door Unlock Mode
Driver Door Only
*1
/All Doors
Keyless Access Light Flash
On
*1
/Off
Keyless Access Beep
On
*1
/Off
Remote Start System On/Off
On
*1
/Off
Lockout Prevention
On
*1
/Off
*1: Default Setting
Lighting Setup
Auto High-Beam
On
*1
/Off
Interior Light Dimming Time
60sec/30sec
*1
/15sec
Headlight Auto Off Timer
60sec/30sec/15sec
*1
/0sec
Auto Light Sensitivity
*
Max/High/Mid
*1
/Low/Min
Auto Headlight On with Wiper On
On
*1
/Off
*1: Default Setting
*: Not available on all models
3
Controls > 12.3" Color Touchscreen Customized Features
208
Door Setup
Auto Door Lock
With Vehicle Speed
*1
/Shift From P/
Off
Auto Door Unlock
All Doors When Driver’s Door
Opens
*1
/All Doors With Shift To P/All
Doors When Ignition Switched Off/
Off
Walk Away Auto Lock
On/Off
*1
Keyless Lock Answer Back
On
*1
/Off
Keyless Remote Power Window
Control
On
*1
/Off
Lock Presetting
On
*1
/Off
*1: Default Setting
Climate Control Setup
Driver Seat automatic Climate
Control
On
*1
/Off
Passenger Seat automatic Climate
Control
On
*1
/Off
*1: Default Setting
INDIVIDUAL Settings
Powertrain
ECON/NORMAL
*1
/SPORT
Steering
NORMAL
*1
/SPORT
ACC
ECON/NORMAL
*1
Gauge
NORMAL
*1
/SPORT
*1: Default Setting
Maintenance Info.
Maintenance Info.
Select Reset Items.
Vehicle Color Settings
You can change the body color of the vehicle image on the Vehicle Settings screen.
3
Controls > 12.3" Color Touchscreen Customized Features
209
3
Controls
a Color
[1 ] Select Menu.
[2 ] Select Body Color.
[3 ] Select desired color.
How to Customize the Profile Settings
You can add and change users, as well as customize user settings.
Select (Home) icon, select Profile Settings, and select a setting item you want.
Change Profile
You can change and add users.
User Information
u
P.185
Manage Profile
Use
Manage Profile to change profile settings. Please confirm the details on the
audio/information screen.
Specifications are subject to change via system updates, etc.
Driving Position Setting
By adjusting the seating position and then pressing the Memory 1 or Memory 2
button, you can store or recall up to 2 driving positions per user.
Driving Position Memory System*
u
P.75
Refer to the following for details on how to adjust seating positions.
Adjusting the Front Seat Positions
u
P.71
3
Controls > 12.3" Color Touchscreen Customized Features
210
Defaulting All the Settings
Reset all the menu and customized settings to their factory defaults.
If you perform Factory Data Reset, it will reset the preinstalled apps to their factory default.
If you perform Factory Data Reset, you cannot use the HondaLink® because it goes offline.
HondaLink®
u
P.190
!
When you transfer the vehicle to a third-party, reset all settings to
default and delete all personal data.
Defaulting General Settings
Only the Owner user can execute this command.
If current profile is not the Owner user, please switch users.
Switching Users
u
P.187
[1 ] Select (Home) icon.
[2 ] Select General Settings.
[3 ] Select System.
[4 ] Select Factory Data Reset.
≫
A confirmation message appears on the screen.
[5 ] Select Continue.
[6 ] Select Reset to reset the settings.
≫
The system will reboot.
Defaulting Vehicle Settings
[1 ] Select (Home) icon.
[2 ] Select Vehicle Settings.
[3 ] Select Menu.
[4 ] Select Default All.
[5 ] Select Yes.
3
Controls > 12.3" Color Touchscreen Customized Features
211
3
Controls
3
Controls >
General Information on the Audio System
Compatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash
Drives
The following information was made based on the most up-to-date information at the
time this manual was written. There may be some discrepancies with updated
versions of the audio system.
iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility
Model
Made for iPod touch (6th generation)/iPod touch (7th generation)
Made for iPhone 5s/iPhone 6/iPhone 6 Plus/iPhone 6s/iPhone 6s Plus/iPhone SE/iPhone 7/
iPhone 7 Plus/iPhone 8/iPhone 8 Plus/iPhone X/iPhone XR/iPhone XS/iPhone XS Max/iPhone
11/iPhone 11 Pro/iPhone 11 Pro Max/iPhone SE (2nd generation)/iPhone 12 mini/iPhone 12/
iPhone 12 Pro/iPhone 12 Pro Max/iPhone 13 mini/iPhone 13/iPhone 13 Pro/iPhone 13 Pro
Max/iPhone SE (3rd generation)/iPhone 14/iPhone 14 Plus/iPhone 14 Pro/iPhone 14 Pro Max/
iPhone 15/iPhone 15 Plus/iPhone 15 Pro/iPhone 15 Pro Max
This system may not work with all software versions of these devices.
Compatible USB Flash Drives
Please use a recommended USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher formatted with
FAT16 or FAT32.
Some digital audio players may not be compatible.
Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work.
Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
Some versions of MP3, WMA, AAC, FLAC, or WAV formats may be unsupported.
Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored order. This order may be different from
the order displayed on your PC or device.
Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
212
Honda App License Agreement
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
PLEASE CAREFULLY READ THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (THIS
“AGREEMENT”) WHICH GOVERNS YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON
YOUR HONDA OR ACURA VEHICLE (YOUR “VEHICLE”) AS WELL AS THE
APPLICATIONS, SERVICES, FUNCTIONS, AND CONTENT PROVIDED THROUGH THE
SOFTWARE (COLLECTIVELY, THE “SERVICES”). YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR
SERVICES WILL SERVE AS YOUR CONSENT TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT.
THE SOFTWARE IS OWNED (OR LICENSED), PROVIDED, AND/OR OPERATED BY
AMERICAN HONDA MOTOR CO. INC., (“HONDA,” “US,” “WE,” OR “OUR”), WITH ITS
BUSINESS ADDRESS AT 1919 TORRANCE BLVD., TORRANCE, CA 90501. REFERENCE
TO “HONDA” IN THIS AGREEMENT INCLUDES HONDA’S PARENT COMPANY AND ITS
AFFILIATES AND DESIGNATED AGENTS. THE SERVICES ARE OWNED (OR
LICENSED), PROVIDED, AND/OR OPERATED BY HONDA OR A THIRD-PARTY SERVICE
PROVIDER (A “PROVIDER”). REFERENCE TO A “PROVIDER” IN THIS AGREEMENT
INCLUDES SUCH PROVIDER’S PARENT COMPANY, AFFILIATES, AND DESIGNATED
AGENTS.
A. Description of the Software. The SOFTWARE includes the software, firmware and
the like, installed and executing on your VEHICLE during manufacture, and thereafter
updated from time to time by HONDA, you or an authorized HONDA dealer (a
“DEALER”). The SOFTWARE allows you to access and use a variety of SERVICES,
including but not limited to: (a) HONDA applications, services, and content provided
through the SOFTWARE (together, “HONDA SERVICES”); and (b) PROVIDER
applications, services, and content provided through the SOFTWARE (together,
“PROVIDER SERVICES”), each of which may provide access to various information,
media, content, and services.
B. SOFTWARE Licensing and Intellectual Property.
1. SOFTWARE. This AGREEMENT grants you a non-exclusive, limited, and revocable
license to use the SOFTWARE and SERVICES solely (a) as installed on your VEHICLE
by HONDA, (b) as updated on your Vehicle by HONDA, you (but only as and when
directed by HONDA), or a DEALER and (c) as permitted under the terms of this
AGREEMENT.
2. HONDA Services. The SOFTWARE may provide you with access to various HONDA
SERVICES. Installation, activation, or use of HONDA SERVICES may require your
consent to additional terms, conditions, and privacy policies applicable to those
HONDA SERVICES (the “HONDA TERMS”). You acknowledge and agree that any
collection, use, sharing of data generated by your VEHICLE or your use of your
VEHICLE, and your use of the HONDA SERVICES shall be subject to this AGREEMENT
and any additional HONDA TERMS that may be specifically applicable to such HONDA
SERVICES or data generation. The HONDA SERVICES may collect, use, and share
such data while you are using the SOFTWARE.
3
Controls > General Information on the Audio System
213
3
Controls
3. Open-Source Software. The SOFTWARE and SERVICES may incorporate software
licensed to HONDA under free or open-source licenses which govern HONDA’s
distribution and your use of such software. HONDA and the third-party authors,
licensors, and distributors of such software disclaim all warranties and all liability
arising from any and all use or distribution of the software. To the extent such
software is provided under terms that differ from the applicable free or open-source
licenses, those terms are offered by HONDA alone. Additional information regarding
free and open-source software incorporated in the SOFTWARE and SERVICES is
available in this manual or within the SOFTWARE.
4. Provider Services. The SOFTWARE may provide you with access to various
PROVIDER SERVICES. Installation or use of such PROVIDER SERVICES may require
your consent to additional terms, conditions, and privacy policies of the applicable
PROVIDER (the “PROVIDER TERMS”). This AGREEMENT restricts the manner in which
you can install and use PROVIDER SERVICES but does not grant you a license or
permission to use such PROVIDER SERVICES. Your permission to use PROVIDER
SERVICES is limited and subject to any license grants, conditions, and limitations
included in the PROVIDER TERMS. You acknowledge that any collection, use, sharing
of your information, targeted advertising practices by PROVIDERS, and your use of the
PROVIDER SERVICES shall be subject to both this AGREEMENT and any applicable
PROVIDER TERMS. The PROVIDER SERVICES may collect, use, and share such
information while you are using the SOFTWARE.
5. License Limitations and Restrictions on Use.
(a) Limited License. You understand and agree that the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are
licensed, not sold, to you solely for use in accordance with this AGREEMENT and any
applicable PROVIDER TERMS, and any documentation for the VEHICLE made
available to you by HONDA (any “DOCUMENTATION”). HONDA and its licensors
reserve all rights in the SOFTWARE and HONDA SERVICES not expressly granted to
you under this AGREEMENT. PROVIDERS and their licensors reserve all rights in the
PROVIDER SERVICES not expressly granted to you under the applicable PROVIDER
TERMS.
(b) Restrictions on Use. The licenses granted under this AGREEMENT do not permit
you to use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES on a device other than your VEHICLE. As a
condition of using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, you agree that you may not and will
not:
(1) copy, download, distribute, modify, publish, sell, rent, lease, lend, license, sublicense,
reuse, or create derivative works of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES or any of the content or
other material within the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, including without limitation, HONDA or
PROVIDER names, logos, or any other trademarks of HONDA or PROVIDERS or used in
association with the SOFTWARE or any SERVICES, except as required to use the SOFTWARE
or SERVICES in accordance with this AGREEMENT, any applicable PROVIDER TERMS, and
the DOCUMENTATION;
(2) access or use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in any manner intended to damage or impair
the operation of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES or interfere with anyone else’s use and
enjoyment of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES;
3
Controls > General Information on the Audio System
214
(3) access or attempt to access any system or server on which the SOFTWARE or SERVICES
is hosted or modify or alter the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in any way;
(4) use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES for any unlawful purpose, or in violation of any third
party rights;
(5) use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in violation of any applicable traffic regulations, rules or
laws, including but not limited to any driver distraction laws, rules or regulations;
(6) violate the terms of this AGREEMENT, any HONDA TERMS, any PROVIDER TERMS or
other applicable third-party terms, conditions, and privacy policies; or
(7) reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, attempt to derive the source code of, nor
permit others to reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble, or attempt to derive the
source code of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, except and only to the extent that such activity
is expressly permitted (a) by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation or (b) the terms
of applicable free or opensource software licenses.
6. Intellectual Property Rights. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the
SOFTWARE and SERVICES, the accompanying DOCUMENTATION, and all copies of
the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are owned by HONDA, PROVIDERS, or their suppliers or
licensors. This AGREEMENT does not grant you any rights in connection with any
trademarks or service marks of HONDA, PROVIDERS, or their licensors, affiliates, or
suppliers.
7. Export Restrictions: You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are
subject to U.S., European Union, and other export jurisdictions. You agree to comply
with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE and
SERVICES, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user,
end-use, and destination restrictions issued by the U.S. and other governments.
3
Controls > General Information on the Audio System
215
3
Controls
C. SOFTWARE Operation
1. HONDA reserves the right to suspend or terminate your access to and use of the
SOFTWARE or SERVICES if you are found to be in violation of this AGREEMENT or as
reasonably deemed necessary by HONDA.
2.Eligibility/Registration/Activation. The SOFTWARE is intended for and available to
individuals who (a) are of legal age of majority in their jurisdiction of residence (and at
least 18 years of age), or are younger than 18 years of age and possess a valid
driver’s license issued by their jurisdiction of residence, and (b) own or have
permissive access to a compatible VEHICLE. We do not knowingly collect any
information, including personal information, from children under 13. If we learn or are
notified that we have collected personal information of a child under 13, we will
immediately take steps to delete such information.
3.Use of PROVIDER SERVICES through the SOFTWARE. Certain PROVIDER
SERVICES made available through the SOFTWARE may require that you register or
otherwise have an account with the PROVIDER and agree to PROVIDER TERMS. Any
use of any of such PROVIDER SERVICES within the SOFTWARE is subject to this
AGREEMENT and the applicable PROVIDER TERMS. HONDA does not exercise control
over such PROVIDER SERVICES and is not responsible or liable for the availability,
security, or content of such PROVIDER SERVICES, and the inclusion of any PROVIDER
SERVICES does not imply a referral from, the approval of, or the endorsement by
HONDA of such PROVIDER SERVICES. HONDA is not responsible or liable, directly or
indirectly, for any damage relating to or resulting from your use of the PROVIDER
SERVICES.
4.Links to Third Party Sites: The SOFTWARE may provide you with the ability to
access third-party sites and content through the use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES.
The third-party sites and content are not under the control of HONDA. HONDA is not
responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for such third-party websites and their
content or for any damage relating to or resulting from your access or use of such
websites and content.
5.Unauthorized Use and Abuse. You are responsible for ensuring your (and any
authorized third parties’) use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES remains in compliance
with this AGREEMENT and all other applicable HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER
TERMS. You acknowledge and agree that any use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES
occurring through your VEHICLE will be deemed your actions and that HONDA and
PROVIDERS may rely upon such actions. You agree to immediately notify us if you
suspect fraudulent or abusive activity involving the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. If you so
notify us or if we otherwise suspect fraudulent or abusive activity, you agree to
cooperate with us in any fraud investigation and to use any fraud prevention
measures we prescribe. Your failure to immediately notify us or cooperate to use such
measures will result in your liability for all fraudulent usage or abusive activity
associated with your VEHICLE.
3
Controls > General Information on the Audio System
216
6.SOFTWARE Updates. The SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be updated when your
VEHICLE is serviced by a DEALER or remotely, over-the-air, by HONDA from time to
time; such updates may occur with or without further notice or your future consent.
The SOFTWARE may be updated at HONDA’s discretion and for any purpose
including, without limitation, to patch or otherwise improve the SOFTWARE or
SERVICES functionality, security, or stability. All updates to the SOFTWARE and
SERVICES are subject to this AGREEMENT and any other applicable HONDA TERMS
and PROVIDER TERMS.
7.Uninstalling, Removing, and Replacing the SOFTWARE. Replacing SOFTWARE or
HONDA SERVICES with software or firmware not provided and installed by HONDA or
a DEALER will render all representations and warranties for the SOFTWARE, HONDA
SERVICES, and VEHICLE functionality reliant upon the SOFTWARE or HONDA
SERVICES null and void.
D. SOFTWARE Operational Notices and Warnings
1.Vehicle Geolocation Information. You acknowledge that your VEHICLE may be
equipped with certain traffic and map features. The traffic feature will automatically
collect and transmit, through GPS technology, your Vehicle’s current location
(longitude and latitude), travel direction and speed (“VEHICLE GEOLOCATION
INFORMATION”) to HONDA and PROVIDERS. The VEHICLE GEOLOCATION
INFORMATION is used by HONDA and PROVIDERS to provide traffic and navigation-
related information to you, but may also be used to provide other SERVICES or offers
to you. HONDA will not use such VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION for its own
marketing efforts, or provide such information to unaffiliated third parties for their
own purposes, without your express consent.
2.Potential Map Inaccuracy and Route Safety. Maps used by this system may be
inaccurate because of changes in roads, traffic controls, routing, or driving conditions.
Always use good judgment and common sense when following suggested routes. Do
not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal driving
maneuver, if you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would be directed
into an area that you consider unsafe. Do not rely on any navigation features included
in the system to route you to emergency services. Not all emergency services such as
police, fire stations, hospitals, or clinics are likely to be contained in the map database
for such navigation features. Ask local authorities or an emergency services operator
for such locations and routes. The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe
operation of the vehicle and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the
suggested directions. Any navigation features are provided only as an aid. Make your
driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing traffic
regulations. Navigation features are not a substitute for your personal judgment. Any
route suggestions made by the SOFTWARE or SERVICES should never replace any
local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or knowledge of safe driving
practices.
3
Controls > General Information on the Audio System
217
3
Controls
3.Speech Recognition: You acknowledge and understand that HONDA and
PROVIDERS may record, retain, and use voices commands when you use the speech
recognition components of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. You and all VEHICLE
operators and passengers (a) consent to the recording and retention of voice
commands in support of providing speech recognition components and (b) release
HONDA and PROVIDERS from all claims, liabilities, and losses that may result from
any use of such recorded voice commands. Recognition errors are inherent in speech
recognition. It is your responsibility to monitor any speech recognition functions
included in the system and address any errors. Neither HONDA nor PROVIDERS will
be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech recognition process.
4.Distraction Hazards. Navigation features may require manual (non-verbal) input or
setup. Attempting to perform such set-up or insert data while driving can seriously
distract your attention and could cause a crash or other serious consequences; the
ability to undertake such interactions may also be limited by state or local law, which
laws you are responsible to know and follow. Even occasional short scans of the
screen may be hazardous if your attention has been diverted away from your driving
at a critical time. Pull over and stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before
attempting to access a function of the system requiring prolonged attention. Do not
raise the volume excessively. Keep the volume at a level where you can still hear
outside traffic and emergency signals while driving. Driving while unable to hear these
sounds could result in a crash.
3
Controls > General Information on the Audio System
218
E. Information Collection and Storage
1.Information Collection, Use, Transmission and Storage of Data. Consent to Use of
Data: You agree that HONDA and PROVIDERS may collect and use your information
gathered in any manner as part of product support services related to the SOFTWARE
or related services. HONDA may share such information with third parties, including,
without limitation, PROVIDERS, third party software and services suppliers, their
affiliates and/or their designated agents, solely to improve their products or to provide
services or technologies to you. HONDA, third party software and systems suppliers,
their affiliates and/or their designated agent may disclose this information to others,
but not in a form that personally identifies you.
2.Information Storage. Depending on the type of multimedia system you have in your
VEHICLE, certain information may be stored for ease of use of the SOFTWARE
including, without limitation, search history, location history in certain applications,
previous and saved destinations, map locations within certain applications, and
device numbers and contact information.
(a) Vehicle Health Information. Your VEHICLE may remotely transmit information
regarding the status and health of your VEHICLE (“VEHICLE INFORMATION”) to
HONDA without notification to you. VEHICLE INFORMATION may contain VEHICLE
maintenance and malfunction status that is derived from VEHICLE diagnostic data
and includes, but is not limited to, status of powered doors and windows, battery life
data, battery charging data, VEHICLE speed, coolant temperature, air compressor
revolution, output power, warning codes, diagnostic trouble codes, fuel injection
volume, and engine rotations per minute. VEHICLE HEALTH INFORMATION may be
used by HONDA for research and development, to deliver HONDA SERVICES and
information to you, and to contact you, and is retained only for a period of time
necessary to fulfill these goals.
(b) VEHICLE Geolocation Data (non-navigation/map based). If you opt-in to
geolocation-based SERVICES, your vehicle’s geolocation data (latitude and longitude)
will be automatically sent from your VEHICLE to HONDA and PROVIDERS.
(c) You understand that the inputting or uploading of information to your VEHICLE’s
multimedia system or the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is at your own risk and that
HONDA is not responsible for unauthorized access to or use of any personal or other
information. All information uploaded to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be
stored on your VEHICLES’s multimedia system and you understand that the security
and safety of your VEHICLE’s multimedia system is your sole responsibility.
3
Controls > General Information on the Audio System
219
3
Controls
F. NO WARRANTY. You understand and agree that your use of the SOFTWARE and
SERVICES are solely at your own risk and that you will be solely responsible for any
damage to your VEHICLE’s multimedia system or any other equipment or any loss of
data that may result from your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. THE SOFTWARE
AND SERVICES ARE PROVIDED ON AN “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE” BASIS
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESSED, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY. WE
SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. HONDA makes
no warranties that the SOFTWARE or SERVICES will meet your requirements, or that
the SOFTWARE or SERVICES will be uninterrupted, timely, secure, non-infringing or
error free. You understand and agree that you are responsible for any and all charges,
costs or expenses associated with your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. Advice or
information, whether oral or written, obtained by you from us or through the
SOFTWARE or SERVICES are provided for informational purposes only and will not
create any warranty not expressly made herein. You should not rely on any such
information or advice. We assume no liability or responsibility for any errors or
omissions in the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. We do not make any warranty or
representation that your use of the material displayed on, or obtained through, the
SOFTWARE or SERVICES is non-infringing of any rights of any third party. Any decision
or action taken by you on the basis of information or content provided via the
application is at your sole discretion and risk. HONDA and PROVIDERS are not
responsible or liable for any such decision, or for the accuracy, completeness,
usefulness, or availability of any content or information displayed, transmitted, or
otherwise made available via the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. To the extent jurisdictions
do not allow the exclusion of certain warranties, some of the above exclusions may
not apply to you.
G. LIMITATIONS ON LIABILITY. You and HONDA are each waiving important rights.
1.Limitations on YOUR liability. HONDA cannot recover from you any consequential,
indirect, incidental, or special damages, or attorney’s fees in connection with your use
of the SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES. HONDA WAIVES TO THE FULLEST EXTENT
ALLOWED BY LAW ANY CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OTHER THAN DIRECT,
COMPENSATORY DAMAGES AS LIMITED IN THIS AGREEMENT.
3
Controls > General Information on the Audio System
220
2.Limitation on HONDA and PROVIDER liability. Neither HONDA nor PROVIDERS will
be liable to you or any other party for consequential, indirect, incidental, special, or
punitive damages (including without limitation lost profits) in connection with your
use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, even if HONDA or PROVIDERS are aware of the
possibility of such damages. These limitations apply to all claims, including, without
limitation, claims in contract and tort (such as negligence, product liability and strict
liability). To the extent that a jurisdiction does not permit the exclusion or limitation of
liability as set forth herein our liability is limited to the maximum extent permitted by
law in such states. If HONDA or PROVIDERS are found liable to you for any reason,
you agree that the aggregate liability of all these parties to you for any claim is limited
to ten U.S. dollars (US $10.00). Neither HONDA nor any PROVIDER would have
agreed to provide the SOFTWARE or SERVICES to you if you did not agree to this
limitation. This amount is the sole and exclusive liability of HONDA and PROVIDERS to
you, and is payable as liquidated damages and not as a penalty. Except where
prohibited by law, you may not bring any claim against HONDA or any third-party
beneficiary more than two (2) years after the claim arises. We do not have any liability
for SOFTWARE or SERVICES interruptions of any length.
(a) Release of HONDA and PROVIDERS For yourself and anyone else claiming under
you, you agree to release and discharge HONDA, PROVIDERS, their respective
officers, directors, and employees, and each third-party beneficiary from all claims,
liabilities and losses in connection with the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, including, but
not limited to claims for personal injury or property damage arising from the total or
partial failure of performance of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, even if caused by or
based upon the negligence, gross negligence, strict products liability, Deceptive Trade
Practices Act violations, bad faith, or breach of warranty of us or the malfunction of
the SOFTWARE or SOFTWARE SERVICES. YOU AGREE TO WAIVE TO THE FULLEST
EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, ANY CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OTHER THAN DIRECT,
COMPENSATORY DAMAGES AS LIMITED IN THIS AGREEMENT. YOU HEREBY
RELEASE AND DISCHARGE HONDA AND ITS LICENSORS AND CONTRACTORS
(INCLUDING ANY THIRD PARTIES PROVIDING ALL OR PART OF THE SOFTWARE OR
SERVICES) FROM AND AGAINST ANY CLAIMS, DAMAGES, EXPENSES AND LIABILITY
ARISING FROM OR RELATED TO ANY INJURIES, DAMAGES, OR LOSSES TO ANY
PERSON (INCLUDING DEATH) OR PROPERTY OF ANY KIND RESULTING IN WHOLE
OR PART, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, FROM YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR
SERVICES.
H. Survival. You agree that the limitations of liability and indemnities in this
AGREEMENT will survive even after the AGREEMENT has ended. These limitations of
liability apply not only to you, but to anyone using the SOFTWARE or SERVICES via
your VEHICLE, to anyone making a claim on your behalf, and to any claims made by
your family, employees, customers, or others arising out of or relating to your
VEHICLE, the SOFTWARE, or SERVICES.
3
Controls > General Information on the Audio System
221
3
Controls
I. Availability/Interruption. The SOFTWARE and certain SERVICES are made
available through your VEHICLE’s compatible multimedia system when the VEHICLE
is turned on. Certain SERVICES may be available only through your compatible mobile
device when it is within the operating range of the VEHICLE and a wireless carrier.
The availability of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be subject to transmission
limitation or interruption, including but not limited to technical obsolesce or
sunsetting of the hardware, software or firmware, inside of or external to the Vehicle,
required for data transmission or receipt. HONDA does not guarantee that the
SOFTWARE, SERVICES, or any portion thereof will be available at all times or in all
areas. You acknowledge and agree that HONDA is not responsible for performance
degradation, interruption or delays. You acknowledge that HONDA shall not be liable
to you if the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in a given location are not available. If the
SOFTWARE or SERVICES are not available within your intended location, you agree
that your sole remedy shall be to cease using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES.
J. PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support for the SOFTWARE is provided by HONDA.
For product support, please refer to HONDA instructions provided in the
DOCUMENTATION. Should you have any questions concerning this AGREEMENT, or if
you desire to contact HONDA for any other reason, please refer to the HONDA contact
information provided in the DOCUMENTATION.
K. Termination and Transfer.
1. Termination. This AGREEMENT is effective until terminated by you or US. WE may
terminate this AGREEMENT for any or no reason, and with or without notice to you.
Your rights under this AGREEMENT will terminate automatically without notice from
US if you fail to comply with any term of this AGREEMENT. Upon termination of this
AGREEMENT, you shall cease all use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES.
2. Transfer: You may permanently transfer your rights under this AGREEMENT only
as part of a sale or transfer of the VEHICLE, provided you retain no copies, you
transfer all of the SOFTWARE and HONDA SERVICES (including all component parts,
the media and printed materials, and any upgrades), and the recipient agrees to the
terms of this AGREEMENT. You agree to notify HONDA upon the sale or transfer of the
VEHICLE. To contact HONDA, please refer to the HONDA contact information
provided in the DOCUMENTATION.
L. Changes to the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. WE may change, modify, or update the
SOFTWARE or SERVICES from time to time. Unless explicitly stated otherwise, any
new features or services that augment or enhance the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in the
future shall respectively be considered part of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES and
subject to this AGREEMENT. WE reserve the right at any time and from time to time to
interrupt, restrict, modify, suspend, discontinue, temporarily or permanently, the
SOFTWARE or SERVICES (or any portion thereof), with or without notice to you, and
you agree that HONDA shall not be liable to you or to any third party for any
modification, suspension or discontinuance of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES.
M. ARBITRATION:
3
Controls > General Information on the Audio System
222
PLEASE READ THIS ARBITRATION PROVISION CAREFULLY TO UNDERSTAND YOUR
RIGHTS. YOU AGREE THAT ANY CLAIM THAT YOU MAY HAVE IN THE FUTURE MUST BE
RESOLVED THROUGH BINDING ARBITRATION. YOU WAIVE THE RIGHT TO HAVE YOUR
DISPUTE HEARD IN COURT AND WAIVE THE RIGHT TO BRING CLASS CLAIMS. YOU
UNDERSTAND THAT DISCOVERY AND APPEAL RIGHTS ARE MORE LIMITED IN
ARBITRATION.
Arbitration is a method of resolving a claim, dispute or controversy without filing a lawsuit.
By agreeing to arbitrate, the right to go to court is waived and instead claims, disputes or
controversies are submitted to binding arbitration. This provision sets forth the terms and
conditions of our agreement. YOU and HONDA agree and acknowledge that this Agreement
affects interstate commerce and the Federal Arbitration Act (“FAA”) applies. By using the
Software, Vehicle, or Services, YOU elect to have disputes resolved by arbitration.
YOU, HONDA or any involved third party may pursue a Claim. “Claim” means any dispute
between YOU, HONDA, or any involved third party relating to your use of the Software, the
Vehicle, or the Services, this Agreement, or our relationship, including any representations,
omissions or warranties. “Claim” does not include personal injury or wrongful death claims.
YOU or HONDA may seek remedies in small claims court or provisional judicial remedies
without arbitrating. In addition, notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, YOU or
HONDA may seek equitable relief in a court of competent jurisdiction.
YOU or HONDA may select arbitration with American Arbitration Association, JAMS or
National Arbitration and Mediation. Contact these sponsors for their rules. The hearing will
be in the federal district where YOU reside. If agreed, it may be by telephone or written
submissions. Filing and arbitrator fees to be paid per the sponsor rules. You may contact the
sponsor for a fee waiver. If no fee waivers, HONDA will pay filing and arbitrator fees up to
$5,000, unless law requires more. Each party is responsible for other fees. Arbitrator may
award costs or fees to prevailing party, if permitted by law. HONDA will not seek fees, unless
the claims are frivolous.
Arbitrator shall be an attorney or current or retired judge familiar with automotive or
consumer software. The arbitrator shall follow substantive law, statute of limitations and
decide all issues relating to the interpretation, construction, enforceability and applicability
of this provision. The arbitrator may order relief permitted by law. This provision is governed
and enforceable by the FAA. An award shall include a written opinion and be final, subject to
appeal by the FAA.
This provision survives termination of this Agreement or relationship, bankruptcy,
assignment or transfer. If part of this provision is unenforceable, the remainder remains in
effect. If unenforceability allows arbitration as a class action, then this provision is entirely
unenforceable. You may opt out within 30 days of your initial use of the Software by sending
a signed, written notice to HONDA at American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Honda Automobile
Customer Service Mail Stop CHI-5, 1919 Torrance Blvd. Torrance, CA 90501-2746. HONDA
reserves the right to make changes to this provision after providing written notice and an
opportunity to opt out.
3
Controls > General Information on the Audio System
223
3
Controls
N. Miscellaneous: You may not assign this AGREEMENT without HONDA’s prior
written consent. This AGREEMENT and any additional HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER
TERMS represents the entire agreement between you and US. HONDA may amend
the terms of this AGREEMENT by providing you with notices of such updated terms. If
you do not consent to be bound by the updated terms, your sole remedy will be to
cease using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES. If any part of this AGREEMENT is found
invalid, void, or unenforceable, the balance of the AGREEMENT will remain valid and
enforceable according to its terms. To the fullest extent permitted by law, and except
as explicitly provided otherwise, this AGREEMENT and any disputes arising out of or
relating to it will be governed by the laws of the State of California, except that
California laws concerning choice of law or conflicts shall not apply if they would
cause the substantive law of another jurisdiction to apply. Notwithstanding the
foregoing, Section M shall be governed by the Federal Arbitration Act and the laws of
the State of California, as applicable, as set forth therein. The failure to enforce any
term of this AGREEMENT on one occasion shall not prevent enforcement on any other
occasion or the enforcement of any other term. Headings and captions shall not be
considered included for purposes of interpretation or application hereof, but are for
convenience only.
3
Controls > General Information on the Audio System
224
About Open Source Licenses
To see the open source license information, follow these steps.
[1 ] Select (Home) icon.
[2 ] Select General Settings.
[3 ] Select Advanced Settings.
[4 ] Select System.
[5 ] Select Legal Information.
[6 ] Select Third-party licenses.
License Information
Bluetooth®
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by ALPS ALPINE CO., LTD. is under license. Other
trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
https://www.bluetooth.com/develop-with-bluetooth/marketing-branding/
Windows Media
This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft. Use or
distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license
from Microsoft.
Apple
“Made for iPod,” and “Made for iPhone,” mean that an electronic accessory has been
designed to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone, respectively, and has been
certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not
responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and
regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, or iPhone,
may affect wireless performance.
Apple, the Apple Logo, iPhone, iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries. Apple CarPlay, iPod, iPhone, iTunes, Siri and Lightning
are trademarks of Apple Inc. App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.
3
Controls > General Information on the Audio System
225
3
Controls
MPEG
Mpeg4 Visual
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE MPEG-4 VISUAL PATENT PORTFOLIO
LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER FOR (i)
ENCODING VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE MPEG-4 VISUALA STANDARD
(“MPEG-4 VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODING MPEG-4 VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY
A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR
WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED BY MPEG LA TO PROVIDE
MPEG-4 VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER
USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION INCLUDING THAT RELATING TO PROMOTIONAL,
INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL USES AND LICENSING MAY BE OBTAINED FROM
MPEG LA, LLC.
SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.
AVC/H.264
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR
THE PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO
IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC
VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-
COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER
LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED
FOR ANY OTHER USE.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE HTTP://
WWW.MPEGLA.COM.
3
Controls > General Information on the Audio System
226
HD Radio™
HD Radio™ Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation,
a subsidiary of Xperi Inc., U.S. and Foreign Patents. For patents see https://
xperi.com/hd-radio-patents/. Xperi, HD Radio, HD, and ‘ARC’ logos and their
respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Xperi Inc. and its
subsidiaries in the United States and other countries.
Legal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android
Auto
OWNER’S MANUAL LICENSE/LIABILITY STATEMENTS
USE OF APPLE CARPLAY IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE CARPLAY
TERMS OF USE, WHICH ARE INCLUDED AS PART OF THE APPLE iOS TERMS OF USE.
IN SUMMARY, THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE DISCLAIM APPLE AND ITS SERVICE
PROVIDERS’ LIABILITY IF THE SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE
DISCONTINUED, STRICTLY LIMIT APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ OTHER
LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING, FOR
EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND VEHICLE STATUS) BEING
GATHERED AND STORED BY APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE
CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF CARPLAY, INCLUDING
THE POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE APPLE’S PRIVACY POLICY FOR
DETAILS REGARDING APPLE’S USE AND HANDLING OF DATA UPLOADED BY
CARPLAY.
3
Controls > General Information on the Audio System
227
3
Controls
USE OF ANDROID AUTO IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE ANDROID AUTO
TERMS OF USE WHICH MUST BE AGREED TO WHEN THE ANDROID AUTO
APPLICATION IS DOWNLOADED TO YOUR ANDROID PHONE. IN SUMMARY, THE
ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE DISCLAIM GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’
LIABILITY IF THE SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE
DISCONTINUED, STRICTLY LIMIT GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ OTHER
LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING, FOR
EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND VEHICLE STATUS) BEING
GATHERED AND STORED BY GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE
CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF ANDROID AUTO,
INCLUDING THE POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE GOOGLE’S PRIVACY
POLICY FOR DETAILS REGARDING GOOGLE’S USE AND HANDLING OF DATA
UPLOADED BY ANDROID AUTO.
DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES; LIMITATION ON LIABILITY
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF APPLE CARPLAY OR
ANDROID AUTO (“THE APPLICATIONS”) IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND THAT THE
ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY AND
EFFORT IS WITH YOU TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW,
AND THAT THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS IS
PROVIDED “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE,” WITH ALL FAULTS AND WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND HONDA HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND
CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE
APPLICATIONS, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, ACCURACY, QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD
PARTY RIGHTS. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY
HONDA OR AN AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY. AS
EXAMPLES, AND WITHOUT LIMITATION, HONDA DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY
REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF DATA PROVIDED BY THE APPLICATIONS, SUCH AS
THE ACCURACY OF DIRECTIONS, ESTIMATED TRAVEL TIME, SPEED LIMITS, ROAD
CONDITIONS, NEWS, WEATHER, TRAFFIC, OR OTHER CONTENT PROVIDED BY
APPLE, GOOGLE, THEIR AFFILIATES, OR THIRD PARTY PROVIDERS; HONDA DOES
NOT GUARANTEE AGAINST LOSS OF APPLICATION DATA, WHICH MAY BE LOST AT
ANY TIME; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE THAT THE APPLICATIONS OR ANY
SERVICES PROVIDED THROUGH THEM WILL BE PROVIDED AT ALL TIMES OR THAT
ANY OR ALL SERVICES WILL BE AVAILABLE AT ANY PARTICULAR TIME OR
LOCATION. FOR EXAMPLE, SERVICES MAY BE SUSPENDED OR INTERRUPTED
WITHOUT NOTICE FOR REPAIR, MAINTENANCE, SECURITY FIXES, UPDATES, ETC.,
SERVICES MAY BE UNAVAILABLE IN YOUR AREA OR LOCATION, ETC. IN ADDITION,
YOU UNDERSTAND THAT CHANGES IN THIRD PARTY TECHNOLOGY OR
GOVERNMENT REGULATION MAY RENDER THE SERVICES AND/OR APPLICATIONS
OBSOLETE AND/OR UNUSABLE.
3
Controls > General Information on the Audio System
228
TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA OR ITS
AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR PERSONAL INJURY, OR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, CORRUPTION OR LOSS OF DATA,
FAILURE TO TRANSMIT OR RECEIVE ANY DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR ANY
OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THE
APPLICATIONS OR YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE APPLICATIONS OR
INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS, HOWEVER CAUSED, REGARDLESS OF THE
THEORY OF LIABILITY (CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE) AND EVEN IF HONDA
WERE ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME STATES AND
JURISDICTIONS DISALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR
DAMAGES, SO THESE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN
NO EVENT SHALL HONDA’S TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL DAMAGES (OTHER
THAN AS MAY BE REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW IN CASES INVOLVING PERSONAL
INJURY) EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF FIVE DOLLARS ($5.00). THE FOREGOING
LIMITATIONS WILL APPLY EVEN IF THE ABOVE STATED REMEDY FAILS OF ITS
ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.
3
Controls > General Information on the Audio System
229
3
Controls
Honda Sensing®
About Honda Sensing®････････････････････････ 231
Device for Operating Each Function and Gauge
Content･･････････････････････････････････････ 232
Front Sensor Camera･･････････････････････････ 233
Radar Sensor･･････････････････････････････････ 235
Sonar Sensors
*
････････････････････････････････ 236
Collision Mitigation Braking System™
(CMBS™)
About Collision Mitigation Braking System™
(CMBS™)･････････････････････････････････････ 238
System Operation･････････････････････････････ 238
Operating Conditions･･････････････････････････ 239
System On and Off････････････････････････････ 240
System Limitations････････････････････････････ 241
Low Speed Braking Control
*
About Low Speed Braking Control
･････････････
244
System Operation
･････････････････････････････
244
System On and Off
････････････････････････････
246
System Limitations････････････････････････････ 246
Road Departure Mitigation System
About Road Departure Mitigation System･････ 248
System Operation･････････････････････････････ 248
Operating Conditions･･････････････････････････ 249
System On and Off････････････････････････････ 249
System Limitations････････････････････････････ 249
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with
Low Speed Follow
About Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low
Speed Follow････････････････････････････････ 252
How to Activate the System･･･････････････････ 253
To Switch the Cruise Mode････････････････････ 258
System Limitations････････････････････････････ 260
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
About Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)････ 263
Operating Conditions･･････････････････････････ 264
How to Activate the System･･･････････････････ 264
System Limitations････････････････････････････ 265
Traffic Jam Assist
About Traffic Jam Assist･･･････････････････････267
Operating Conditions･･････････････････････････ 268
How to Activate the System･･･････････････････ 268
System Limitations････････････････････････････ 269
Traffic Sign Recognition System
About Traffic Sign Recognition System････････ 271
System Operation･････････････････････････････ 271
System Limitations････････････････････････････ 272
Blind Spot Information System
About Blind Spot Information System
･････････
275
System Operation
･････････････････････････････
275
System On and Off
････････････････････････････
276
System Limitations
････････････････････････････
276
Cross Traffic Monitor
About Cross Traffic Monitor
････････････････････
278
System Operation
･････････････････････････････
278
About Screen Display･･････････････････････････279
System On and Off････････････････････････････ 279
System Limitations････････････････････････････ 279
Parking Sensor System
*
About Parking Sensor System･････････････････ 281
The Sensor Location and Range･･･････････････ 281
System On and Off････････････････････････････ 281
Operations When an Obstacle Has Been Detected
･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 282
System Limitations････････････････････････････ 283
*: Not available on all models
Safety Driving Assist System
230
4
Safety Driving Assist System >
Honda Sensing®
About Honda Sensing®
Assists with functions such as acceleration, braking, and steering in order to reduce
the burden on the driver, as well as help avoid or reduce the severity of collisions.
Honda Sensing® has the following functions:
About Collision Mitigation Braking System™ (CMBS™)
u
P.238
About Low Speed Braking Control
u
P.244
About Road Departure Mitigation System
u
P.248
About Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
u
P.252
About Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
u
P.263
About Traffic Jam Assist
u
P.267
About Traffic Sign Recognition System
u
P.271
Auto High-Beam
u
P.123
About Blind Spot Information System
u
P.275
About Cross Traffic Monitor
u
P.278
About Parking Sensor System
u
P.281
Driver Attention Monitor
u
P.300
3 WARNING
Only use Honda Sensing® as a driving assistance system.
Honda Sensing® is not an autonomous driving system. This is only a system
to assist the driver.
There are limits to the recognition and control capabilities of each of its
functions.
Overreliance on the system may lead to accidents such as collisions, which
may result in death or serious injury. Always check your surroundings and
drive safely by maintaining a sufficient following distance.
!
If you set the power mode to ON while the vehicle is moving, such as
when on a turntable in a parking lot, some functions may not work.
231
4
Safety Driving Assist System
!
To ensure proper operation of the system, observe the following:
All the tires are of the same specified size, type, and brand, and that they are
evenly worn.
Do not modify the suspension.
Device for Operating Each Function and Gauge
Content
Operating Device
a ACC with Low Speed Follow Button
Press to activate standby mode for ACC with Low Speed Follow. Or, press to cancel
the system.
b LKAS Button
Press to activate standby mode for LKAS and Traffic Jam Assist. Or, press to cancel
these systems.
c CANCEL Button
Press to cancel ACC with Low Speed Follow.
d Interval Button
Press to change the ACC with Low Speed Follow following-interval.
e RES/+/SET/− Switch
Press the RES/+/SET/− switch up to set or resume the ACC with Low Speed Follow or
increase the vehicle speed. Press the RES/+/ SET/− switch down to set the ACC with
Low Speed Follow or decrease the vehicle speed.
Gauge Content
You can see the current state of each function.
4
Safety Driving Assist System > Honda Sensing®
232
a Indicates that ACC with Low Speed Follow is ready to be activated.
Green, White/Green: The system is on.
≫
White/Green indicates that a vehicle is not detected ahead.
White: The system is standby.
Amber: There is a problem with the system.
b Indicates that LKAS or Traffic Jam Assist is ready to be activated.
Green: The system is operating.
White: The system is standby.
Amber: There is a problem with the system.
c Indicates that LKAS or Traffic Jam Assist is activated and whether or not traffic
lane lines are detected.
Green lines: The system is operating.
White lines: Traffic lane lines are detected.
Amber line: Lane departure is detected.
d Indicates whether or not a vehicle is detected ahead.
Control target vehicle: White and outlined in green.
Outside of control target vehicle: Gray.
e Indicates that ACC with Low Speed Follow shows the set vehicle speed.
f Indicates that ACC with Low Speed Follow shows the set vehicle interval.
Front Sensor Camera
This camera (a) is located behind the rearview
mirror.
4
Safety Driving Assist System > Honda Sensing®
233
4
Safety Driving Assist System
Handling of the Camera
Avoid high interior temperatures to prevent the camera’s sensing system from shutting off.
≫
It is recommended to find a shady area or face the front of the vehicle away from the sun
when parking.
To avoid concentrating heat on the camera, do not cover the camera when using a reflective
sun shade.
Never apply a film or attach any objects to the windshield, the hood, or the front grille that
could obstruct the camera’s field of vision and cause the system to operate abnormally.
Do not scratch, nick, or cause any other damage to the windshield.
≫
Damage within the camera’s field of vision can cause the system to operate abnormally.
≫
If this occurs, we recommend that you replace the windshield with a genuine Honda
replacement windshield.
≫
After replacing the windshield, have a dealer recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of
the camera is necessary for the system to operate properly.
≫
Making even minor repairs within the camera’s field of vision or installing an aftermarket
replacement windshield may also cause the system to operate abnormally.
Do not place an object on the top of the instrument panel.
≫
It may reflect onto the windshield and prevent the system from detecting lane lines
properly.
Do not install anything on the hood or front grille that obstructs the camera’s view.
If the Some driver assist systems cannot operate: Camera temperature too high
message appears:
Use the climate control system to cool down the interior and, if necessary, also use defroster
mode with the airflow directed toward the camera.
Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield temperature, which cools down the area
around the camera.
If the Some driver assist systems cannot operate: Clean front windshield or poor
viewing condition. message appears:
Park your vehicle in a safe place, and make sure the windshield is clean. Clean the windshield
if it is dirty.
It may also appear in bad weather such as rain, fog, or snow, or when camera visibility is poor
such as at night, in a tunnel, at dawn, or at dusk when the ambient conditions are dark.
!
If the message does not disappear after the vehicle has been driven
for a while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
4
Safety Driving Assist System > Honda Sensing®
234
Radar Sensor
The radar sensor (a) is in the front grille.
Handling of the Radar Sensor
Always keep the front grille clean.
Never use chemical solvents or polishing powder for cleaning the front grille. Clean it with
water or a mild detergent.
Do not put any stickers or paint on the front grille.
Do not scratch or damage the front grille.
Do not replace the front grille or bumper.
Do not remove or disassemble the radar sensor.
If the Some driver assist systems cannot operate: Clean area shown message
appears:
Stop your vehicle in a safe place and remove the obstacle on the area around the radar sensor
with a soft cloth. The systems will resume once the obstacle has been removed, but
depending on the situation, it may take time for them to do so.
The message may come on temporarily if the radar sensor cannot detect any objects when
passing through an enclosed space such as a tunnel, or driving on an open road without any
structures nearby. It will disappear after driving for a while.
!
If the vehicle is involved in any of the following situations, the radar
sensor may not work properly. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer
if:
Your vehicle is involved in a frontal collision.
Your vehicle drives through deep water or is submerged in deep water.
The area around the sensors strongly strikes a bump, curb, chock, slope, or
embankment that could jar the radar sensor.
!
If the message does not disappear after the vehicle has been driven
for a while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
4
Safety Driving Assist System > Honda Sensing®
235
4
Safety Driving Assist System
Sonar Sensors
*
The sonar sensors (a) are situated in the front and rear bumper.
a Corner Sensor Range b Center Sensor Range
Handling of the Sonar Sensors
For the sonar sensors to work properly, do not:
Hit the area around the sensors.
Place stickers or other objects on or around the sensors.
Attempt to take apart any sensor.
Put any accessories on or around the sensors.
If the Low speed braking control problem. Parking sensor obstructed. message
appears:
Park your vehicle in a safe place, and make sure the sonar sensors or around the sensors is
clean.
!
If the message does not disappear after the vehicle has been driven
for a while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
*: Not available on all models
4
Safety Driving Assist System > Honda Sensing®
236
!
If the vehicle is involved in any of the following situations, the sonar
sensors may not work properly. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer:
A sensor has been subjected to shock.
Work needs to be done to the area around a sensor.
The front or rear bumper has made contact with a hill, parking block, curb,
embankment, etc.
The vehicle has been involved in frontal or rear collision.
The vehicle has been driven through a deep puddle.
4
Safety Driving Assist System > Honda Sensing®
237
4
Safety Driving Assist System
4
Safety Driving Assist System >
Collision Mitigation Braking System™ (CMBS™)
About Collision Mitigation Braking System™
(CMBS™)
The system can assist you when it determines there is a possibility of your vehicle
colliding with a vehicle (including motorcycles) ahead from behind, an oncoming
vehicle in front, a pedestrian, or someone riding a bicycle (moving bicycle). The
CMBS™ is designed to alert you when the potential for a collision is determined, as
well as assist in reducing speed, avoiding collisions, and reducing collision severity.
Important Safety Reminder
The CMBS™ is designed to reduce the severity of an unavoidable collision. It does not
prevent collisions nor stop the vehicle automatically. It is still your responsibility to
operate the brake pedal and steering wheel appropriately according to the driving
conditions.
!
When performing vehicle maintenance or inspection using a chassis
dynamometer or free roller, turn off the CMBS™.
!
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any unusual behavior
of the system (e.g., the warning message appears too frequently).
System Operation
The system starts monitoring the roadway ahead when your vehicle speed is about 3
mph (5 km/h) or above and will search for a vehicle (including motorcycles),
pedestrian, or moving bicycle in front of you. CMBS™ operates when the system
determines there is a possibility of a collision.
Front Sensor Camera
u
P.233
Radar Sensor
u
P.235
The system has three alert stages for a possible collision.
≫
Depending on circumstances, the CMBS™ may not go through all of the stages before initiating
the last stage.
<Stage one> Situations where there is a risk of a collision with the vehicle ahead
of you
The visual alert flashes. If the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you continues to decrease, the audible alert sounds in addition to the visual alert
flashing.
238
<Stage two> Situations where risk of a collision has increased and time to
respond is reduced
Visual and audible alerts come on and the brakes are lightly applied.
<Stage three> Situations where it is difficult to avoid a collision
Visual and audible alerts come on and the brakes are forcefully applied.
a Visual Alerts of Head-up
Display
*
The system provides visual and audible alerts of a
possible collision, and stops if the collision is
avoided.
≫
Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply
the brakes, change lanes, etc.).
When the CMBS™ applies the brakes, your vehicle’s brake lights will illuminate.
After CMBS™ is activated and your vehicle stops or decelerates, CMBS™ will be deactivated
based on the system’s judgment.
The CMBS™ may be canceled when you operate the steering wheel, brake, or accelerator
pedal to avoid a collision.
When the CMBS™ is activated, it will continue to operate even if the accelerator pedal is
partially depressed. However, it will be canceled if the accelerator pedal is fully depressed.
You can change the distance (Long/Normal/Short) between vehicles at which the
system’s earliest collision alert will come on. When in Long, visual and audible alerts
come on at a longer distance from a vehicle ahead than in Normal setting, and in
Short, at a shorter distance than in Normal.
Customized Features
u
P.202
Operating Conditions
The conditions and targets of operation for CMBS™ are as follows:
When going straight
When your vehicle speed is about 3 mph (5 km/h) or more, and the speed
difference with the target is about 3 mph (5 km/h) or more:
The vehicle (including motorcycles) ahead of you
When your vehicle speed is about 3-62 mph (5-100 km/h), and the speed
difference with the target is about 3 mph (5 km/h) or more:
Stopped vehicle (including motorcycle)
Oncoming vehicle
*: Not available on all models
4
Safety Driving Assist System > Collision Mitigation Braking System™ (CMBS™)
239
4
Safety Driving Assist System
Pedestrian
Moving bicycle
When turning left or right (only when there is a risk of a head-on
collision)
When your vehicle speed is about 3-18 mph (5-30 km/h), and the speed difference
with the target is about 3 mph (5 km/h) or more:
Oncoming vehicle
*1
*1: Activates only when turning into the oncoming lane.
The system is also designed to detect pedestrians. However, this pedestrian
detection feature may not activate or may not detect a pedestrian in front of your
vehicle under certain conditions. Refer to the ones indicating the pedestrian
detection limitations from the list.
System Limitations
u
P.241
Automatic Shut Off
The CMBS™ may automatically shut itself off and the safety support indicator (amber)
comes on and stays on when:
You drive off-road or on a mountain road, or curved and winding road for an extended period.
Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
Driving with the parking brake applied.
The radar sensor temperature gets too high.
The front of the camera or the area around the radar sensor is obstructed by dirt, fog, rain,
mud, wet snow, accessories, decals, stickers, film, etc.
An abnormal tire condition is detected (incorrect tire size, flat tire, etc.).
You are driving near an object or place that generates strong radio waves or oise, such as a TV
tower, broadcast station, power plant, or a vehicle equipped ith radar.
Once the conditions that caused the CMBS™ to shut off improve or are addressed
(e.g., cleaning), the system comes back on.
System On and Off
You can turn the system on and off using the driver information interface.
Switching the Display
u
P.297
Safety Support
u
P.302
Even if the system is turned off, it will automatically turn on every time the power mode is
turned on.
You cannot turn the CMBS™ off while driving.
4
Safety Driving Assist System > Collision Mitigation Braking System™ (CMBS™)
240
System Limitations
In the following situations, the system may be unable to correctly identify detectable
targets or road conditions, potentially causing the CMBS™ to operate improperly.
Environmental conditions
Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
There is little contrast between detectable targets and the background.
Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
Strong light is reflected onto a detectable target or roadway.
Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
Reflections on the interior of the windshield.
Driving at night or in a dark place such as a tunnel (due to low-light conditions, detectable
targets may not be illuminated).
When nearby radio wave emitting devices such as other automotive radar sensors.
Roadway conditions
On snowy or wet roads with blurred lanes, tire tracks, light reflections, water spray, high
contrast, etc.
Driving on curvy, winding, undulating, or sloping roads.
The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.
Your vehicle is strongly shaken on uneven road surfaces.
Driving through an area where there are objects that strongly reflect radio waves onto
vehicles, pedestrians, or moving bicycles.
Vehicle conditions
Driving at night or in a dark place (e.g., a tunnel) with the headlights off.
When lighting is weak due to dirt covering the headlight lenses, or there is poor visibility in a
dark place due to the headlights being improperly adjusted.
The area around the radar sensor is obstructed by dirt, rain, mud, wet snow, accessories,
decals, stickers, film, etc.
The front of the camera is obstructed by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow, accessories, decals,
stickers, film, etc.
Camera vision is blocked by drops of water from the window washer, or by the wiper
blades.
There is residue on the windshield from the windshield wipers.
The inside of the windshield is fogged.
An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,
improperly inflated, etc.).
The vehicle is tilted due to heavy load in the trunk or rear seats.
The suspension has been modified.
Driving with the parking brake applied.
4
Safety Driving Assist System > Collision Mitigation Braking System™ (CMBS™)
241
4
Safety Driving Assist System
Operation of the vehicle is unstable due to a slippery road, etc.
Tire chains
*
are installed.
Examples of limitations on the correct detection of the radar and
camera due to the condition of detectable targets
The detectable target suddenly cuts in front of or jumps out in front of you.
When the detectable target blends in with the background, preventing the system from
recognizing them.
The distance between your vehicle and the detectable target is too short.
The oncoming vehicle or vehicle ahead of you is sideways or facing diagonally.
The headlights of the vehicle ahead of you or oncoming vehicle are lit on one side or not lit
on either side in a dark place.
The bicycle is stopped.
When several bicycles are moving ahead of you in a group.
When several pedestrians are moving ahead of you in a group.
When a pedestrian is bent over or squatting, when their hands are raised, or when they are
running.
When a pedestrian is pushing a stroller or bicycle.
When part of a pedestrian (heads, limbs, etc.) is hidden by a carried object.
When the pedestrian is shorter than about 3.3 feet (1 meter) or taller than about 6.6 feet (2
meters) in height.
When a pedestrian or moving bicycle crosses the road too quickly.
A pedestrian or moving bicycle approaches from the opposite direction.
Examples of other limitations on detection or system operation
When the vehicle ahead of you is a small motorcycle, motorcycle with a sidecar, wheelchair,
or other specially shaped vehicle.
When a vehicle is lower in the rear than the front such as trucks that are not carrying a
cargo, or a narrow vehicle.
When the detectable target is not in front of the vehicle.
The speed difference between your vehicle and the detectable target is significantly large.
The speed difference between your vehicle and the detectable target is too small and the
distance between your vehicle and them is too short.
When a vehicle (including motorcycles) or moving bicycle in front of you slows suddenly.
When the driver operates the brake pedal and steering wheel to avoid a collision.
When you approach the detectable target while accelerating rapidly or operating the
steering wheel (except when turning left at an intersection, etc.)
*1
When the moving bicycle is a child-sized bicycle, folding bicycle, three-wheeler or other
bicycle with small tires, or a long bicycle like a tandem bicycle.
When the system cannot correctly identify the shape of the detectable target.
When the minimum ground clearance of a vehicle that is ahead of you is extremely high.
*: Not available on all models
4
Safety Driving Assist System > Collision Mitigation Braking System™ (CMBS™)
242
*1: When there is a possibility of a frontal collision with the oncoming vehicle while turning left,
the CMBS™ is activated. However, it may not be activated if you suddenly turn the steering
wheel.
With little chance of a collision
Even if there is little chance of a collision, the CMBS™ may activate in the following
situations when the system determines that there is a possibility of collision.
When your vehicle approaches a vehicle ahead that is turning left or right.
Your vehicle approaches another vehicle ahead of you and you change lanes to pass.
When there are detectable targets or any structures around the curved road.
When driving through curves, your vehicle comes to a point where the oncoming vehicle is
left in front of you.
When your vehicle approaches a detectable target.
When detectable targets are passing in front of you.
When you drive under a low structure or through a narrow gate at high speed.
When you drive over roads with bumps, train tracks, or construction steel plates.
When approaching stationary vehicles or walls, such as when parking.
Roadway objects or structures such as guard rails, poles, trees, parked vehicles, buildings,
walls, etc., or road markings and road lines are misinterpreted as detectable targets.
4
Safety Driving Assist System > Collision Mitigation Braking System™ (CMBS™)
243
4
Safety Driving Assist System
4
Safety Driving Assist System >
Low Speed Braking Control
*
About Low Speed Braking Control
The Low Speed Braking Control system has assistive braking and assistive driving
power suppression features. If the sonar sensors detect an obstacle such as a wall,
and the system determines that there is a risk of collision, then the system
suppresses torque and/or applies the brakes, helping to avoid or reduce the severity
of a collision.
Sonar Sensors*
u
P.236
If the system activates in a situation where you do not want automatic brake application (such
as when the vehicle is between two railroad crossing gates), simply press the brake pedal to
deactivate the system and then continue to drive as intended.
In order to prevent the system from activating when not needed, always turn it off during
vehicle maintenance; when loading on ships, trucks, and so on; when using a chassis
dynamometer or free rollers for inspection; or when washing the car in conveyor type car
wash machine.
After Low Speed Braking Control has activated once, it will not operate again even if you
approach the same obstacle. The vehicle must be driven a certain distance before the system
can be activated again.
The system operates separately when moving forward and when reversing. (For example, if it
activates when moving forward, it can be activated again immediately if reversing.)
If the assistive braking is activated, the vehicle must be driven a certain distance before the
assistive driving power suppression can be reactivated.
3 WARNING
The Low Speed Braking Control System cannot avoid all collisions and may
not reduce damage in each situation. Overreliance on the system may
result in a collision with serious injury or death. Always check your
surroundings, your shift position, and your pedal use. Driver remains
responsible for safely operating the vehicle.
System Operation
Assistive Braking
Assistive braking provides a visual and audible alert when the vehicle is moving
between approximately 1 and 6 mph (2 and 10 km/h) and there is the possibility of a
collision with a detected wall or other obstacles, as well as providing assistance with
braking.
*: Not available on all models
244
a The vehicle applies brake
≫
Depress brake pedal as soon as the system activates.
b Head-up Warning Lights
*
The vehicle will release the brake and start moving a few seconds after the system is
activated. To keep the vehicle stopped, keep the brake pedal depressed or put the
transmission into P .
You can turn off the rear parking sensors to disable activation of the assistive braking
when reversing.
Customized Features
u
P.202
Assistive Driving Power Suppression
When the vehicle is stopped or moving at less than 6 mph (10 km/h) and there is an
obstacle such as a wall near the front or back of the vehicle, if the accelerator pedal is
depressed more than necessary, the system will inform you with a visual and audible
alert. At the same time, the system will prevent sudden forward or backwards
movement by limiting the output, then assistive driving power suppression will
activate when you get closer to the obstacle.
a Accidental depression of the accelerator/
Limiting the output of the power system
b Head-up Warning Lights
*
Assistive driving power suppression will not activate in the following situations:
*: Not available on all models
4
Safety Driving Assist System > Low Speed Braking Control
*
245
4
Safety Driving Assist System
When moving forward: When on a steep slope or the shift position is in P , R , or N .
When reversing: When on a steep slope or the shift position is in a position other than R .
The system will be canceled under any of the following conditions:
When the accelerator is no longer depressed.
When the accelerator is depressed for approximately four seconds.
When the brake pedal is depressed.
You can turn off the rear parking sensors to disable activation of the assistive driving
power suppression when reversing.
Customized Features
u
P.202
System On and Off
You can turn the system on and off using the driver information interface.
Switching the Display
u
P.297
Safety Support
u
P.302
Even if the system is turned off, it will automatically turn on every time the power mode is
turned on.
System Limitations
The system may not operate correctly under the following conditions:
Examples of obstacles the sonar sensor cannot detect
Obstacles that do not reflect sound waves well, such as people, snow, cloth, sponges, etc.
Thin obstacles such as fences, bicycles, sign posts, etc.
Short or small obstacles.
Obstacles immediately in front of the bumper.
Moving objects or obstacles that suddenly enter the road.
Obstacles that are not perpendicular to the ground.
Examples of situations where the sonar sensors cannot detect
obstacles
The sonar sensors are dirty (covered by snow, water, mud, etc.).
The vehicle is too hot or cold.
The steering wheel is turned sharply when approaching the obstacle at an angle.
Examples of other cases where the system may not work correctly
The vehicle is tilted due to heavy load in the trunk or rear seats.
Bad weather conditions such as heavy rain, fog, snow, sandstorms, etc.
4
Safety Driving Assist System > Low Speed Braking Control
*
246
The ambient temperature/humidity is too high or low.
When going down a very steep slope.
When driving off-road such as on dirt, grass, or rocks.
When close to other vehicles with sonar sensors or other objects that emit ultrasonic
waves.
An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,
improperly inflated, etc.).
The suspension has been modified.
Situations where the system may activate even without risk of a
collision
When passing through short or narrow gates.
When driving on uneven surfaces, grassy areas, or places with steps.
When a sloped pillar or wall is protruding from a high position.
When there are obstacles next to the road.
When driving toward flags, curtains, tree branches, railroad crossing bars, etc.
When driving on flooded roads.
!
Do not put any accessories on or around the sensors.
If you put any accessories (such as a bicycle rack) on or around the rear
sensors, the Low Speed Braking Control System may activate if it detects these
accessories as an obstacle. In this case, turn off the rear sensor.
Customized Features
u
P.202
4
Safety Driving Assist System > Low Speed Braking Control
*
247
4
Safety Driving Assist System
4
Safety Driving Assist System >
Road Departure Mitigation System
About Road Departure Mitigation System
Alerts and helps assist you when the system detects a possibility of your vehicle
crossing over detected lane markings, or approaching the outer edge of the pavement
(into grass or gravel road shoulder) or a detected oncoming vehicle.
Front Sensor Camera
u
P.233
Important Safety Reminder
Like all assistance systems, the Road Departure Mitigation system has limitations.
Overreliance on the Road Departure Mitigation system may result in a collision. It is
always your responsibility to keep the vehicle within your driving lane.
System Operation
The camera monitors left and right lane markings
in white (or yellow), the outer edge of the
pavement (bordered by grass or gravel road
shoulder), or a detected oncoming vehicle. If your
vehicle approaches any detected lane markings,
the outer edge of the pavement (bordered by
grass or gravel), or a detected oncoming vehicle
when the turn signals have not been engaged, the
system activates.
≫
If the system cannot detect lane markings (in white
or yellow), no assistance will be provided to avoid
approaching oncoming vehicles.
In addition to a visual alert, the system assists with steering and alerts you with rapid
steering wheel vibrations to help you remain within the detected lane.
The system cancels assisting operations when you turn the steering wheel to avoid
crossing over detected lane markings or approaching the outer edge of the pavement
(into grass or gravel road shoulder) or an oncoming vehicle.
If the system operates several times without detecting driver response, the system
beeps to alert you.
The Road Departure Mitigation system may automatically shut off and the safety support
indicator (amber) comes and stays on.
There are times when you may not notice the Road Departure Mitigation system functions due
to your operation of the vehicle or road surface conditions.
The Road Departure Mitigation system function can be impacted when the vehicle is driven on
the inside edge of a curve, or outside of a lane, or driven in a narrow lane.
248
If Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) or Traffic
Jam Assist is off, the message may appear if the
system has determined that there is a possibility
of your vehicle crossing over detected lane
markings, the outer edge of the pavement (into
grass or gravel road shoulder) or oncoming
vehicle.
Operating Conditions
The system activates when all of the following conditions are met:
The vehicle is on a straight or slightly curved road.
The turn signals are off.
The system determines that the driver is not actively accelerating, braking, or steering.
The vehicle is traveling between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h).
You can set the timing for Road Departure Mitigation system activation.
Customized Features
u
P.202
System On and Off
You can turn the system on and off using the driver information interface.
Switching the Display
u
P.297
Safety Support
u
P.302
When you turn off the system, it will remain off until you turn it back on.
System Limitations
The system may not properly detect lane markings (in white or yellow), the outer
edge of the pavement (into grass or gravel road shoulder), or an oncoming vehicle
under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below.
Environmental conditions
There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface.
Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
Driving on a snowy or wet roadway.
Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
4
Safety Driving Assist System > Road Departure Mitigation System
249
4
Safety Driving Assist System
Sudden changes between light and dark, such as the entrance or exit of a tunnel or the
shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
Shadows of adjacent objects (trees, buildings, guard rails, vehicles, etc.) are parallel to
white (or yellow) lines.
Driving at night or in a dark place such as a tunnel (due to low-light conditions, lane lines,
the road surface, or oncoming vehicles may not be illuminated).
The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too short, and lane lines
and the road surface are not visible.
The outer edge of the road is bordered by objects, materials, etc. other than grass or gravel.
Roadway conditions
Driving on a road with temporary lane markings.
Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road repairs or
deteriorated lane markings.
The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines, such as at an intersection or crosswalk.
The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing.
Part of the lane markings are hidden by an object, such as a vehicle.
The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.
Your vehicle is strongly shaken on uneven road surfaces.
When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white (or yellow)
lines.
Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces.
Driving on roads with double lane lines.
Driving on snowy or slippery roads.
Passing through an exit or an intersection.
The pavement is only partially visible due to snow or puddles on the road.
Driving on unpaved or rutted roads.
White (or yellow) lines are not recognized correctly due to road conditions such as curves,
twists, or hills.
Vehicle conditions
When the driver operates the brake pedal and steering wheel.
Driving at night or in a dark place (e.g., a tunnel) with the headlights off.
When lighting is weak due to dirt covering the headlight lenses, or there is poor visibility in a
dark place due to the headlights being improperly adjusted.
The front of the camera is obstructed by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow, accessories, decals,
stickers, film, etc.
There is residue on the windshield from the windshield wipers.
The inside of the windshield is fogged.
An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,
improperly inflated, etc.).
The vehicle is tilted due to heavy load in the trunk or rear seats.
The suspension has been modified.
4
Safety Driving Assist System > Road Departure Mitigation System
250
Tire chains
*
are installed.
Examples of limitations on detection due to the condition of oncoming
vehicles
The oncoming vehicle or vehicle ahead of you is sideways.
The oncoming vehicle jumps out in front of you.
When the oncoming vehicle blends in with the background, preventing the system from
recognizing it.
The headlights of an oncoming vehicle are lit on one side or not lit on either side in a dark
place.
The distance between your vehicle and the oncoming vehicle is too short.
Part of the oncoming vehicle is not visible due to the vehicle ahead of you.
There are multiple oncoming lanes or turning lanes.
The vehicle in the adjacent lane is parked or moving at an extremely slow speed.
When the oncoming vehicle is specially-shaped.
When the camera cannot correctly identify the shape of the oncoming vehicle.
With little chance of a collision
The Road Departure Mitigation system may activate in the below conditions.
When driving through curves, your vehicle comes to a point where an oncoming vehicle is
right in front of you.
*: Not available on all models
4
Safety Driving Assist System > Road Departure Mitigation System
251
4
Safety Driving Assist System
4
Safety Driving Assist System >
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
About Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low
Speed Follow
Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following-interval behind a vehicle
detected ahead of yours and, if the detected vehicle comes to a stop, can decelerate
and stop your vehicle without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the
accelerator.
Front Sensor Camera
u
P.233
Radar Sensor
u
P.235
Important Reminder
As with any system, there are limits to ACC with Low Speed Follow. Use the brake
pedal whenever necessary, and always keep a safe interval between your vehicle and
other vehicles.
3 WARNING
Improper use of ACC with Low Speed Follow can lead to a crash.
Use ACC with Low Speed Follow only when driving on expressways or
freeways and in good road and weather conditions.
ACC with Low Speed Follow has limited braking capability and may not stop
your vehicle in time to avoid a collision with a vehicle that quickly stops in
front of you.
Always be prepared to apply the brake pedal if the conditions require.
Exiting a vehicle that has been stopped while the ACC with Low Speed
Follow system is operating can result in the vehicle moving without
operator control. A vehicle that moves without operator control can cause a
crash, resulting in serious injury or death.
Never exit a vehicle when the vehicle is stopped by ACC with Low Speed
Follow.
252
!
Do not use ACC with Low Speed Follow under the following conditions:
On roads with frequent lane change or continuous stop and go traffic.
On roads with sharp turns.
On roads with undulating slopes.
On roads with steep uphill or steep downhill slopes.
On roads with toll collection facilities or other objects between lanes of
traffic, or in parking areas, or facilities with drive through access.
On roads with slippery or icy surfaces.
How to Activate the System
[1 ] Press the button (a) while the shift
position is in D .
≫
The indicator (white) (b) comes on.
b Indicator (Green, White/
Green)
c On when ACC with Low
Speed Follow begins
d Set Vehicle Speed (White)
[2 ] Press the RES/+/SET/− switch (a) up or
down.
≫
The system will start operating at the set speed.
≫
The icons and set speed will be displayed on
the gauge.
ACC with Low Speed Follow does not operate while the brake pedal is depressed.
When driving at 25 mph (40 km/h) or less, the vehicle speed is set to 25 mph (40 km/h). If
your vehicle is stationary, you can set the vehicle speed even with the brake pedal depressed.
When you use ACC with Low Speed Follow, Straight Driving Assist (a feature of the Electric
Power Steering system) is activated. By enabling the steering system to automatically
compensate for natural steering pull, Straight Driving Assist makes it easier for you to keep
your vehicle in a straight line.
When not using ACC with Low Speed Follow, press the button to turn off the system.
4
Safety Driving Assist System > Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
253
4
Safety Driving Assist System
a Control target vehicle
b Outside of control target
vehicle
If a vehicle ahead enters the detectable range,
icon (a) appears, and the system adjusts your
vehicle’s speed within the set range in order to
keep the vehicle’s set following-interval.
If there is no vehicle ahead, your vehicle
maintains the set speed. If a vehicle ahead leaves
due to actions such as changing lanes, the system
will slowly accelerate to the set speed and then
maintain it.
a Indicator (Green)
Your vehicle also stops automatically. The
message (b) appears on the gauge.
When the vehicle ahead of you starts again, if you
press the RES/+/SET/− switch up or down, or
depress the accelerator pedal, ACC with Low
Speed Follow operates again within the
previously set speed.
≫
When your vehicle stops automatically because a
vehicle detected ahead of you has stopped, the
interval between the two vehicles will vary based on
the interval setting.
a Indicator (White/Green)
If no vehicle is ahead of you before you resume
driving, depress the accelerator pedal and ACC
with Low Speed Follow will operate again within
the prior set speed.
When a vehicle whose speed is slower than your set speed comes in or cuts in front of you
and is detected by the system, your vehicle starts to slow down.
4
Safety Driving Assist System > Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
254
Even if the interval between your vehicle and the vehicle detected ahead is short, ACC with
Low Speed Follow may start accelerating your vehicle under the following circumstances:
≫
The vehicle ahead of you is going at almost the same speed as, or faster than, your vehicle.
≫
A vehicle that cuts in front of you is going faster than your vehicle, gradually increasing the
interval between the vehicles.
While driving down steep hills, ACC with Low Speed Follow brakes to inhibit excessive
acceleration for maintaining the set speed. However, the vehicle speed may become faster
than the set speed.
When the vehicle ahead of you moves away, such as when entering an interchange or rest
area, ACC with Low Speed Follow may continue to maintain the set following-interval for a
short time.
When ACC with Low Speed Follow slows your vehicle by applying the brakes, your vehicle’s
brake lights will illuminate.
ACC with Low Speed Follow may temporarily control the interval between your vehicle and the
vehicle in adjacent lane or surroundings of your vehicle depending on the road conditions
(e.g., curves) or vehicle conditions (e.g., operating the steering wheel or the vehicle location in
the lane).
While ACC with Low Speed Follow is in operation, if the deceleration paddle selector is used,
then ACC with Low Speed Follow will be canceled.
a Visual Alerts of Head-up
Display
*
If the vehicle ahead of you slows down abruptly,
or if another vehicle cuts in front of you, the
system provides visual and audible alerts of a
possible collision.
≫
Depress the brake pedal, and keep an appropriate
interval from the vehicle ahead.
You can temporarily increase the vehicle speed. In this case, there is no audible or visual alert
even if a vehicle is in the ACC with Low Speed Follow range. ACC with Low Speed Follow stays
on unless you cancel it. Once you release the accelerator pedal, the system resumes an
appropriate speed for keeping the following-interval while a vehicle ahead is within the ACC
with Low Speed Follow range.
You can also set the system to beep when a vehicle detected in front of you comes in
and goes out of the ACC with Low Speed Follow detecting range.
Customized Features
u
P.202
You can switch the displayed set speed measurements between mph and km/h.
Speed/distance units
u
P.304
Customized Features
u
P.202
*: Not available on all models
4
Safety Driving Assist System > Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
255
4
Safety Driving Assist System
To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
a Pressing the RES/+/SET/− switch up
≫
Each press increases speed by about 1 mph or 1
km/h.
≫
Press and hold to increase speed by about 5 mph or 5
km/h.
b Pressing the RES/+/SET/− switch down
≫
Each press decreases speed by about 1 mph or 1
km/h.
≫
Press and hold to decrease speed by about 5 mph or
5 km/h.
If a vehicle detected ahead is going at a speed slower than your increased set speed, ACC
with Low Speed Follow may not accelerate your vehicle. This is to maintain the set interval
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
When you depress the accelerator pedal and then press down and release the RES/+/SET/−
switch, the current speed of the vehicle is set.
To Set or Change Following-Interval
Press the button (a) to change the ACC with
Low Speed Follow following-interval.
≫
Each time you press the button, the following-interval
(the interval behind a vehicle detected ahead of you)
setting cycles through furthest, far, mid, and nearest
following-intervals.
≫
Determine the most appropriate following-interval
setting based on your specific driving conditions. Be
sure to adhere to any following-interval requirements
set by local regulation.
≫
The higher your vehicle’s following-speed is, the
longer the nearest, mid, far, or furthest following-
interval becomes.
a Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) with Low Speed Follow
Interval Indicator
The distance between vehicles is:
About 82 feet (25 m), 1.1 sec (vehicle speed is 50
mph [80 km/h])
About 102 feet (31 m), 1.1 sec (vehicle speed is 65
mph [104 km/h])
4
Safety Driving Assist System > Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
256
The distance between vehicles is:
About 112 feet (34 m), 1.5 sec (vehicle speed is 50
mph [80 km/h])
About 142 feet (43 m), 1.5 sec (vehicle speed is 65
mph [104 km/h])
The distance between vehicles is:
About 154 feet (47 m), 2.1 sec (vehicle speed is 50
mph [80 km/h])
About 200 feet (61 m), 2.1 sec (vehicle speed is 65
mph [104 km/h])
The distance between vehicles is:
About 208 feet (64 m), 2.9 sec (vehicle speed is 50
mph [80 km/h])
About 274 feet (83 m), 2.9 sec (vehicle speed is 65
mph [104 km/h])
To Cancel
Any of the following operations will cause the ACC
with Low Speed Follow to be canceled.
Press the CANCEL button (a) or depress the brake
pedal.
≫
The indicator changes from green or white/
green to white.
Press the button (b).
≫
indicator goes off.
4
Safety Driving Assist System > Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
257
4
Safety Driving Assist System
Resuming the prior set speed
b Indicator (White)
When you turn off ACC with Low Speed Follow by
pressing the CANCEL button or depressing the
brake pedal, the prior set speed (a) is displayed
on the gauge in gray.
You can activate ACC with Low Speed Follow with
the prior set speed displayed on the gauge (in
gray) by pressing the RES/+/SET/− switch up.
To Switch the Cruise Mode
b Display for ACC with Low
Speed Follow
c Display for Cruise Mode
Press and hold the button (a) for one second.
≫
The indicator (white) (d) on the gauge changes
to the indicator (white) (e) and switches to the
cruise mode.
To switch back to ACC with Low Speed Follow,
press and hold the button again for one
second.
While setting the vehicle speed for ACC with Low Speed Follow or Cruise mode, you
cannot switch between the two.
!
Always be aware which mode you are in.
When you are driving in Cruise mode, the system will not assist you to maintain
a following-interval from a vehicle ahead of you.
4
Safety Driving Assist System > Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
258
How to Activate Cruise Mode
a Indicator (Green)
b Set Vehicle Speed (White)
When driving at 25 mph (40 km/h) or above,
press the RES/+/SET/− switch up or down.
≫
The system will start operating at the set speed.
≫
The icons and set speed will be displayed on the
gauge.
When you use cruise mode, Straight Driving Assist (a feature of the Electric Power Steering
system) is activated. By enabling the steering system to automatically compensate for natural
steering pull, Straight Driving Assist makes it easier for you to keep your vehicle in a straight
line.
While cruise mode is in operation, if the deceleration paddle selector is used, then cruise
mode will be canceled.
To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
The adjusting procedure for the vehicle speed is the same as for ACC with Low Speed
Follow.
To Cancel
Cruise control is canceled when you do any of the following or when your vehicle
speed becomes below 22 mph (35 km/h):
Press the CANCEL button or depress the brake pedal.
≫
The indicator changes from green to white.
Press the button.
≫
The indicator goes off.
Resuming the prior set speed
b
Indicator (White)
When you turn off cruise control by pressing the
CANCEL button or depressing the brake pedal,
the prior set speed (a) is displayed on the gauge
in gray.
You can activate cruise control with the prior set
speed displayed on the gauge (in gray) and by
pressing the RES/+/SET/− switch up while
driving at 25 mph (40 km/h) or above.
4
Safety Driving Assist System > Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
259
4
Safety Driving Assist System
System Limitations
The system may automatically shut off under certain conditions. Some examples of
these conditions are listed below. Other conditions may reduce some of the ACC with
Low Speed Follow functions.
Environmental conditions
Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
Water is sprayed by or snow blown from a vehicle ahead.
Driving at night or in a dark place such as a tunnel (due to low-light conditions, the whole
vehicle may not be illuminated).
Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
Reflections on the interior of the windshield.
When near radio wave emitting devices such as other automotive radar sensors.
Roadway conditions
Driving on curvy, winding, undulating, or sloping roads.
Driving on rutted roads (snowy or unpaved roads, etc.).
Puddles or a film of water is on the road surface.
Your vehicle is strongly shaken on uneven road surfaces.
Driving through a narrow metal bridge.
Vehicle conditions
The vehicle is tilted due to heavy load in the trunk or rear seats.
The front of the camera is obstructed by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow, accessories, decals,
stickers, film, etc.
The area around the radar sensor is obstructed by dirt, rain, mud, wet snow, accessories,
decals, stickers, film, etc.
The inside of the windshield is fogged.
An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,
improperly inflated, etc.).
The suspension has been modified.
Tire chains
*
are installed.
Examples of conditions under which the system may not correctly
detect the vehicle ahead of you
A vehicle suddenly crosses in front of you.
The interval between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too short.
When the vehicle ahead of you blends in with the background, preventing the system from
recognizing it.
The headlights of the vehicle ahead of you are lit on one side or not lit on either side in a
dark place.
*: Not available on all models
4
Safety Driving Assist System > Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
260
Examples of conditions under which the system may not work properly
A vehicle ahead of you stops and the speed difference between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead of you is significantly large.
When the vehicle ahead of you slows suddenly.
When a vehicle ahead of you is specially-shaped.
When a vehicle is lower in the rear than the front such as trucks that are not carrying a load,
or a narrow vehicle.
When your vehicle or the vehicle ahead of you is driving on the edge of the lane.
When the vehicle ahead of you is a narrow vehicle such as a motorcycle.
When the minimum ground clearance of a vehicle ahead of you is extremely high.
You accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle ahead of you at high speed.
There are animals in front of your vehicle.
Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle.
Automatic cancellation
The beeper sounds and a message appears on the driver information interface
when ACC with Low Speed Follow is automatically canceled. Any of these
conditions may cause the ACC with Low Speed Follow to automatically cancel:
Bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
The vehicle ahead of you cannot be detected.
An abnormal tire condition is detected, or the tires are skidding.
Driving on a mountainous road for extended periods, or driving off road.
Abrupt steering wheel movement.
When the ABS, VSA®, CMBS™, or Low Speed Braking Control
*
is activated.
When the ABS or VSA® system indicator comes on.
When the vehicle is stopped on a very steep slope.
When you manually apply the parking brake.
When the detected vehicle within the ACC with Low Speed Follow range is too close to your
vehicle.
When accelerating rapidly.
The front of the camera is obstructed by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow, accessories, decals,
stickers, film, etc.
The area around the radar sensor is obstructed by dirt, rain, mud, wet snow, accessories,
decals, stickers, film, etc.
The vehicle is loaded heavy load in the trunk or rear seats.
When passing through an enclosed space, such as a tunnel.
The vehicle has repeatedly applied the brakes to maintain the set speed (for example, you
are descending a long slope).
When the parking brake and brake system indicator (amber) comes on.
When the system doesn’t detect any driving actions from the driver for a certain amount of
time while the LKAS or Traffic Jam Assist is also activated.
The power system is turned off.
*: Not available on all models
4
Safety Driving Assist System > Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
261
4
Safety Driving Assist System
The driver’s seat belt is unfastened when the vehicle is stationary.
The vehicle stops for more than 10 minutes.
4
Safety Driving Assist System > Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
262
4
Safety Driving Assist System >
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
About Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
The system assists with both steering operation and maintaining lane-keeping by
detecting the left and right white (or yellow) lines using the front sensor camera when
the vehicle is driving near the center of the lane.
Front Sensor Camera
u
P.233
Important Safety Reminders
The LKAS is for your convenience only. It is not an autonomous driving system and
always requires driver attention and control. The system does not work if you take
your hands off the steering wheel or fail to steer the vehicle.
The LKAS is convenient when it is used on expressways or freeways.
It is always your responsibility to safely operate the vehicle and avoid collisions.
!
If the vehicle drifts toward either left or right lane line due to the
system applying torque, turn off the LKAS and have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
Lane Keep Support Function
Provides assistance to keep the vehicle in the center of the lane. When the vehicle
nears a white or yellow line, the steering force of the electric power steering will
become stronger.
Lane Departure Warning Function
In some driving situations, when the system detects that the vehicle has departed
from its lane, the LKAS alerts you with slight steering wheel vibration as well as a
warning display.
263
4
Safety Driving Assist System
Operating Conditions
The lane in which you are driving has detectable lane markers on both sides, and your vehicle
is in the center of the lane.
You are driving on a straight or slightly curved road.
The turn signals are off.
The vehicle is traveling between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h).
How to Activate the System
[1 ] Press the button.
≫
indicator (white) (a) appears. The system
is standby.
≫
If traffic lane lines are detected, white lines (b)
appear.
Operating Device
u
P.232
[2 ] Keep your vehicle near the center of the lane
while driving.
≫
The indicator and white lines change from
white to green once the system starts operating
after detecting the left and right lane markings.
If the driver takes their hands off the steering
wheel or does not adequately maintain control of
steering, the warning message will appear.
If the driver does not grip the steering wheel after
the warning display has repeatedly appeared, a
warning buzzer will sound and LKAS will be
canceled.
To Cancel
Press the button.
≫
To operate LKAS, press the button again.
≫
The LKAS is turned off every time you turn the power system off, even if you turned it on the
last time you drove the vehicle.
The LKAS may be automatically suspended when:
When the LKAS is suspended under the following circumstances, the indicator
changes from green to white, and the beeper sounds (if activated).
Your vehicle is driving to the right or the left of the lane.
The system fails to detect lane lines.
4
Safety Driving Assist System > Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
264
The steering wheel is turned quickly.
You fail to steer the vehicle.
Driving through a sharp curve.
The ABS, VSA®, or CMBS™ is activated.
The brake pedal is suddenly depressed.
Driving at a speed in excess of approximately 94 mph (150 km/h).
Once these conditions no longer exist, the LKAS automatically resumes.
You can change the LKAS suspended beep on and off.
Customized Features
u
P.202
System Limitations
The system may not detect lane markings (in white or yellow), and LKAS may not
function properly under certain conditions, including the following:
Environmental conditions
There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface.
Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
Driving on a snowy or wet roadway.
Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
Shadows of adjacent objects (trees, buildings, guard rails, vehicles, etc.) are parallel to
white (or yellow) lines.
Sudden changes between light and dark, such as the entrance or exit of a tunnel or the
shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
Driving at night or in a dark place such as a tunnel (due to low-light conditions, lane lines or
the road surface may not be illuminated).
The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too short, and lane lines
and the road surface are not visible.
Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
Roadway conditions
Driving on a road with temporary lane markings.
Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road repairs or
deteriorated lane markings.
The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines, such as at an intersection or crosswalk.
The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing.
Part of the lane markings are hidden by an object, such as a vehicle.
The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.
Your vehicle is strongly shaken on uneven road surfaces.
When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white (or yellow)
lines.
4
Safety Driving Assist System > Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
265
4
Safety Driving Assist System
Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces.
Driving on roads with double lane lines.
Driving on snowy or slippery roads.
The pavement is only partially visible due to snow or puddles on the road.
There is a film of water or puddles on the road surface.
White (or yellow) lines are not recognized correctly due to road conditions such as curves,
twists, or hills.
Driving on unpaved or rutted roads.
Passing through an exit or an interchange.
Vehicle conditions
When lighting is weak due to dirt covering the headlight lenses, or there is poor visibility in a
dark place due to the headlights being improperly adjusted.
The front of the camera is obstructed by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow, accessories, decals,
stickers, film, etc.
Driving at night or in a dark place (e.g., a tunnel) with the headlights off.
There is residue on the windshield from the windshield wipers.
The inside of the windshield is fogged.
An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,
improperly inflated, etc.).
The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load in the trunk or rear seats.
The suspension has been modified.
Tire chains
*
are installed.
*: Not available on all models
4
Safety Driving Assist System > Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
266
4
Safety Driving Assist System >
Traffic Jam Assist
About Traffic Jam Assist
The Traffic Jam Assist system uses a camera mounted to the upper portion of the
windshield to detect and monitor left and right white (or yellow) traffic lane lines.
Based on inputs from the camera, the system can apply steering torque to keep your
vehicle in the center of the detected lane.
Front Sensor Camera
u
P.233
Important Safety Reminders
Traffic Jam Assist is for your convenience only. It is not an autonomous driving system
and always requires driver attention and control.
The system does not work if you take your hands off the steering wheel or fail to steer
the vehicle.
Traffic Jam Assist is convenient when it is used on expressways or freeways.
It is always your responsibility to safely operate the vehicle and avoid collisions.
!
Do not use Traffic Jam Assist in any of the following situations:
You are traveling on a road with sharp curves.
≫
The system may not allow your vehicle to respond in a manner best suited
for the road conditions.
You are entering a toll booth, interchange, service area, or parking area.
You are driving in adverse weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
The surface of the road is slippery; for example, it is icy or covered with
snow.
≫
The tires may slip, causing you to lose control of the vehicle.
!
If your vehicle veers too far to the right or the left of the white (or
yellow) traffic lane lines while Traffic Jam Assist is active, deactivate
Traffic Jam Assist and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Lane Keep Support Function
When you are in heavy traffic and Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) is active, the
traffic jam assist system, upon detecting the traffic lane lines, will apply steering
torque to help keep your vehicle in the center of the lane.
≫
When the driver takes full control of the steering, the steering assist function is temporarily
canceled.
≫
The torque applied to the steering may not be noticeable when the driver has full control of
the steering, or when the surface of the road is rough or uneven.
267
4
Safety Driving Assist System
Lane Departure Warning Function
In some driving situations, when the system detects that the vehicle has departed
from its lane, the Traffic Jam Assist alerts you with an audible alert as well as a
warning display.
Operating Conditions
LKAS is activated.
The lane in which you are driving has detectable lane markers on both sides, and your vehicle
is in the center of the lane.
You are driving on a straight or slightly curved road.
The driver is gripping the steering wheel.
The vehicle is traveling between about 0 and 45 mph (0 and 72 km/h).
Refer to the following for proper handling of LKAS:
About Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
u
P.263
Refer to the following for operating device and displays:
Device for Operating Each Function and Gauge Content
u
P.232
How to Activate the System
Keep your vehicle near the center of the lane
while driving.
≫
The indicator (a) changes from white to green,
and white lines (b) change to green once the system
starts operating after detecting the left and right lane
markings.
4
Safety Driving Assist System > Traffic Jam Assist
268
If the driver takes their hands off the steering
wheel or does not adequately maintain control of
steering, the warning will appear.
If the driver does not grip the steering wheel after
the warning display has repeatedly appeared, a
warning buzzer will sound and Traffic Jam Assist
will be canceled.
To Cancel
Press the button to cancel Traffic Jam Assist.
≫
To operate Traffic Jam Assist, press the button again.
Traffic Jam Assist may be automatically suspended when:
The system fails to detect lane lines.
The steering wheel is turned sharply.
You fail to steer the vehicle.
You are driving through a sharp curve.
The ABS, VSA®, CMBS™, or Low Speed Braking Control is activated.
Your vehicle is driving to the right or the left of the lane.
The brake pedal is suddenly depressed.
Once these conditions no longer exist, Traffic Jam Assist automatically resumes.
You can change the setting for the Traffic Jam Assist suspended beep on and off
when you select the Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep on the audio/information
screen.
Customized Features
u
P.202
System Limitations
The system may not detect lane markings (in white or yellow), and Traffic Jam Assist
may not function properly under certain conditions, including the following:
Environmental conditions
There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface.
Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
Driving on a snowy or wet roadway.
Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
Shadows of adjacent objects (trees, buildings, guard rails, vehicles, etc.) are parallel to
white (or yellow) lines.
4
Safety Driving Assist System > Traffic Jam Assist
269
4
Safety Driving Assist System
Sudden changes between light and dark, such as the entrance or exit of a tunnel or the
shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
Driving at night or in a dark place such as a tunnel (due to low-light conditions, lane lines or
the road surface may not be illuminated).
When the lane lines or road surface are not visible, such as when the distance to the vehicle
in front of you is extremely short or when at an intersection.
Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
Roadway conditions
Driving on a road with temporary lane markings.
Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road repairs or
deteriorated lane markings.
The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines, such as at an intersection or crosswalk.
The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing.
Part of the lane markings are hidden by an object, such as a vehicle.
The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.
Your vehicle is strongly shaken on uneven road surfaces.
When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white (or yellow)
lines.
Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces.
Driving on roads with double lane lines.
Driving on snowy or slippery roads.
The pavement is only partially visible due to snow or puddles on the road.
There is a film of water or puddles on the road surface.
White (or yellow) lines are not recognized correctly due to road conditions such as curves,
twists, or hills.
Driving on unpaved or rutted roads.
Passing through an exit or an interchange.
Vehicle conditions
When lighting is weak due to dirt covering the headlight lenses, or there is poor visibility in a
dark place due to the headlights being improperly adjusted.
The front of the camera is obstructed by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow, accessories, decals,
stickers, film, etc.
Driving at night or in a dark place (e.g., a tunnel) with the headlights off.
There is residue on the windshield from the windshield wipers.
The inside of the windshield is fogged.
An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,
improperly inflated, etc.).
The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load in the trunk or rear seats.
The suspension has been modified.
Tire chains
*
are installed.
*: Not available on all models
4
Safety Driving Assist System > Traffic Jam Assist
270
4
Safety Driving Assist System >
Traffic Sign Recognition System
About Traffic Sign Recognition System
While driving, road signs (such as speed limit signs) detected by the front sensor
camera are displayed on the gauge and the head-up display
*
to inform you of road
sign information.
Front Sensor Camera
u
P.233
Not all signs may be displayed, but any signs posted on roadsides should not be ignored. The
system does not work on the designated traffic signs of all the countries you travel, nor in all
situations. Do not rely too much on the system. Always drive at speeds appropriate for the
road conditions.
Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield within the camera’s field of vision can
cause the system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we recommend that you replace the
windshield with a genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making even minor repairs within
the camera’s field of vision or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield may also
cause the system to operate abnormally. After replacing the windshield, have a dealer
recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the camera is necessary for the system to
operate properly.
To help reduce the likelihood that high interior temperatures will cause the camera’s sensing
system to shut off, find a shady area or face the front of the vehicle away from the sun when
parking. If you use a reflective sun shade, do not allow it to cover the camera housing.
Covering the camera can concentrate heat on it.
System Operation
When the camera detects traffic signs while the vehicle is being driven, the system
displays recognized signs in your vehicle for a programmed time and distance. If a
speed limit sign (a) is detected and the vehicle exceeds the speed limit by a
programmed threshold, the speed limit sign icon will blink.
≫
If the system does not detect any traffic signs while you are driving, the sign icon will not be
displayed.
b Gauge
*: Not available on all models
271
4
Safety Driving Assist System
c Head-up display
*
The sign icon also may switch to another one or disappear when:
Ther other designated limit is detected.
You make a turn with a turn signal at an intersection.
You can turn the Traffic Sign Recognition System on and off.
Customized Features
u
P.202
If your vehicle exceeds the detected speed limit, an icon representing the speed limit
sign for the current area will blink in the display.
Customized Features
u
P.202
The default speed limit warning threshold is the maximum speed of the traffic sign
detected. You can adjust the threshold for speed limit warning.
Customized Features
u
P.202
The unit for speed limits (mph or km/h) varies from country to country. Just after
entering a country whose unit differs from the one of the country from which you
came, The Traffic Sign Recognition System may not work correctly.
Customized Features
u
P.202
Speed/distance units
u
P.304
!
When the traffic sign recognition system malfunctions, appears on
the gauge and the head-up display
*
. If this icon does not disappear,
have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
System Limitations
The system’s ability to accurately notify the driver of the speed limit is dependent on
certain conditions such as the units displayed on the traffic sign as well as the speed
and direction of travel of the vehicle. In some cases, the system may display false
warnings or other inaccurate information.
The Traffic Sign Recognition system may incorrectly recognize, be slow to identify, or
fail to recognize the traffic sign in the following cases.
Environmental conditions
Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
Driving at night, in dark areas such as long tunnels.
Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
*: Not available on all models
4
Safety Driving Assist System > Traffic Sign Recognition System
272
Sudden changes between light and dark, such as the entrance or exit of a tunnel or the
shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
Water is sprayed by or snow blown from a vehicle ahead.
Roadway conditions
Your vehicle is strongly shaken on uneven road surfaces.
Vehicle conditions
When lighting is weak due to dirt covering the headlight lenses, or there is poor visibility in a
dark place due to the headlights being improperly adjusted.
The front of the camera is obstructed by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow, accessories, decals,
stickers, film, etc.
Driving at night or in a dark place (e.g., a tunnel) with the headlights off.
There is residue on the windshield from the windshield wipers.
The inside of the windshield is fogged.
An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,
improperly inflated, etc.).
The vehicle is tilted due to heavy load in the trunk or rear seats.
The suspension has been modified.
Tire chains
*
are installed.
The position or the condition of the traffic sign
The sign is in a place that makes it hard to find.
The sign is located far away from your vehicle.
The sign is located where it is hard for headlight beams to reach.
The sign is on a corner or bend in the road.
The sign is faded or bent.
The sign is rotated or damaged.
The sign is covered with mud, snow, or frost.
Part of the sign is hidden by the trees, or is in the shadow of a vehicle or other object.
Light (such as a streetlight) is reflected on the surface of the sign, or it is hidden in shadow.
The sign is too bright or too dark (electric signs).
Small signs (auxiliary signs, etc.).
Other conditions
When you are driving at a high speed.
The Traffic Sign Recognition System may not operate correctly, such as displaying
signs that do not adhere to the actual regulations for the roadway or do not exist at
all in the following cases.
≫
A speed limit sign may display at a higher or lower speed than the actual speed limit.
*: Not available on all models
4
Safety Driving Assist System > Traffic Sign Recognition System
273
4
Safety Driving Assist System
There is a supplementary sign with further information such as weather, time, vehicle type,
school zone, etc.
Figures on the sign are hard to read (electric signs, numbers on the sign are blurred, etc.).
The sign is in the vicinity of the lane you are driving in, even though it is not for the lane,
such as a speed limit sign situated at an exit or an intersection between the side road and
the main road.
There are things that look similar in color or shape to recognized objects (similar sign,
electric sign, signboard, structure, etc.).
4
Safety Driving Assist System > Traffic Sign Recognition System
274
4
Safety Driving Assist System >
Blind Spot Information System
About Blind Spot Information System
When the system detects vehicles approaching from behind in adjacent lanes, the
appropriate indicator comes on, providing assistance when you change lanes.
When the system detects a vehicle, the blind spot
information system alert indicator (a) on the
outside door mirror on both sides comes on in the
following situations:
A vehicle approaches you from behind to overtake
you at a speed difference of no more than about 31
mph (50 km/h).
You pass a vehicle at a speed difference of no more
than about 12 mph (20 km/h).
When you operate the turn signal lever in the direction of a detected vehicle, the blind
spot information system alert indicator blinks and the beeper sounds.
The system is for your convenience only. Even if an object is within the alert zone, the
following situations may occur:
The blind spot information system alert indicator does not come on and the Blind spot
information system not available message appears on the driver information interface.
The blind spot information system alert indicator may come on even with the message
displayed.
Important Safety Reminder
Like all assistance systems, the blind spot information system has limitations. Always
look in your mirrors, to either side of your vehicle, and behind you for other vehicles
before changing lanes. Overreliance on the blind spot information system may result
in a collision.
You can change the settings for the blind spot information system.
Customized Features
u
P.202
System Operation
The system activates when your vehicle is moving forward at about 20 mph (32 km/h)
or above.
275
4
Safety Driving Assist System
a Alert zone 1
b Alert zone 2
c Radar Sensors: Underneath the rear bumper corners
d Approx. 1.6 ~ 10 feet (0.5 ~ 3 meters) from vehicle side.
e Approx. 10 feet (3 meters) from rear bumper.
f Approx. 10 ~ 82 feet (3 ~ 25 meters) behind from rear bumper. (The faster the
approaching vehicle, the further away it will be detected.)
The initially set alert zone is alert zone 1. Over time, after the vehicle has been driven on
straight roads with traffic and roadside objects, the system will adapt and expand the alert
zones (alert zone 1 and 2).
If the rear bumper or any system components are repaired, the system will revert to alert
zone 1 only until it is able to adapt and expand to alert zone 1 and 2.
System On and Off
You can turn the system on and off using the driver information interface.
Switching the Display
u
P.297
Safety Support
u
P.302
When you turn off the system, it will remain off until you turn it back on.
System Limitations
For proper blind spot information system operation:
Always keep the rear bumper and area around the radar sensors clean.
Do not cover the rear bumper corner area with labels or stickers of any kind.
The blind spot information system alert indicator may not come on
under the following conditions:
There is a large speed difference between your vehicle and the vehicle in the adjacent lane.
A vehicle is parked in a side lane.
An object not detected by the radar sensors approaches or passes your vehicle.
The vehicle driving in the adjacent lane is a motorcycle or other small vehicle.
4
Safety Driving Assist System > Blind Spot Information System
276
The blind spot information system may not operate correctly under the
following conditions:
Making a turn at an intersection.
Objects (guard rails, poles, trees, etc.) are detected.
An object that does not reflect radio waves well or a motorcycle is in the alert zone.
Driving on a curved road.
A vehicle is moving from a far lane to the adjacent lane.
The system picks up signal interference such as other radar sensors from another vehicle
or strong radio wave transmitted from a facility nearby.
The rear bumper or the area around the radar sensors is obstructed by dirt, mud, snow, ice,
etc.
The rear bumper or the area around the radar sensors has been damaged or deformed.
In bad weather (heavy rain, snow, and fog).
Making a short turn or driving on a bumpy road that slightly tilts the vehicle.
An object such as a bicycle rack is attached to the rear of the vehicle.
Driving on snowy or slippery roads.
!
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the rear bumper or area
around the radar sensors is strongly impacted, or if the rear bumper or
any system components need to be repaired.
4
Safety Driving Assist System > Blind Spot Information System
277
4
Safety Driving Assist System
4
Safety Driving Assist System >
Cross Traffic Monitor
About Cross Traffic Monitor
Monitors the rear corner areas using the radar sensors when reversing, and alerts you
if a vehicle approaching from a rear corner is detected.
The system is convenient when you are backing out of a parking space.
3 CAUTION
Cross Traffic Monitor cannot detect all approaching vehicles and may not
detect an approaching vehicle at all.
Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to back up the vehicle before doing
so may result in a collision.
Do not solely rely on the system when reversing; always also use your
mirrors, and look behind and to the sides of your vehicle before reversing.
System Operation
a Detection Range
When the vehicle speed is less than about 3 mph
(5 km/h), the shift position is in R , and the
system is ON, the system will detect vehicles
approaching from either rear corner and alert you
with a buzzer and a visual indication.
The system will not detect a vehicle that
approaches from directly behind your vehicle, nor
will it provide alerts about a detected vehicle
when it moves directly behind your vehicle.
The system does not provide alerts for a vehicle
that is moving away from your vehicle, and it may
alert for pedestrians, bicycles, or stationary
objects.
278
About Screen Display
An arrow icon (a) appears on the side a vehicle
is approaching.
If the changes to in amber when the transmission is in R , mud, snow or ice, etc.
may have accumulated in the vicinity of the sensor. The system is temporarily canceled.
Check the bumper corners for any obstructions, and thoroughly clean the area if necessary.
If the comes on when the transmission is in
R
, there may be a problem with the Cross
Traffic Monitor system. Do not use the system and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
If the display remains the same with the transmission in
R
, there may be a problem with
the rear camera system and the Cross Traffic Monitor system. Do not use the system and have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.
System On and Off
The system can be turned on and off on the
audio/information screen by selecting the Cross
Traffic Monitor icon (a).
You can also switch the system on and off using the audio/information screen.
Customized Features
u
P.202
System Limitations
Cross Traffic Monitor may not detect or may delay alerting an approaching vehicle, or
may alert without an approaching vehicle under the following conditions:
An obstacle, such as another vehicle or a wall near your vehicle’s rear bumper, is blocking the
radar sensor’s scope.
Your vehicle is moving at a speed of about 3 mph (5 km/h) or higher.
A vehicle is approaching at a speed other than between about 6 and 16 mph (10 and 25
km/h).
4
Safety Driving Assist System > Cross Traffic Monitor
279
4
Safety Driving Assist System
The system picks up external interference such as other radar sensors from another vehicle or
strong radio waves transmitted from a facility nearby.
Either corner of the rear bumper is covered with snow, ice, mud or dirt.
When there is bad weather.
Your vehicle is on an incline.
Your vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load in the rear.
Your vehicle is reversing toward a wall, a pole, a vehicle, and so on.
Driving on snowy or slippery roads.
!
If the rear bumper or the sensors have been improperly repaired or
the rear bumper has been deformed, have your vehicle checked by a
dealer.
!
For proper operation, always keep the rear bumper corner area clean.
Do not cover the rear bumper corner area with labels or stickers of any kind.
4
Safety Driving Assist System > Cross Traffic Monitor
280
4
Safety Driving Assist System >
Parking Sensor System
*
About Parking Sensor System
The corner and center sensors monitor obstacles around your vehicle, and the beeper
and display let you know the approximate distance between your vehicle and the
obstacle.
!
Even when the system is on, always confirm if there is no obstacle
near your vehicle before parking.
The Sensor Location and Range
a Front Corner Sensors
b Front Center Sensors
c Rear Corner Sensors
d Rear Center Sensors
System On and Off
You can turn the system on and off using the driver information interface.
Switching the Display
u
P.297
Safety Support
u
P.302
When you turn off the system, it will remain off until you turn it back on.
*: Not available on all models
281
4
Safety Driving Assist System
You can turn the rear parking sensor system on and off. If only the rear parking
sensors are turned off, the Low Speed Braking Control System will not work when
reversing.
Customized Features
u
P.202
Operations When an Obstacle Has Been
Detected
The front corner, rear corner, and rear center sensors start to detect an obstacle when
the transmission is in R , and the vehicle speed is less than 6 mph (9 km/h).
The front corner and front center sensors start to detect an obstacle when the
transmission is in any position other than P or R , and the vehicle speed is less
than 6 mph (9 km/h).
The indicators (a) show the location of the
detected location on the driver information
interface.
The indicators (a) also show the position of the detected location on the audio/
information screen.
Color of
Indicator
Interval
between beeps
Distance between the Bumper and Obstacle
Corner Sensors Center Sensors
Yellow
*1
Moderate —
Front: About 35-28 in (90-70 cm)
Rear: About 43-26 in (110-65 cm)
4
Safety Driving Assist System > Parking Sensor System
*
282
Color of
Indicator
Interval
between beeps
Distance between the Bumper and Obstacle
Corner Sensors Center Sensors
Amber
Short
Front: About 28-18 in
(70-45 cm)
Rear: About 26-18 in
(65-45 cm)
Front: About 28-22 in (70-55 cm)
Rear: About 26-20 in (65-50 cm)
Very short
About 18-14 in (45-35
cm)
Front: About 22-18 in (55-45 cm)
Rear: About 20-16 in (50-40 cm)
Red Continuous
About 14 in (35 cm) or
less
Front: About 18 in (45 cm) or less
Rear: About 16 in (40 cm) or less
*1: When the indicator is yellow, only the center sensors detect obstacles.
To temporarily turn off the beeper, press the right selector wheel while it is sounding.
Temporary OFF will be canceled when the shift position changes from P / R to
N / D or vice-versa, or the vehicle speed reaches 9 mph (14 km/h) or higher.
System Limitations
The system may not work properly when:
The sensors are covered with snow, ice, mud, or dirt.
The vehicle has been out in hot or cold weather.
There is something nearby that emits ultrasonic waves or high frequency sounds.
Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
The system may not detect these obstacles:
Thin or low objects.
Sonic-absorptive materials, such as snow, cotton, or sponge.
Objects directly under the bumper.
The system may falsely detect obstacles in the following situations:
The vehicle is on uneven surface, such as grass, bumps, or a hill.
When close to other vehicles with sonar sensors or other objects that emit ultrasonic waves.
There is splashing water near the sensors due to heavy rains, etc.
!
Do not put any accessories on or around the sensors.
If you put any accessories (such as a bicycle rack) on or around the rear
sensors, the system may activate if it detects these accessories as an obstacle.
In this case, turn off the rear sensor.
Customized Features
u
P.202
4
Safety Driving Assist System > Parking Sensor System
*
283
4
Safety Driving Assist System
Indicators
Indicator List･･････････････････････････････････ 285
When Indicators Come On/Blink･･････････････ 286
Gauges
Types of Gauges･･･････････････････････････････ 293
Driver Information Interface
About the Driver Information Interface････････297
Driver Information Interface Right Side Area･･ 297
Driver Information Interface Left Side Area･･･ 305
Head-Up Display
*
About the Head-Up Display････････････････････307
Head-Up Display Settings･････････････････････ 308
Speedometer･･････････････････････････････････ 309
Navigation･････････････････････････････････････ 309
Current Mode for ACC with Low Speed Follow,
LKAS, and Traffic Jam Assist･････････････････ 310
*: Not available on all models
About Your Instrument Panel
284
5
About Your Instrument Panel >
Indicators
Indicator List
4
U.S.
*1
Parking Brake and
Brake System
Indicator
(Red)
P.287
4
Canada
*1
Parking Brake and
Brake System
Indicator
(Red)
P.287
4
U.S.
*1
Parking Brake and
Brake System
Indicator
(Amber)
P.288
4
Canada
*1
Parking Brake and
Brake System
Indicator
(Amber)
P.288
*1
12-Volt Battery
Charging System
Indicator
P.288
Seat Belt
Reminder
Indicator
P.288
*1
Supplemental
Restraint System
Indicator
P.288
*1
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
P.289
*1
POWER
SYSTEM Indicator
P.289
Low Fuel Indicator
P.289
*1
Anti-lock Brake
System (ABS)
Indicator
P.289
*1
Vehicle Stability
Assist™ (VSA®)
System Indicator
P.290
Vehicle Stability
Assist™ (VSA®)
OFF Indicator
P.290
*1
Electric Power
Steering (EPS)
System Indicator
P.290
*1
Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator
*
P.290
System Message
Indicator
P.305
Transmission
System Indicator
P.291
Shift Position
Indicator
P.102
Deceleration
Paddle Selector
Indicator
P.134
Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) with
Low Speed Follow
Interval Indicator
P.256
NORMAL Mode
Indicator
P.132
SPORT Mode
Indicator
P.132
INDIVIDUAL
Mode Indicator
P.132
ECON Mode
Indicator
P.132
AUTO Mode
Indicator
P.132
*: Not available on all models
285
5
About Your Instrument Panel
EV Mode Indicator
P.132
CHARGE Mode
Indicator
P.132
READY Indicator
P.98
EV Indicator
P.17
*1
Automatic Brake
Hold System
Indicator
P.108
4
U.S.
*1
Automatic Brake
Hold Indicator
P.108
4
Canada
*1
Automatic Brake
Hold Indicator
P.108
Cruise Mode
Indicator
(White/Green)
P.258
Turn Signal
Indicators
P.120
Hazard Warning
Indicators
Lights On
Indicator
P.120
*1
Auto High-Beam
Indicator
P.123
High Beam
Indicator
P.122
*1
Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) with
Low Speed Follow
Indicator
(Amber)
P.291
Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) with
Low Speed Follow
Indicator
(White/Green)
P.232
*1
Lane Keeping
Assist System
(LKAS) Indicator
(Amber)
P.291
Lane Keeping
Assist System
(LKAS) Indicator
(White/Green)
P.232
*1
Safety Support
Indicator
(Amber)
P.291
Safety Support
Indicator
(Green/Gray)
P.302
Immobilizer
System Indicator
P.55
Security System
Alarm Indicator
P.57
*1: When you set the power mode to ON, these indicators come on to indicate that system
checks are being performed. They go off a few seconds later or after the power system has
started. If an indicator does not come on or turn off, there may be a malfunction in the
corresponding system. To resolve the issue, follow the instructions in the owner’s manual.
When Indicators Come On/Blink
Indicators come on/blink depending on the condition of the vehicle. Messages may
be displayed at the same time. Please take the appropriate action outlined in the
message, such as having your vehicle checked by a dealer.
5
About Your Instrument Panel > Indicators
286
If a message is displayed saying the vehicle cannot be driven, immediately stop in a
safe place and contact a dealer.
After reconnecting the 12-volt battery, if multiple indicators come on and Systems
initializing is displayed, drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). If the
indicators do not go off, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
4 U.S.
4 Canada
Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Red)
Comes on when the parking brake is applied, and goes off when it is released.
Comes on when the brake fluid level is low.
≫
Depress the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure.
≫
If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop.
Checking the Brake Fluid
u
P.330
≫
If abnormal, take immediate action. Pull the
-
deceleration paddle selector as many times
as needed to help slow the vehicle using regenerative braking.
Have your vehicle repaired immediately. It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there
is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop immediately in a safe place. If necessary, pull the
- deceleration paddle selector as many times as needed to help slow the vehicle using
regenerative braking.
Comes on if there is a problem with the brake system.
If the Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Red) and Parking Brake and Brake System
Indicator (Amber) come on simultaneously, the braking system may be less effective than
usual. Make sure to depress the brake pedal firmly. Immediately stop in a safe place and
contact a dealer.
If the Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Red) and ABS indicator come on
simultaneously, the electronic brake distribution system is not working. This can result in
vehicle instability under sudden braking. Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer
immediately.
Blinks if there is a problem with the electric parking brake.
≫
Do not use the parking brake.
≫
Put the transmission into P to prevent the vehicle from moving, as the parking brake may
not work.
If the Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Red) blinks at the same time when the
Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Amber) comes on, the parking brake may not
work. Avoid using the parking brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
If you repeatedly operate the electric parking brake in a short period of time, the brake stops
operating to prevent heating of the system and the indicator blinks. It returns to its original
state in approximately 1 minute.
5
About Your Instrument Panel > Indicators
287
5
About Your Instrument Panel
4 U.S.
4 Canada
Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Amber)
Comes on if there is a problem with a system related to braking other than the
conventional brake system.
Comes on if there is a problem with the electric parking brake system and/or the
automatic brake hold system.
≫
Do not use the parking brake.
Comes on if the vehicle is tilted due to heavy luggage in the trunk or rear seats.
12-Volt Battery Charging System Indicator
Comes on when there is a problem with the charging system.
Seat Belt Reminder Indicator
Comes on or blinks when any seat belts are unfastened.
≫
Securely fasten seat belts immediately.
Seat Belt Reminder
u
P.79
Comes on or blinks when a seat belt in the rear seat is unfastened. Turns off momentarily.
If this indicator stays on after you and/or the passengers have fastened the seat belt(s), a
detection error may have occurred in the sensor. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
You can check whether each seat belt is fastened on the driver information interface.
Switching the Display
u
P.297
Supplemental Restraint System Indicator
Comes on if a problem with the airbag system or seat belt tensioners is detected.
About Your Airbags
u
P.40
5
About Your Instrument Panel > Indicators
288
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
After you set the power mode to ON, this indicator will turn on for a short time while
performing system checks. Immediately after, this indicator will blink several times if
the readiness codes are not set.
≫
Readiness codes are part of the on-board diagnostics for the emissions control systems.
Testing of Readiness Codes
u
P.393
Comes on if there is a problem with the engine’s emissions control systems or electric
vehicle system.
If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on, the emissions control systems and the
engine could be damaged.
Comes on when there is no fuel and the engine cannot generate electricity, and goes off after
vehicle is refueled, power mode is turned on, vehicle is driven, and the power system is
turned off multiple times. If it does not go off, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Blinks when a misfire in the engine’s cylinders is detected.
≫
Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least 10 minutes or more
with the engine stopped until it cools.
POWER SYSTEM Indicator
Comes on if there is a problem with the electric vehicle system.
≫
If this indicator stays on constantly, have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
Low Fuel Indicator
Comes on when the fuel reserve is running low (approximately 1.6 U.S. gal/6.2 Liters
left).
Range
u
P.298
Blinks if there is a problem with the fuel gauge.
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Indicator
Comes on if there is a problem with the ABS.
With this indicator on, your vehicle still has normal braking ability but no ABS function. This
can result in vehicle instability under sudden braking, so avoid situations such as highway
driving.
5
About Your Instrument Panel > Indicators
289
5
About Your Instrument Panel
Vehicle Stability Assist™ (VSA®) System Indicator
Blinks when VSA® is active.
Comes on if there is a problem with the VSA® system or hill start assist system.
With this indicator on, your vehicle still has normal braking ability.
Vehicle Stability Assist™ (VSA®) OFF Indicator
Comes on when you partially disable VSA®.
Vehicle Stability Assist™ (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
u
P.136
Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator
Comes on if there is a problem with the EPS system.
≫
Stop your vehicle in a safe place. If this indicator stays on after restarting the power system,
take your vehicle to a dealer for an inspection immediately.
Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator
*
May come on briefly if the power mode is set to ON and the vehicle is not moved
within 45 seconds to indicate the calibration process is not yet complete.
Comes on and stays on when:
The system has not been calibrated.
One or more tires’ pressures are determined to be significantly low.
≫
Stop in a safe place, check tire pressures, and inflate the tire(s) if necessary.
≫
Stays on after the tires are inflated to the recommended pressures.
The system needs to be calibrated.
System Calibration
u
P.138
If this indicator stays on after blinking, there is a problem with the TPMS.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
u
P.138
*: Not available on all models
5
About Your Instrument Panel > Indicators
290
Transmission System Indicator
Blinks if the transmission system has a problem.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
Indicator (Amber)
Comes on if there is a problem with ACC with Low Speed Follow.
Comes on if the vehicle is tilted due to heavy luggage in the trunk or rear seats.
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Indicator (Amber)
Comes on if there is a problem with the LKAS.
≫
LKAS and Traffic Jam Assist cannot be used.
Comes on if the vehicle is tilted due to heavy luggage in the trunk or rear seats.
Safety Support Indicator (Amber)
Comes on if there is a problem with any of the safety support systems.
Safety Support
u
P.302
Comes on if the vehicle is tilted due to heavy luggage in the trunk or rear seats.
4
Models with parking sensor system
Comes on if there is a problem with the parking sensor.
≫
Check if the area around the sensor(s) is covered with mud, ice, snow, etc.
About Parking Sensor System
u
P.281
4
All models
Comes on when driver assist system functions are limited because the radar sensor is
covered with obstacles such as dirt.
Radar Sensor
u
P.235
Comes on when driver assist system functions are limited because the camera’s
temperature is too high.
Front Sensor Camera
u
P.233
5
About Your Instrument Panel > Indicators
291
5
About Your Instrument Panel
Comes on when driver assist system functions are limited because of poor camera
visibility due to poor weather such as rain, fog, snow, or due to dark surroundings
such as in early morning, late evening, or the inside of a tunnel at night.
Comes on when the area around the camera is covered by obstacles.
Front Sensor Camera
u
P.233
Comes on when the blind spot information system’s sensor is dirty.
≫
Park in a safe place and check the vicinity of the blind spot information system sensor and
remove any obstacles.
About Blind Spot Information System
u
P.275
Comes on when the temperature of the blind spot information system sensor is high.
≫
The system will return to normal when the temperature cools down.
4
Models with Low Speed Braking Control
Comes on when the Low Speed Braking Control System’s functions are limited
because the sonar sensor is covered by obstacles.
Sonar Sensors*
u
P.236
About Low Speed Braking Control
u
P.244
5
About Your Instrument Panel > Indicators
292
5
About Your Instrument Panel >
Gauges
Types of Gauges
a High Voltage Battery Charge Level Gauge
b Ambient Meter
c POWER Gauge
d CHARGE/DECEL Gauge
e Traffic Sign Recognition System
f Speedometer
g Fuel Gauge
h Odometer
i Current Mode for Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow, the
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS), and Traffic Jam Assist
j Outside Temperature
Speedometer
Displays your driving speed.
You can change the Speed/Distance units.
Speed/distance units
u
P.304
Customized Features
u
P.202
293
5
About Your Instrument Panel
4
U.S. models
a Vehicle Speed in mph
If you change the unit from miles and mph to km and
km/h, the current vehicle speed in mph appears next
to the digital speedometer.
Fuel Gauge
Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank.
You should refuel when the reading approaches E .
Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire, damaging the catalytic converter.
After lightly refueling, or depending on your vehicle’s condition, the actual amount of
remaining fuel may differ from the fuel gauge reading.
Ambient Meter
Changes to green to indicate that the vehicle is being driven in a fuel-efficient manner
with SPORT mode off.
High Voltage Battery Charge Level Gauge
Shows the remaining High Voltage battery charge level.
The High Voltage battery charge level may decrease under the following conditions:
≫
When the 12-volt battery has been replaced.
≫
When the 12-volt battery has been disconnected.
≫
When the High Voltage battery control system corrects its reading.
Changes in the temperature of the High Voltage battery can cause the number of indicators in
the battery charge level gauge to change.
POWER Gauge
Shows the output of the electric motor.
CHARGE/DECEL Gauge
Shows the degree to which the High Voltage battery is being charged.
When the deceleration paddle selector is being used, it shows the strength of
deceleration.
5
About Your Instrument Panel > Gauges
294
Outside Temperature
Shows the outside temperature.
The temperature sensor is in the front bumper.
Your vehicle, surrounding vehicles, and road heat can affect the temperature reading when
your vehicle speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h). Also, the display is not updated until the
temperature reading has stabilized. This may take several minutes.
You can adjust the temperature displayed on the gauge.
Customized Features
u
P.202
Traffic Sign Recognition System
Shows certain detected traffic signs while driving.
If speed limit warning is activated, the sign icon
blinks when the maximum speed of the traffic
sign detected is exceeded by a threshold, when
compared with the vehicle speed.
About Traffic Sign Recognition System
u
P.271
The default speed limit warning threshold is the maximum speed of the traffic sign detected.
You can adjust the threshold for speed limit warning.
Customized Features
u
P.202
Current Mode for Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low
Speed Follow, the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS), and
Traffic Jam Assist
Shows the current mode for ACC with Low Speed Follow, LKAS, and Traffic Jam
Assist.
About Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
u
P.252
About Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
u
P.263
About Traffic Jam Assist
u
P.267
5
About Your Instrument Panel > Gauges
295
5
About Your Instrument Panel
a Set Speed
When you set speed for ACC with Low Speed Follow
or cruise control, a set speed mark will be displayed
on the speedometer.
Odometer
Shows the total distance that your vehicle has traveled.
5
About Your Instrument Panel > Gauges
296
5
About Your Instrument Panel >
Driver Information Interface
About the Driver Information Interface
a Driver Information Interface
Left Side Area
b Driver Information Interface
Right Side Area
The driver information interface shows your
vehicle’s condition and alerts you with a warning
message when an abnormality is detected.
When a warning message displays, please check
the message and contact a dealer to have the
vehicle inspected if necessary.
Please refer to the pages below if the Engine oil
pressure low, Engine temperature too hot or
Limited stopping power! message is displayed.
If the Engine oil pressure low. Warning Appears
u
P.372
How to Handle Overheating
u
P.370
If the Limited stopping power Warning Appears
u
P.373
Driver Information Interface Right Side Area
Switching the Display
a Right Selector Wheel
Roll the right selector wheel to view different
types of content.
You can add or delete the meter contents.
Gauge Display Settings
u
P.304
Power Flow Monitor
Displays the power flow of the motor and engine, indicating the vehicle’s power
source and whether the battery is being charged.
297
5
About Your Instrument Panel
a Power Flow
b Engine
c Engine ON
d Engine OFF
e Hybrid (HV): Power is supplied by the motor and the engine. (Blue)
f Electric Vehicle (EV): Power is supplied by the motor. (Blue)
g Engine (Direct Drive): Power is being supplied to charge the High Voltage
battery and supply power to the wheels. (Blue/Green)
h Regeneration: The motor is charging the High Voltage battery. (Green)
i Power is being supplied by the engine only. (Blue)
j The engine is running and the motor is charging the High Voltage battery.
(Green)
k The vehicle is stationary with the engine running.
Range
Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining power and fuel. This
estimated distance is based on the vehicle’s current fuel economy.
The driving range displayed is only an estimate and may differ from the actual distance the
vehicle can travel.
5
About Your Instrument Panel > Driver Information Interface
298
Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy for trip meters A and B in set intervals.
The average fuel economy displayed may differ from the amount consumed while actually
driving.
If it was reset while parked or driving at a low speed, calculation of fuel economy will start
after you resume normal driving.
Instant Fuel Economy
a Instant Fuel Economy
Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph.
Trip Meter
Shows the total distance driven since the last reset.
Press the right selector wheel to switch between trip meter A and trip meter B.
Meters A and B can be used to measure two separate trips.
To reset the trip meter, display it, press and hold the right selector wheel, and then select
Reset. The trip meter is reset to 0.0. Additionally, average fuel economy, average speed, and
elapsed time will also be reset.
When the trip meter exceeds 9999.9 miles or kilometers, it resets to 0.0.
The trip meter can reset automatically after refueling.
Customized Features
u
P.202
Average Speed
Shows the average speed since Trip A or Trip B was reset.
Elapsed Time
Shows the time elapsed since Trip A or Trip B was reset.
5
About Your Instrument Panel > Driver Information Interface
299
5
About Your Instrument Panel
Navigation
The map
*
, compass screen, and turn-by-turn directions appear based on the driving
guidance provided by Google Maps
*
, Apple CarPlay, or Android Auto.
Google built-in*
u
P.184
Apple CarPlay
u
P.193
Android Auto™
u
P.195
Navigation features may not be available for all devices or apps.
You can select whether to have the turn-by-turn display come on or not during the
route guidance.
Customized Features
u
P.202
Driver Attention Monitor
The Driver Attention Monitor analyzes steering inputs to determine if the vehicle is
being driven in a manner consistent with drowsy or inattentive driving. If it
determines that the vehicle is being driven in such a manner, it will display the degree
of the driver’s attention on the driver information interface.
a Level
When you select Driver attention on the driver
information interface, bars on it light up in white
to indicate the degree of the driver’s attention.
Switching the Display
u
P.297
If two bars light up, the Driver attention level
low message will appear.
*: Not available on all models
5
About Your Instrument Panel > Driver Information Interface
300
If one bar lights up, the Driver attention level
low. Time for a break. message will appear, a
beep will sound, and the steering wheel will
vibrate.
If this message appears, stop in a safe location
and rest for as long as needed.
The message will disappear when the right
selector wheel is rolled or when the system has
determined that the driver is driving normally.
If the driver does not take a break and the
monitor continues to detect that the driver is very
tired, the message will appear again after
approximately 15 minutes, accompanied by a
beep and steering wheel vibrations.
The message does not appear when the traveling
time is 30 minutes or less.
The Driver Attention Monitor cannot always detect if the driver is tired or inattentive.
Regardless of the system’s feedback, if you are feeling tired, stop in a safe location and rest
for as long as needed.
You can change the system settings.
Customized Features
u
P.202
The Driver Attention Monitor resets when:
The power system is turned off.
The driver unfastens the seat belt and opens the door while the vehicle is stopped.
For the Driver Attention Monitor to function:
The vehicle must be traveling above 25 mph (40 km/h).
The electric power steering (EPS) system indicator must be off.
The bars on the driver information interface remain grayed-out unless the Driver Attention
Monitor is functioning.
Depending on driving conditions or other factors, the Driver Attention
Monitor may not function in the following circumstances:
The steering assist function of the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) or Traffic Jam Assist
is active.
About Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
u
P.263
About Traffic Jam Assist
u
P.267
The condition of the road is poor; e.g., the surface is unpaved or bumpy.
It is windy.
The driver is frequently operating the vehicle in an assertive manner, such as changing
lanes or accelerating.
5
About Your Instrument Panel > Driver Information Interface
301
5
About Your Instrument Panel
Seat Belts
Occurs, under specified conditions, when seat belts are latched or unlatched.
Seat Belt Reminder
u
P.79
Maintenance
Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance Minder™.
About Maintenance Minder™
u
P.315
Safety Support
Safety Support indicates the operating status of the following systems.
a Operating Status for Road Departure Mitigation System
b Operating Status for CMBS™
c Operating Status for Low Speed Braking Control
*
and Parking Sensor System
*
d Operating Status for Blind Spot Information System
e Road Departure Mitigation System
f Blind Spot Information System
g Low Speed Braking Control
*
h Parking Sensor System
*
i CMBS™
The following colors indicate the status of any of the above-mentioned systems:
- Green: The system is on.
- Gray: The system is off.
- Amber: There is a problem with the system.
*: Not available on all models
5
About Your Instrument Panel > Driver Information Interface
302
To turn each system on or off, first press the right selector wheel to switch displays. From the
next display, you can select which system to turn on or off.
About Road Departure Mitigation System
u
P.248
About Blind Spot Information System
u
P.275
About Low Speed Braking Control
u
P.244
About Collision Mitigation Braking System™ (CMBS™)
u
P.238
About Parking Sensor System
u
P.281
When all features are ON, the safety support indicator lights up in green. It lights up in
green/gray when one or some of the features are ON, and it lights up in gray when all features
are OFF.
See below if the indicator lights up in amber.
Safety Support Indicator (Amber)
u
P.291
4
Models with Low Speed Braking Control
Even when the Low Speed Braking Control icon is green, if the Rear Sensor Setting is turned
off, the brake assist will not operate when reversing.
Customized Features
u
P.202
4
Models with parking sensor system
Even when the parking sensor system icon is green, if the Rear Sensor Setting is turned off,
the rear parking sensor will not operate when reversing.
Customized Features
u
P.202
Brightness Setting
Displays the adjustment for instrument panel brightness.
When the power mode is in ON, you can use the right selector wheel to adjust
instrument panel brightness.
Brighten: Roll the right selector wheel up.
Dim: Roll the right selector wheel down.
Press the right selector wheel to exit.
The brightness of the gauge is automatically adjusted depending on the ambient brightness.
≫
The brightness decreases when the ambient light is dark.
≫
The brightness increases when the ambient light is bright.
You can change the setting even when the ambient lighting is bright, but the brightness of the
gauge won’t change.
Head-Up Display Settings
*
Head-Up Display Settings
u
P.308
*: Not available on all models
5
About Your Instrument Panel > Driver Information Interface
303
5
About Your Instrument Panel
Vehicle Stability Assist Mode
You can turn the VSA® on or off.
Roll the right selector wheel to scroll to select Reduce traction control, then press
the right selector wheel to check or uncheck it.
Vehicle Stability Assist™ (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
u
P.136
Gauge Display Settings
Speed/distance units
Enables you to set the displayed measurements to read in either miles and mph or
km and km/h.
[1 ] Press the right selector wheel when you select the Gauge display settings on
the driver information interface.
[2 ] Roll the right selector wheel to scroll to select Speed/distance units, then
press the right selector wheel.
[3 ] Roll the right selector wheel to scroll to select your desired settings, then
press the right selector wheel.
Arrange content on the right side area
You can choose which contents to display on the right side area.
[1 ] Press the right selector wheel when you select the
Gauge display settings on
the driver information interface.
[2 ] Roll the right selector wheel to scroll to select Hide/show, then press the right
selector wheel.
[3 ] Roll the right selector wheel to scroll between contents, then press the right
selector wheel to check or uncheck them.
Contents that are gray cannot be removed from the right side area.
When you customize settings, shift to P .
Change gauge design
You can change the gauge design.
[1 ] Press the right selector wheel when you select the Gauge display settings on
the driver information interface.
[2 ] Roll the right selector wheel to scroll to select Gauge design, then press the
right selector wheel.
[3 ] Roll the right selector wheel to scroll to select your desired settings, then
press the right selector wheel.
When using the Round minimal or Bar minimal gauge design, a simplified display is used
when ACC with Low Speed Follow is in operation.
5
About Your Instrument Panel > Driver Information Interface
304
Warnings
You can check if there are any active warning messages.
If there are multiple warnings, you can roll the right selector wheel to see other warnings.
When there is a warning message, the system message indicator lights up.
Driver Information Interface Left Side Area
Shows the current mode for audio and phone information, etc.
Audio Remote Controls
u
P.165
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
u
P.197
Clock
Shows the clock.
You can choose whether the clock is displayed on the driver information interface.
Customize Display
u
P.305
Clock Setup
Manual time adjustment is not necessary because the clock is using satellite
information.
For details on other settings, please refer to the Navigation or Audio instruction
manuals for your vehicle.
Customize Display
When you customize settings, shift to P .
Arrange audio source on the left side area
You can choose which sources to display on the audio source screen.
[1 ] Roll the left selector wheel until Customize display is selected, then press the
left selector wheel.
[2 ] Roll the left selector wheel to scroll to select Hide/show, then press the left
selector wheel.
[3 ] Roll the left selector wheel to scroll between audio sources, then press the left
selector wheel to check or uncheck them.
Turn the displaying on the left side area on and off
You can select whether the current audio information and clock appear on the left
side area.
[1 ] Roll the left selector wheel until Customize display is selected, then press the
left selector wheel.
5
About Your Instrument Panel > Driver Information Interface
305
5
About Your Instrument Panel
[2 ] Roll the left selector wheel to scroll to select Display content, then press the
left selector wheel.
[3 ] Roll the left selector wheel to scroll to select your desired settings, then press
the left selector wheel.
5
About Your Instrument Panel > Driver Information Interface
306
5
About Your Instrument Panel >
Head-Up Display
*
About the Head-Up Display
Shows the current mode for ACC with Low Speed Follow, LKAS, and Traffic Jam
Assist; compass, or turn-by-turn directions; and the vehicle speed. You can choose
which item to be displayed using the driver information interface. They are displayed
when the power mode is in ON.
The display also shows the following messages.
a Lane Departure Warning
Lane Departure Warning: When your vehicle is too
close to the traffic lane lines, the lane departure
warning appears.
About Road Departure Mitigation System
u
P.248
About Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
u
P.263
About Traffic Jam Assist
u
P.267
Head-up Warning Lights: Flash when the BRAKE
message appears on the driver information interface.
About Collision Mitigation Braking System™
(CMBS™)
u
P.238
About Low Speed Braking Control
u
P.244
About Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low
Speed Follow
u
P.252
a Traffic Sign Recognition
System
Traffic Sign Recognition System: Shows certain
detected traffic signs while driving. If speed limit
warning is activated, the sign icon blinks when the
maximum speed of the traffic sign detected is
exceeded by a threshold, when compared with the
vehicle speed.
About Traffic Sign Recognition System
u
P.271
The default speed limit warning threshold is the maximum speed of the traffic sign detected.
*: Not available on all models
307
5
About Your Instrument Panel
You can adjust the threshold for speed limit warning.
Customized Features
u
P.202
Head-Up Display Settings
Shows the display for changing the head-up display settings on the driver information
interface. Roll the right selector wheel to scroll to select Head-Up Display settings,
then press the right selector wheel.
Switching the Display
u
P.297
To change head-up display content
[1 ] Roll the right selector wheel to scroll to select HUD content, then press the right
selector wheel.
[2 ] Roll the right selector wheel to scroll to select desired item, then press the right
selector wheel.
Speedometer
Speedometer
u
P.309
Navigation
Navigation
u
P.309
Driver assist
Current Mode for ACC with Low Speed Follow, LKAS, and Traffic Jam Assist
u
P.310
OFF
a Head-Up Display
b Speedometer
c Navigation
d Driver assist
e OFF
5
About Your Instrument Panel > Head-Up Display
*
308
Adjusting the head-up display brightness
Roll the right selector wheel to scroll to select HUD brightness, then press the right
selector wheel.
Brighten: Roll the right selector wheel up.
Dim: Roll the right selector wheel down.
Press the right selector wheel to exit.
Adjusting the head-up display height
Roll the right selector wheel to scroll to select HUD height, then press the right
selector wheel.
Raise the head-up display: Roll the right selector wheel up.
Lower the head-up display: Roll the right selector wheel down.
Press the right selector wheel to exit.
Adjusting the head-up display angle
Roll the right selector wheel to scroll to select HUD rotation, then press the right
selector wheel.
Rotate the head-up display clockwise: Roll the right selector wheel down.
Rotate the head-up display counterclockwise: Roll the right selector wheel up.
Press the right selector wheel to exit.
When you unlock and open the driver’s door with a remote transmitter or keyless access
system, the head-up display adjusts automatically to one of the two preset positions.
Speedometer
Shows your driving speed.
You can change the speed/distance units.
Speed/distance units
u
P.304
Customized Features
u
P.202
Navigation
The compass screen and turn-by-turn directions appear based on the driving
guidance provided by Google Maps, Apple CarPlay, or Android Auto.
Google built-in*
u
P.184
Apple CarPlay
u
P.193
Android Auto™
u
P.195
Navigation features may not be available for all devices or apps.
5
About Your Instrument Panel > Head-Up Display
*
309
5
About Your Instrument Panel
You can select whether the turn-by-turn display comes on during the route guidance.
Customized Features
u
P.202
Current Mode for ACC with Low Speed Follow,
LKAS, and Traffic Jam Assist
Shows the current mode for ACC with Low Speed Follow, LKAS, and Traffic Jam
Assist.
About Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
u
P.252
About Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
u
P.263
About Traffic Jam Assist
u
P.267
5
About Your Instrument Panel > Head-Up Display
*
310
Before Performing Maintenance
Inspection and Maintenance･･････････････････ 312
Maintenance Safety･･･････････････････････････ 313
Vehicle Safety･････････････････････････････････ 313
Maintenance Minder™
About Maintenance Minder™･･････････････････ 315
To Use Maintenance Minder™･････････････････ 315
Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood･･･････････320
Opening the Hood･････････････････････････････ 321
Recommended Engine Oil･････････････････････ 322
Oil Check･･････････････････････････････････････ 323
Adding Engine Oil･･････････････････････････････324
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter･････････ 324
Engine Coolant････････････････････････････････ 326
High Voltage System Coolant･･････････････････ 328
Transmission Fluid･････････････････････････････329
Brake Fluid････････････････････････････････････ 329
Refilling Window Washer Fluid････････････････ 330
Checking and Maintaining Wiper
Blades
Lifting the Wiper Arms･････････････････････････ 331
Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber･････････････ 331
Checking and Maintaining Tires
Checking Tires･････････････････････････････････ 333
Tire and Loading Information Label･･･････････ 334
Tire Labeling･･･････････････････････････････････335
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)･･･････337
Wear Indicators･･･････････････････････････････ 339
Tire Service Life･･･････････････････････････････ 339
Tire and Wheel Replacement･･････････････････ 339
Winter Tires･･･････････････････････････････････ 340
Tire Rotation･･･････････････････････････････････341
12-Volt Battery
Maintaining 12-Volt Battery･･･････････････････ 343
Checking the 12-Volt Battery･･････････････････ 344
Charging the 12-Volt Battery･･････････････････ 344
Climate Control System Maintenance
Air Conditioning･･･････････････････････････････ 345
Cleaning
Interior Care･･･････････････････････････････････ 346
Exterior Care･･･････････････････････････････････347
Maintenance
311
6
Maintenance >
Before Performing Maintenance
Inspection and Maintenance
For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle in
good condition.
If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient brake fluid, oil
residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. (Note, however,
that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in effect.)
Periodic inspections
Check the brake fluid level monthly.
Brake Fluid
u
P.329
Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects.
Checking Tires
u
P.333
Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly.
About the Vehicle’s LED Exterior Lighting
u
P.351
Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months.
Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber
u
P.331
Routine inspections
Perform inspections before long distance trips or when washing the vehicle.
4
U.S. models
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of emissions control devices and systems
may be done by any automotive repair establishment or individuals using
parts that are “certified” to EPA standards.
According to state and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on the
maintenance main items marked with # will not void your emissions warranties.
However, all maintenance services should be performed in accordance with the
intervals indicated by the driver information interface.
Maintenance Service Items
u
P.317
If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks that require more skills and
tools, you can purchase a subscription to the Service Express website at https://
techinfo.honda.com.
Authorized Manuals
u
P.1
If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make sure that you have the
necessary tools and skills first. After performing maintenance, update the records
in the separate maintenance booklet.
312
3 WARNING
Improperly maintaining this vehicle or failing to correct a problem before
driving can cause a crash in which you or a passenger can be seriously hurt
or killed.
Always follow the inspection and maintenance recommendations according
to the schedules in this owner’s manual.
3 WARNING
Failure to properly follow maintenance instructions and precautions can
cause you or a passenger to be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures and precautions in this owner’s manual.
Maintenance Safety
To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames away from
the 12-volt battery and all fuel related parts.
Never leave rags, towels, or other flammable objects under the hood.
≫
Heat from the surrounding parts can ignite them, causing a fire.
Never leave rags, towels, or other flammable objects under the hood.
≫
Heat from the surrounding parts can ignite them, causing a fire.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you.
≫
Only operate the engine if there is sufficient ventilation.
To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not gasoline.
Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the 12-volt battery or
compressed air.
Vehicle Safety
The vehicle must be stationary.
≫
Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and the power
system is turned off.
Do not touch the high voltage battery and wiring (orange).
Make sure that the radiator fan is stopped before inspecting the engine compartment.
≫
Depending on the vehicle condition, the radiator fan may operate even when the power
mode is in VEHICLE OFF.
Be aware that hot parts can burn you.
≫
Make sure to let the power system cool thoroughly before touching vehicle parts.
6
Maintenance > Before Performing Maintenance
313
6
Maintenance
Be aware that moving parts can injure you.
≫
Do not set the power mode to ON unless instructed, and keep your hands and limbs away
from moving parts.
The use of Honda Genuine Parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and servicing
your vehicle. Honda Genuine Parts are manufactured according to the same high quality
standards used in Honda vehicles.
!
Do not press the engine cover forcibly. This may damage the engine
cover and component parts.
6
Maintenance > Before Performing Maintenance
314
6
Maintenance >
Maintenance Minder™
About Maintenance Minder™
If the engine oil life is less than 15%, you will see the Maintenance Minder messages
appear on the driver information interface every time you set the power mode to ON.
The messages notify you when to change the engine oil, or when to bring your vehicle
to a dealer for indicated maintenance services.
To Use Maintenance Minder™
Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information
Maintenance items, which should be serviced at the same time that you replace the
engine oil, appear on the driver information interface.
You can view them on the engine oil life screen at any time.
[1 ] Set the power mode to ON.
[2 ] Roll the right selector wheel until the Maintenance Minder screen is displayed.
The engine oil life appears on the driver information interface along with
maintenance items due soon.
a
Right Selector Wheel
b Main Item
c Sub Item
d Engine Oil Life
Based on the engine operating conditions, the remaining engine oil life is calculated
and displayed as a percentage.
315
6
Maintenance
Maintenance Minder Information on the Driver Information
Interface
Maintenance Message Oil Life Display Explanation Information
—
When you select the
Maintenance Minder
screen, it displays codes
for maintenance items
due at the next engine
oil change, along with
the percentage of
engine oil life
remaining.
—
Maintenance Due Soon 15%
The remaining engine
oil life is 15 to 6
percent. Roll the right
selector wheel to switch
to another display.
The engine oil is
approaching the
end of its service
life, and the
maintenance items
should be
inspected and
serviced soon.
Maintenance Due Now 5%
The remaining engine
oil life is 5 to 1 percent.
Roll the right selector
wheel to switch to
another display.
The engine oil has
almost reached the
end of its service
life, and the
maintenance items
should be
inspected and
serviced as soon as
possible.
Maintenance Past Due
Negative Distance
The engine oil life has
passed its service life,
and a negative distance
appears after driving
over 10 miles (U.S.
models) or 10 km
(Canadian models). The
negative distance on the
display blinks. Roll the
right selector wheel to
switch to another
display.
The engine oil life
has passed. The
maintenance items
must be inspected
and serviced
immediately.
The system message indicator ( ) comes on along with the Maintenance Minder
message.
6
Maintenance > Maintenance Minder™
316
Maintenance Service Items
4
U.S. models
CODE Maintenance Main Items
A
Replace engine oil
*1
B
Replace engine oil
*1
and oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Check expiration date for tire repair kit bottle (if equipped)
Inspect these items:
Tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS/VSA®)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system
#
Fuel lines and connections
#
CODE Maintenance Sub Items
1
Rotate tires
2
Replace air cleaner element
*2
Replace dust and pollen filter
*3
3
Replace transmission fluid
*4
4
Replace spark plugs
5
Replace engine coolant
7
Replace brake fluid
*5
*1: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 12 months after the display is
reset, change the engine oil every year.
*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from
industry and from diesel powered vehicles, replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*4: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds results in higher transmission
temperatures. This requires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended
by the Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have
the transmission fluid changed every 47,500 miles or 3 years (76,000 km or 3 years).
*5: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 36 months after the display for
item 7 is reset, change the brake fluid every 3 years.
#: See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.
About Warranty Coverages
u
P.394
6
Maintenance > Maintenance Minder™
317
6
Maintenance
4
Canadian models
CODE Maintenance Main Items
A
Replace engine oil
*1
0
Replace engine oil
*1
and oil filter
CODE Maintenance Sub Items
1
Rotate tires
2
Replace air cleaner element
*2
Replace dust and pollen filter
*3
3
Replace transmission fluid
*4
4
Replace spark plugs
5
Replace engine coolant
7
Replace brake fluid
*5
9
Service front and rear brakes
Check expiration date for tire repair kit bottle (if equipped)
Inspect these items:
Tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS/VSA®)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system
#
Fuel lines and connections
#
*1: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 12 months after the display is
reset, change the engine oil every year.
*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from
industry and from diesel powered vehicles, replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*4: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds results in higher transmission
temperatures. This requires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended
by the Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have
the transmission fluid changed every 47,500 miles or 3 years (76,000 km or 3 years).
*5: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 36 months after the display for
item 7 is reset, change the brake fluid every 3 years.
#: See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.
About Warranty Coverages
u
P.394
6
Maintenance > Maintenance Minder™
318
Resetting the Display
Reset the maintenance minder information display if you have performed the
maintenance service.
[1 ] Set the power mode to ON.
[2 ] Roll the right selector wheel until the Maintenance Minder screen is displayed.
[3 ] Press and hold the right selector wheel for about 10 seconds to enter the reset
mode.
[4 ] Roll the right selector wheel to select a maintenance item to reset, or to select
All due items (you can also select Cancel to end the process).
[5 ] Press the right selector wheel to reset the selected item.
[6 ] Repeat from step 3 for other items you wish to reset.
!
Failure to reset the Maintenance Minder™ display after a maintenance
service results in the system showing incorrect maintenance intervals,
which can lead to serious mechanical problems.
The dealer will reset the Maintenance Minder™ display after completing the required
maintenance service. If someone other than a dealer performs maintenance service,
reset the Maintenance Minder™ display yourself.
You can also reset the Maintenance Minder™ display using the driver information
interface.
Maintenance Info.
u
P.209
6
Maintenance > Maintenance Minder™
319
6
Maintenance
6
Maintenance >
Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood
a Washer Fluid (Blue Cap)
b Brake Fluid (Black Cap)
c High Voltage System Coolant Tank
d 12-Volt Battery
e Radiator Cap
f Engine Oil Dipstick (Orange)
g Engine Coolant Reserve Tank
h Engine Oil Fill Cap
320
Opening the Hood
a Hood Release Handle
b Pull
[1 ] Pull the hood release handle under the
driver’s side lower outside corner of the
dashboard.
≫
The hood will pop up slightly.
a Lever
[2 ] Push the hood latch lever (located under the
front edge of the hood to the center) to the
side and raise the hood. Once you have
raised the hood slightly, you can release the
lever.
a Support Rod
b Grip
c Clamp
[3 ] Remove the support rod from the clamp
using the grip.
Mount the support rod in the hood.
Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set the parking brake.
When closing the hood, check that the hood is securely latched.
If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can open the hood without lifting the lever, the
latch mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.
6
Maintenance > Maintenance Under the Hood
321
6
Maintenance
3 WARNING
The hood support rod can become very hot due to heat from the engine.
To ensure against possible burns, do not handle the metal section of the
rod. Use the foam grip instead.
!
Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are raised.
The hood will strike the wipers, resulting in possible damage to the hood and/or
the wipers.
!
Do not press the engine cover forcibly. This may damage the engine
cover and component parts.
Recommended Engine Oil
Use a Genuine Honda Motor Oil or another commercial engine oil of suitable viscosity
for the ambient temperature as shown.
Oil is a major contributor to your engine’s performance and longevity. If you drive the
vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil, the engine may fail or be damaged.
Genuine Engine Oil
Honda Genuine Motor Oil
*1: Formulated to improve fuel economy.
Commercial Engine Oil
API service SN or higher grade fuel-efficient oil
API Certification Mark “Starburst”
6
Maintenance > Maintenance Under the Hood
322
The seal shown left indicates the oil is energy
conserving and that it meets the American
Petroleum Institute’s latest requirements.
Engine oil additives
Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact, they may adversely affect the
engine performance and durability.
Synthetic oil
You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal
and is the specified viscosity grade.
Oil Check
We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Turn off the power system. You can check the oil level without the engine having run
beforehand. If the engine has been running, wait approximately three minutes before
you check the oil.
[1 ] Remove the dipstick (orange).
[2 ] Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or paper
towel.
[3 ] Insert the dipstick back all the way into its
hole.
6
Maintenance > Maintenance Under the Hood
323
6
Maintenance
a Upper Mark
b Lower Mark
[4 ] Remove the dipstick again, and check the
level. It should be between the upper and
lower marks. Add oil if necessary.
If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly add oil, being careful not to
overfill.
Adding Engine Oil
a Engine Oil Fill Cap
[1 ] Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap.
[2 ] Add oil slowly.
[3 ] Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten it
securely.
[4 ] Wait for three minutes and recheck the
engine oil dipstick.
!
Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark. Overfilling the engine
oil may result in leaks and engine damage.
If any oil spills, wipe it away immediately. Spilled oil may damage the engine
compartment components.
Use a neutral detergent to remove it if it spills on the engine cover. Do not use organic
solvents such as brake cleaner.
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the engine’s
lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly.
Turn the power system off before changing the engine oil or oil filter.
6
Maintenance > Maintenance Under the Hood
324
Change the oil and filter in accordance with the maintenance message on the driver
information interface.
a Under Cover
b Screws
[1 ] Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature, and then turn the
engine off.
[2 ] Open the hood and remove the engine oil fill
cap.
[3 ] Remove the Phillips-head screws and
slotted head screws by turning 90° counter-
clockwise on the undercarriage and remove
the under cover.
a Drain Bolt
b Washer
[4 ] Remove the drain bolt and washer from the
bottom of the engine, and drain the oil into a
suitable container.
6
Maintenance > Maintenance Under the Hood
325
6
Maintenance
a Oil Filter
[5 ] Remove the oil filter and dispose of the
remaining oil.
[6 ] Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to
the engine contact surface.
≫
If it is stuck, you must detach it.
[7 ] Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the
contact surface of the engine block, and
install a new oil filter.
≫
Apply a light coat of new engine oil to the filter
gasket.
[8 ] Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then
reinstall the drain bolt.
≫
Tightening torque: 30 lbf·ft (40 N·m, 4.0 kgf·m)
[9 ] Pour the recommended engine oil into the
engine.
≫
Engine oil change capacity (including filter): 4.2
US qt (4.0 L)
[
10
] Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely and
start the engine.
[
11
] Run the engine for a few minutes, and then
check that there is no leak from the drain
bolt or oil filter.
[
12
] Stop the engine, wait for three minutes, and
then check the oil level on the dipstick.
≫
If necessary, add more engine oil.
You will need a special wrench to replace the oil filter. You can buy this wrench from a
dealer.
When installing the new oil filter, follow the instructions supplied with the oil filter.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. If the low oil pressure warning
appears, turn off the engine, and check your work.
!
You may damage the environment if you do not dispose of the oil in a
suitable way. If you are changing the oil by yourself, appropriately
dispose of the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take it to a
recycling center. Do not throw the oil away into a garbage can or onto
the ground.
Engine Coolant
Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any straight
antifreeze or water.
6
Maintenance > Maintenance Under the Hood
326
We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the
reserve tank first. If it is completely empty, also check the coolant level in the radiator.
Add the engine coolant accordingly.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may use another major brand of non-
silicate coolant as a temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality coolant
recommended for aluminum engines. Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can
result in corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction or fail. Have the cooling
system flushed and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible.
Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your vehicle’s cooling system. They
may not be compatible with the coolant or with the engine components.
3 WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause hot coolant to
spray out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator
cap.
!
Genuine Honda engine coolant is a 50/50 mixture of antifreeze and
water that can withstand freezing at temperatures as low as about
−31°F (−35°C). If your vehicle is consistently subjected to
temperatures below this, the concentration of antifreeze in the coolant
should be increased. Consult a dealer for details.
Reserve Tank
a Reserve Tank
b MAX
c MIN
[1 ] Make sure the engine and radiator are
cool.
[2 ] Check the amount of coolant in the reserve
tank.
≫
If the coolant level is below the MIN mark, add
the specified coolant until it reaches the MAX
mark.
[3 ] Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
6
Maintenance > Maintenance Under the Hood
327
6
Maintenance
Radiator
a Radiator Cap
[1 ] Make sure the engine and radiator are
cool.
[2 ] Turn the radiator cap 1/8th turn counter-
clockwise and relieve any pressure in the
cooling system.
[3 ] Turn the radiator cap counter-clockwise to
remove it.
[4 ] The coolant level should be up to the base of
the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low.
[5 ] Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it
fully.
!
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill any.
Clean up any spills immediately; they can damage components in the engine
compartment.
High Voltage System Coolant
When checking the coolant level, make sure to follow the procedures listed below.
If the coolant level is below the MIN mark, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
!
Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your vehicle’s coolant
system. They may not be compatible with the coolant or with the
motor components.
6
Maintenance > Maintenance Under the Hood
328
Coolant Tank
a Coolant Tank
b MAX
c MIN
[1 ] Check the coolant level in the tank.
[2 ] If the coolant level has dropped below the
MIN level, have your vehicle serviced at a
dealer.
≫
Only a properly trained technician can refill the
coolant and check the system for leaks.
Transmission Fluid
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda HEVF-Type 1
Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.
!
Do not mix Honda Honda HEVF-Type 1 with other transmission fluids.
Using a transmission fluid other than Honda HEVF-Type 1 may adversely affect
the operation and durability of your vehicle’s transmission, and damage the
transmission.
Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that is not equivalent to
Honda HEVF-Type 1 is not covered by Honda’s new vehicle limited warranty.
Brake Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid
from a sealed container as a temporary replacement.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the longevity of
the system. Have the brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy Duty Brake
Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.
If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark, have a dealer inspect the vehicle
for leaks or worn brake pads as soon as possible.
!
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your vehicle’s braking
system and can cause extensive damage.
6
Maintenance > Maintenance Under the Hood
329
6
Maintenance
Checking the Brake Fluid
a Reserve Tank
b MAX
c MIN
The fluid level should be between the MIN and
MAX marks on the side of the reserve tank.
Refilling Window Washer Fluid
If the level is low, add washer fluid.
4
Canadian models
If the washer fluid is low, a message appears on
the driver information interface.
Pour the washer fluid carefully. Do not overflow the reservoir.
!
Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir.
Antifreeze can damage your vehicle’s paint. A vinegar/water solution can
damage the windshield washer pump.
Use only commercially available windshield washer fluid.
Avoid prolonged use of hard water to prevent lime scale buildup.
6
Maintenance > Maintenance Under the Hood
330
6
Maintenance >
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades
Lifting the Wiper Arms
[1 ] Set the power mode to ON, then to VEHICLE
OFF.
[2 ] Within 10 seconds of setting the power
mode to VEHICLE OFF, hold the wiper switch
in the MIST position for more than two
seconds.
≫
Both wiper arms are set to the maintenance
position as shown in the image.
[3 ] Lift both wiper arms.
When lifting the wiper arms, always follow the instructions to move them into the
maintenance position.
The wiper arms may be damaged if they are moved manually.
Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber
If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks and become noisy, and
the hard surfaces of the blade may scratch the window glass.
a Wiper Arm
b Holder
c Tab
[1 ] Press up on and hold the tab, then slide the
holder off the wiper arm.
331
6
Maintenance
a Wiper Blade
b End cap at the bottom
a Wiper Blade
b Holder
[2 ] Pull the end of the wiper blade in the
direction of the arrow in the image until it is
out of the holder’s end cap.
a Wiper Blade
b Cap
c Holder
[3 ] Insert the flat side of the new wiper blade
onto the bottom part of the holder. Insert the
blade all the way.
[4 ] Install the end of the wiper blade into the
cap.
[5 ] Slide the holder onto the wiper arm until it
locks.
[6 ] Lower both wiper arms.
[7 ] Set the power mode to ON, then set the
wiper switch to the MIST position once.
≫
The wiper arms return to the standard position.
Avoid dropping the wiper arm onto the windshield, as it may damage the wiper arm and/or the
windshield.
6
Maintenance > Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades
332
6
Maintenance >
Checking and Maintaining Tires
Checking Tires
Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent vibration while driving. New tires
and any that have been removed and reinstalled should be properly balanced.
Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This means the vehicle has been parked for at
least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If necessary, add or release air until the
specified pressure is reached.
If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as 4 – 6 psi (30 – 40 kPa, 0.3 – 0.4 kgf/
cm
2
) higher than if checked when cold.
Whenever tire pressure is adjusted, you must calibrate the TPMS
*
.
3 WARNING
Using tires that are excessively worn or improperly inflated can cause a
crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner’s manual regarding tire inflation and
maintenance.
High speed driving
We recommend that you do not drive faster than the posted speed limits and
conditions allow. If you drive at sustained high speeds (over 99 mph or 160 km/h),
adjust the cold tire pressures as shown below to avoid excessive heat buildup and
sudden tire failure.
4
Models with 225/50R17 tires
Tire Size 225/50R17 94V
Pressure
Front: 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm
2
)
Rear: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm
2
)
4
Models with 235/40R19 tires
Tire Size 235/40R19 96V
Pressure
Front: 38 psi (260 kPa, 2.6 kgf/cm
2
)
Rear: 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm
2
)
Tire Requirements for Safe Driving
To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in good
condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated.
*: Not available on all models
333
6
Maintenance
Tires are the correct size and type.
The ground beneath the tires is in good condition.
The tire pressure is correct.
The tires do not have any wear, scratches, cracks, or foreign objects.
Inflation guidelines
Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and
comfort. Refer to the driver’s doorjamb label or specifications page for the specified
pressure.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and
are more likely to fail from overheating.
Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards,
and wear unevenly.
Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the
others, check the pressure with a tire gauge.
At least once a month or before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in
all tires. Even tires in good condition can lose 1-2 psi (10-20 kPa, 0.1-0.2 kgf/cm2)
per month.
Inspection guidelines
Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems.
Look for:
Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts, splits, or
cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord.
Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks.
Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment.
Excessive tread wear.
Cracks or other damage around valve stem.
Tire and Loading Information Label
The label attached to the driver’s doorjamb provides necessary tire and loading
information.
6
Maintenance > Checking and Maintaining Tires
334
Label Example
The tire and loading information label attached to the driver’s doorjamb contains:
a The number of people your vehicle can carry.
b The total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not exceed this weight.
c The original sizes for the front and rear tires (and the spare, if equipped).
d The proper cold tire pressures for the front and rear tires (and the spare, if
equipped).
Tire Labeling
Example
a Tire Size
b Tire Identification Number
(TIN)
c Maximum Tire Load
d Maximum Tire Pressure
e Tire Size
The tires that came on your vehicle have a number of markings. Those you should be
aware of are described as shown.
6
Maintenance > Checking and Maintaining Tires
335
6
Maintenance
Tire Sizes
Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size.
Following is an example of tire size with an explanation of what each component
means.
P235/60 R18 102T
P: Vehicle type (P indicates passenger vehicle).
235: Tire width in millimeters.
60: Aspect ratio (the tire’s section height as a percentage of its width).
R: Tire construction code (R indicates radial).
18: Rim diameter in inches.
102: Load index (a numerical code associated with the maximum load the tire can
carry).
T: Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the maximum speed rating).
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like
the examples in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire.
There are two different formats that the TIN may be listed in.
4
Format A
DOT B97R FW6X 2209
DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all requirements of the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
B97R: Manufacturer’s identification mark.
FW6X: Tire type code.
2209: Date of manufacture (22: Week, 09: Year).
4
Format B
DOT 1A3 OFBEKP 1522
DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all requirements of the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
1A3: PLANT CODE
OFBEKP: MANUFACTURER’S CODE
1522: DATE CODE (15: Week, 22: Year)
Glossary of Tire Terminology
Cold Tire Pressure– The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at
least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Load Rating– Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given
inflation pressure.
Maximum Inflation Pressure– The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can hold.
6
Maintenance > Checking and Maintaining Tires
336
Maximum Load Rating– Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible
inflation pressure for that tire.
Recommended Inflation Pressure– The cold tire inflation pressure recommended
by the manufacturer.
Treadwear Indicators (TWI)– Means the projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety
Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction,
and temperature performance according to Department of
Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these
gradings.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
For example:
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
6
Maintenance > Checking and Maintaining Tires
337
6
Maintenance
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can
lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a
tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
6
Maintenance > Checking and Maintaining Tires
338
Wear Indicators
a Wear Indicator
The groove where the wear indicator is located is
about 1/16 inch (about 1.6 mm) shallower than
elsewhere on the tire. If the tread has worn so
that the indicator is exposed, replace the tire.
Worn out tires have poor traction on wet roads.
Tire Service Life
The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road
conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and
environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).
In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is
recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five
years old. All tires should be removed from service after 10 years from the date of
manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.
Tire and Wheel Replacement
Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and
maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tire’s sidewall). Using tires of a
different size or construction can cause certain vehicle systems such as the ABS and
Vehicle Stability Assist™ (VSA
®
) system to work incorrectly.
It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isn’t possible, replace the
front or rear tires in pairs.
Make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels.
3 WARNING
Installing improper tires on your vehicle can affect handling and stability.
This can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Always use the size and type of tires recommended in this owner’s manual.
6
Maintenance > Checking and Maintaining Tires
339
6
Maintenance
Winter Tires
If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked M+S tires, snow tires, or
tire chains
*
; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles when
driving.
Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to prevent
skidding.
Use tire chains
*
, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the
law.
When mounting, refer to the following points.
If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be aware that these tires are not
designed for winter driving conditions. For more information, contact a dealer.
For winter tires
For winter tires:
Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires.
Mount the tires to all four wheels.
For tire chains
For tire chains:
Install them on the front tires only.
Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the chains
listed below:
4
Model with 225/50R17 tire
Cable-type: SCC RADIAL CHAIN SC1036
When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain manufacturer’s instructions
regarding vehicle operational limits.
4
Models with 235/40R19 tire
Not recommended to use any type of chain or cable
3 WARNING
Using the wrong chains, or not properly installing chains, can damage the
brake lines and cause a crash in which you can be seriously injured or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner's manual regarding the selection and
use of tire chains.
*: Not available on all models
6
Maintenance > Checking and Maintaining Tires
340
!
Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly installed can
damage your vehicle’s brake lines, suspension, body, and wheels. Stop
driving if they are hitting any part of the vehicle.
Follow the chain manufacturer’s instruction when installing. Mount them as tightly as you
can.
Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension.
Drive slowly.
Tire Rotation
Rotating tires according to the maintenance schedule helps to distribute wear more
evenly and increase tire life.
Tires without rotation marks
a Front
Tires with rotation marks
a
Front
Wheel nut torque for the tires that come standard-equipped with your vehicle is as
follows.
Wheel nut torque:
80 lbf·ft (108 N·m, 11 kgf·m)
6
Maintenance > Checking and Maintaining Tires
341
6
Maintenance
6
Maintenance >
12-Volt Battery
Maintaining 12-Volt Battery
After reconnecting the 12-volt battery: if various
indicators come on and the message on the left is
displayed on the driver information interface,
drive a short distance at a speed of 12 mph (20
km/h) or higher. If the indicator does not go off,
have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
When you find corrosion, clean the 12-volt battery terminals by applying a baking
powder and water solution.
Clean the terminals with a damp towel. Cloth/towel dry the 12-volt battery. Coat the
terminals with grease to help prevent future corrosion.
When replacing the 12-volt battery, the replacement must be of the same
specifications.
Consult a dealer for more information.
3 WARNING
The 12-volt battery gives off explosive hydrogen gas during normal
operation.
A spark or flame can cause the 12-volt battery to explode with enough
force to kill or seriously hurt you.
When conducting any 12-volt battery maintenance, wear protective
clothing and a face shield, or have a skilled technician do it.
WARNING:
Battery post, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash your hands after handling.
The 12-volt battery installed in this vehicle is specifically designed for a model with
Auto Idle Stop.
Using a 12-volt battery other than this specified type may shorten the battery life, and
prevent Auto Idle Stop from activating. If you need to replace the battery, make sure
to select the specified type and size. Ask a dealer for more details.
343
6
Maintenance
Checking the 12-Volt Battery
The condition of the 12-volt battery is monitored by a sensor located on the negative
terminal of the 12-volt battery. If there is a problem with this sensor, the driver
information interface will display a warning message. If this happens, have your
vehicle inspected by a dealer.
Check the 12-volt battery terminals for corrosion monthly.
If your vehicle’s 12-volt battery is disconnected or goes dead:
The audio system is disabled.
The clock resets.
4
Canadian models
The immobilizer system needs to be reset.
Immobilizer System
u
P.55
Charging the 12-Volt Battery
Disconnect both 12-volt battery cables to prevent damaging your vehicle’s electrical
system.
Always disconnect the negative (−) cable first, and reconnect it last.
If the battery cable is removed while a system update is being performed, the
electrical system can be permanently damaged. Only remove the battery cable when
a system update is not being performed.
6
Maintenance > 12-Volt Battery
344
6
Maintenance >
Climate Control System Maintenance
Air Conditioning
To ensure proper and safe operation, the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE
J2845) recommends that the refrigerant system only be serviced by trained and
certified technicians.
Never repair or replace the air conditioning evaporator (cooling coil) with one
removed from a used or salvaged vehicle.
New replacement mobile air conditioning evaporators must be certified (and labeled)
as meeting SAE Standard J2842.
Refrigerant in your vehicle’s air conditioning system is flammable and can be ignited
during servicing if proper procedures are not followed.
The air conditioner label is found under the hood:
Label Locations
u
P.53
About Specifications
u
P.387
4
Canadian models
a Caution
b Flammable Refrigerant
c Requires Registered
Technician to Service
d Air Conditioning System
!
Vented refrigerant is harmful to the environment.
To avoid refrigerant from venting, never replace the evaporator with one
removed from a used or salvaged vehicle.
The climate control system is equipped with a dust and pollen filter that collects
pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The Maintenance Minder™ messages will let
you know when to replace the filter.
We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your
vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust.
345
6
Maintenance
6
Maintenance >
Cleaning
Interior Care
Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt.
Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue.
!
Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle.
Electrical devices and systems may malfunction if liquids are splashed on
them.
!
Do not use silicone-based sprays on electrical devices such as audio
devices and switches.
Doing so may cause the items to malfunction or cause a fire inside the vehicle.
If a silicone-based spray is inadvertently used on electrical devices, consult a
dealer.
!
Depending on their composition, chemicals and liquid aromatics may
cause discoloration, wrinkles, and cracking to resin-based parts and
textiles.
Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as benzene or gasoline.
!
After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them away using a dry
cloth.
Do not place used cloths on top of resin-based parts or textiles for long periods
of time without washing.
Cleaning seat belts
Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts.
Let the belts air dry. Wipe the openings of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth.
Cleaning the window
Wipe using a glass cleaner.
346
!
Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window. Wipe along the
same direction as the wires with a soft cloth so as not to damage
them.
!
Be careful not to spill fluids, such as water or glass cleaner, on or
around the cover of the electrical components around the rearview
mirror.
Floor mats
Example
a Unlock
b Lock
The driver’s floor mat hooks over floor anchors,
which keep the mat from sliding forward.
Do not put any additional floor mats on top of
the anchored mat.
If you use any floor mats that were not originally provided with your vehicle, make
sure they are designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and are securely
anchored by the floor anchors.
Position any rear seat floor mats properly. If not properly positioned, the floor mats
can interfere with the front seat functions.
Exterior Care
Dust off the vehicle body after you drive. Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches
on painted surfaces. A scratch on a painted surface can result in body rust. If you find
a scratch, promptly repair it.
Washing the vehicle
Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the following
conditions:
If driving on roads with road salt.
If driving in coastal areas.
6
Maintenance > Cleaning
347
6
Maintenance
If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap is stuck to painted surfaces.
Do not spray water into the air intake vents. It can cause a malfunction.
If water and any chemicals are on the brakes when your vehicle is being washed,
drive a short distance and apply the brakes several times before parking. Parking
while brakes are wet may cause them to be stuck by rust.
Lock the doors when washing the vehicle. Do not spray water onto the fuel fill door directly. A
high-pressure spray may cause it to open.
Do not spray water onto the capless unit when the fuel fill door is open. It can cause
damage to the fuel system or engine.
If you need to lift the wiper arms away from the windshield, first set the wiper arms to the
maintenance position.
Lifting the Wiper Arms
u
P.331
Using high pressure cleaners
Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body.
Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to enter the
vehicle interior.
Do not spray high pressure water directly into the engine compartment. Instead, use low
pressure water and a mild detergent.
Do not spray water directly onto the camera or the area around it. Water may enter the lens
and cause the camera to malfunction.
Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage the paint, metal, and plastic on your
vehicle. Wipe away spills immediately.
Maintaining the bumpers and other resin-coated parts
If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or 12-volt battery fluid on resin-coated parts,
they may stain or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and
clean water.
Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when you want to repair the painted surface of
the parts made of resin.
Cleaning the window
Wipe using a glass cleaner.
Maintaining aluminum wheels
Aluminum is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road contaminants.
When necessary, as early as possible use a sponge and mild detergent to wipe away
these contaminants. Do not use a stiff brush or harsh chemicals (including some
commercial wheel cleaners). These can damage the protective finish on aluminum
alloy wheels, resulting in corrosion. Depending on the type of finish, the wheels also
may lose their luster or appear burnished. To avoid water stains, wipe the wheels dry
with a cloth while they are still wet.
6
Maintenance > Cleaning
348
Tools
Types of Tools･････････････････････････････････ 350
When a Lightbulb Goes Out
About the Vehicle’s LED Exterior Lighting･･････351
Remote Transmitter Care
Replacing the Remote Battery･････････････････ 352
If a Tire Goes Flat
Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire･･････････････ 354
Handling of the jack
How to Set Up the Jack････････････････････････363
Power System Won’t Start
Checking the Procedure･･･････････････････････ 364
If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak････････ 365
Emergency Power System Off･････････････････ 365
Emergency Power System On･････････････････ 365
If the 12-volt Battery Is Dead
Jump Starting Procedure･･････････････････････ 367
What to Do After the Power System Starts････ 368
Shift Lever Does Not Move
Releasing the Lock････････････････････････････ 369
Overheating
How to Handle Overheating･･･････････････････ 370
When a Warning Appears
If the Engine oil pressure low. Warning Appears･･
･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 372
If the Limited stopping power Warning Appears･･
･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 373
Fuses
Checking Fuses････････････････････････････････ 374
Interior Fuse Box･･････････････････････････････ 376
Inspecting and Changing Fuses･･･････････････ 378
Emergency Towing
About Towing･･････････････････････････････････ 380
If You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill
Door
What to Do If Unable to Unlock the Fuel Fill Door･･
･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 381
If You Cannot Open the Trunk
What to Do If Unable to Open the Trunk･･･････ 382
Refueling
Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container･････ 383
Emergency Call (eCall)
Automatic Emergency Call
･････････････････････
384
Manual Emergency Call
････････････････････････
385
Handling the Unexpected
349
7
Handling the Unexpected >
Tools
Types of Tools
a Funnel
The tools are stored in the trunk.
350
7
Handling the Unexpected >
When a Lightbulb Goes Out
About the Vehicle’s LED Exterior Lighting
The following lights are LED lights. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and
replace them.
Headlights
Front Turn Signal Lights
Parking/Daytime Running Lights
Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Lights
*
Front Side Marker Lights
Brake Lights
Taillights
High-Mount Brake Light
Rear Turn Signal Lights
Rear Side Marker/Taillights
Back-Up Lights
Rear License Plate Light
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not need to be adjusted. However, if
you regularly carry heavy items in the trunk, have the aiming readjusted at a dealer or
by a qualified technician.
*: Not available on all models
351
7
Handling the Unexpected
7
Handling the Unexpected >
Remote Transmitter Care
Replacing the Remote Battery
If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery.
Replacement batteries are commercially available or at a dealer.
3 WARNING
CHEMICAL BURN HAZARD
The battery that powers the remote transmitter can cause severe internal
burns and can even lead to death if swallowed.
Keep new and used batteries away from children.
If you suspect that a child has swallowed the battery, seek medical
attention immediately.
!
An improperly disposed of battery can damage the environment.
Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal.
Keyless Remote
[1 ] Remove the built-in key.
352
a Battery
[2 ] With the buttons facing down, remove the
upper half of the cover by carefully prying on
the slot with the key grip.
[3 ] Remove the battery by prying on the edge
with flat-tip screwdriver. Make sure to
replace the battery with the correct polarity.
Battery type: CR2032
Wrap a key grip with a cloth to prevent scratching the keyless remote.
Wrap a flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth to prevent scratching the keyless remote.
7
Handling the Unexpected > Remote Transmitter Care
353
7
Handling the Unexpected
7
Handling the Unexpected >
If a Tire Goes Flat
Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
If the tire has a large cut or is otherwise severely damaged, you will need to have the
vehicle towed. If the tire only has a small puncture, from a nail for instance, you can
use the temporary tire repair kit so that you can drive to the nearest service station for
a more permanent repair.
How to Park Your Vehicle
If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually
to reduce speed. Then, stop in a safe place.
[1 ] Park the vehicle on a firm, level, non-slippery surface and apply the parking
brake.
[2 ] Put the transmission into P .
[3 ] Turn on the hazard warning lights and set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF.
!
The kit should not be used in the following situations. Instead, contact
a dealer or roadside assistance to have the vehicle towed.
The tire sealant has expired.
More than one tire is punctured.
The puncture or cut is larger than 3/16 inch (4 mm).
The tire side wall is damaged or the puncture is outside the tire area.
Damage has been caused by driving with the tire extremely under inflated.
The tire bead is no longer seated.
The rim is damaged.
a Contact Area
!
Do not remove a nail or screw that punctured the tire.
If you remove it from the tire, you may not be able to repair the puncture using
the kit.
354
!
Do not continue driving with the temporarily repaired tire.
Do not use the temporary repairs for any purpose other than moving your
vehicle to the nearest service station to receive professional repairs.
Getting Ready to Temporarily Repair the Flat Tire
!
When using the compressor, please note the following points.
Avoid getting water on it during rain.
Do not place the product directly on a sandy or dusty area before using it, as
inhaling dust may cause a malfunction.
Do not lubricate with oil or lubricant.
Never disassemble or modify the product.
Do not subject the compressor to any impacts. This may cause a
malfunction.
Taking out the Tire Repair Kit
[1 ] Open the trunk floor lid (a).
[2 ] Take the kit (b) out of the case.
[3 ] Place the kit face up on flat ground near the
flat tire and away from traffic. Do not place
the kit on its side.
7
Handling the Unexpected > If a Tire Goes Flat
355
7
Handling the Unexpected
a Inflator Switch
b Air Release Button
c Pressure Gauge
d Selector Knob
e AIR Side
f REPAIR Side
g Power Plug
h Air Hose
i Speed Restriction Label
j Sealant Hose
k Tire Sealant Expiration Date
l Bottle Release Button
Speed restriction label is applied on the temporary tire repair kit.
Injecting Sealant and Air
[1 ] Remove the valve cap (a) from the tire
valve stem (b).
7
Handling the Unexpected > If a Tire Goes Flat
356
[2 ] Remove the sealant hose (a) from the kit.
[3 ] Attach the sealant hose (a) onto the tire
valve stem (b). Screw it until it is tight.
[4 ] Plug in the compressor to the accessory
power socket.
≫
Be careful not to pinch the cord in a door or
window.
Accessory Power Socket
u
P.145
[5 ] Turn the power system on.
Turn on Power System
u
P.98
≫
Keep the power system on while injecting
sealant and air.
Carbon Monoxide Gas
u
P.26
[6 ] Turn the selector knob to (a).
7
Handling the Unexpected > If a Tire Goes Flat
357
7
Handling the Unexpected
[7 ] Press the inflator switch (a) to turn on the
kit.
≫
The compressor starts injecting sealant and air
into the tire.
≫
When the sealant injection is complete,
continue to add air.
[8 ] After the air pressure reaches the specified
pressure, turn off the kit.
≫
To check the pressure, occasionally turn off the
compressor and read the pressure gauge (b).
≫
Refer to the driver’s doorjamb label for the
specified pressure.
[9 ] Unplug the power plug from the accessory
power socket.
[
10
] Unscrew the sealant hose (a) from the tire
valve stem (b). Reinstall the valve cap.
[
11
] Press the air release button (c) until the
gauge returns to 0 psi (0 kPa).
[
12
] Repackage and properly stow the kit.
Keep the power system on while injecting sealant and air.
Until the sealant injection is complete, the pressure shown on the pressure gauge will appear
higher than actual. After the sealant injection is complete the pressure will drop and then
begin to rise again as the tire is inflated with air. This is normal.
To accurately measure the air pressure using the gauge, turn the air compressor off only after
the sealant injection is complete.
If the required air pressure is not reached within 10 minutes, the tire may be too severely
damaged for the kit to provide the necessary seal and your vehicle will need to be towed.
See a Honda dealer for a replacement sealant bottle and proper disposal of an empty bottle.
Do not operate the temporary tire repair kit compressor for more than 15 minutes.
The compressor can overheat and become permanently damaged.
!
The sealant can permanently stain clothing and other materials.
Be careful during handling and wipe away any spills immediately.
7
Handling the Unexpected > If a Tire Goes Flat
358
3 WARNING
Tire sealant contains substances that are harmful and can be fatal if
swallowed.
If accidentally swallowed, do not induce vomiting. Drink plenty of water and
get medical attention immediately.
For skin or eye contact, flush with cool water and get medical attention if
necessary.
3 WARNING
Running the engine with the vehicle in an enclosed or even partly enclosed
area can cause a rapid buildup of toxic carbon monoxide.
Breathing this colorless, odorless gas can cause unconsciousness and even
death.
Only run the engine to power the air compressor with the vehicle outdoors.
Distributing the Sealant in the Tire
[1 ] Apply the speed restriction label (a) to the
location as shown.
[2 ] Drive the vehicle for about 10 minutes.
≫
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
[3 ] Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
[4 ] Recheck the air pressure using the air hose
(a) on the compressor.
Inflating an Under-inflated Tire
u
P.361
7
Handling the Unexpected > If a Tire Goes Flat
359
7
Handling the Unexpected
[5 ] Turn the selector knob to (a).
≫
Do not turn the air compressor on to check the
pressure.
Inflating an Under-inflated Tire
u
P.361
[6 ] If the air pressure is
Less than 19 psi (130kPa):
Do not add air or continue driving. The leak is too
severe. Call for help and have your vehicle towed.
About Towing
u
P.380
Specified pressure (See the label on driver’s
doorjamb.) or more:
Continue driving for another 10 minutes or until you
reach the nearest service station, whichever is
sooner. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). If you have
not reached a service station, stop and check the tire
pressure.
≫
If the air pressure does not go down after the 10
minute driving, you do not need to check the
pressure any more.
Greater than 130 kPa (19 psi), but less than specified
pressure:
Turn the air compressor on to inflate the tire until the
tire pressure reaches specified pressure (See the
label on driver’s doorjamb.).
Inflating an Under-inflated Tire
u
P.361
Then, drive carefully for 10 more minutes or until you
reach the nearest service station, whichever is
sooner. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). If you have
not reached a service station, stop and check the tire
pressure.
≫
You should repeat this procedure as long as the air
pressure is not within the range indicated for the
tire size.
[7 ] Unscrew the air hose from the tire valve
stem. Reinstall the valve cap.
[8 ] Press the air release button (a) until the
pressure gauge (b) returns to 0 psi (0 kPa).
[9 ] Repackage and properly stow the kit.
7
Handling the Unexpected > If a Tire Goes Flat
360
Inflating an Under-inflated Tire
You can use the kit to inflate a non-punctured under-inflated tire.
[1 ] Open the trunk floor lid.
Getting Ready to Temporarily Repair the Flat
Tire
u
P.355
[2 ] Take the kit out of the case.
[3 ] Place the kit face up on flat ground near the
tire to be inflated, away from traffic. Do not
place the kit on its side.
[4 ] Remove the power plug (a) and air hose
(b) from the kit.
[5 ] Remove the valve cap (a).
[6 ] Attach the air hose (a) onto the tire valve
stem (b). Screw it until it is tight.
[7 ] Plug in the kit to the accessory power socket.
≫
Be careful not to pinch the cord in a door or
window.
Accessory Power Socket
u
P.145
[8 ] Turn the power system on.
Turn on Power System
u
P.98
≫
Keep the power system on while injecting
sealant and air.
Carbon Monoxide Gas
u
P.26
7
Handling the Unexpected > If a Tire Goes Flat
361
7
Handling the Unexpected
a AIR Side
[9 ] Turn the selector knob to (a).
[
10
] Press the inflator switch (b) to turn on the
kit.
≫
The compressor starts to inject air into the tire.
[
11
] Inflate the tire to the specified pressure (See
the label on driver’s doorjamb.).
[
12
] Turn off the kit.
≫
Check the pressure gauge (a) on the air
compressor.
≫
If overinflated, press the air release button (b).
[
13
] Unplug the kit from the accessory power
socket.
[
14
] Unscrew the air hose from the tire valve
stem. Reinstall the valve cap.
[
15
] Press the air release button until the gauge
returns to 0 psi (0 kPa).
[
16
] Repackage and properly stow the kit.
Keep the power system on while injecting air.
Do not operate the temporary tire repair kit compressor for more than 15 minutes. The
compressor can overheat and become permanently damaged.
!
Do not plug any other electronic devices into other accessory power
socket.
Accessory Power Socket
u
P.145
!
Do not operate the temporary tire repair kit compressor for more than
15 minutes.
The compressor can overheat and become permanently damaged.
3 WARNING
Running the engine with the vehicle in an enclosed or even partly enclosed
area can cause a rapid buildup of toxic carbon monoxide.
Breathing this colorless, odorless gas can cause unconsciousness and even
death.
Only run the engine to power the air compressor with the vehicle outdoors.
7
Handling the Unexpected > If a Tire Goes Flat
362
7
Handling the Unexpected >
Handling of the jack
How to Set Up the Jack
Your vehicle has jacking points as shown.
When replacing your tires, consult a dealer.
363
7
Handling the Unexpected
7
Handling the Unexpected >
Power System Won’t Start
Checking the Procedure
If the power system won’t start, check the following items and take appropriate
action.
Check if the related indicator or driver information interface messages come on.
The Temperature is too cold for vehicle to operate message appears.
≫
You must wait for an increase in the ambient temperature.
≫
Have the vehicle towed to a warmer location.
About Towing a Trailer
u
P.95
The To start, touch start button with emblem side of remote message appears.
≫
Make sure the keyless remote is in its operating range.
If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak
u
P.365
Check the shift position.
The transmission is not in P .
≫
Put the transmission into P .
Check the power system starting procedure.
Follow the instructions, and try to start the power system again.
Turn on Power System
u
P.98
Check the immobilizer system indicator.
When the immobilizer system indicator is blinking, the power system cannot be turned on.
Immobilizer System
u
P.55
Indicator List
u
P.285
Check the fuses.
Check all fuses, or have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Inspecting and Changing Fuses
u
P.378
If you cannot turn on the power system after checking all the items above, have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an assisting vehicle or booster battery
to jump start it.
Jump Starting Procedure
u
P.367
Depending on the situation, it may be possible to temporarily turn the power system
on using the emergency starting procedure.
364
If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak
Follow the steps below if the POWER button does not turn on the power or start the
engine.
[1 ] Press the POWER button.
[2 ] Touch the center of the POWER button with
the keyless remote within 30 seconds. The
buttons on the keyless remote should be
facing you.
[3 ] Depress and hold the brake pedal, then
press the POWER button within 10 seconds.
≫
If you don’t depress the pedal, the mode will
change to ACCESSORY.
Emergency Power System Off
The POWER button may be used to stop the engine due to an emergency situation
even while driving. If you must turn the power system off, do either of the following
operations:
Press and hold the POWER button for about two seconds.
Firmly press the POWER button three times.
The steering wheel will not lock.
!
If the power mode is set to ACCESSORY while driving, the power
system will shut down and all steering and brake power assist
functions will stop, making it difficult to control the vehicle.
Emergency Power System On
If the power system cannot be turned on using the normal starting procedure, you
may be able to turn it on using the emergency starting procedure below.
Do not use this procedure if it is not an emergency.
[1 ] Make sure the parking brake is applied.
[2 ] Check that the transmission is in P , then set the power mode to ACCESSORY.
[3 ] Firmly depress the brake pedal, then press and hold the POWER button for at
least 15 seconds.
This should be considered a system malfunction even if you are able to turn the
power system on using the above procedure.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
Refer to the following if you cannot move the shift lever out of the P position.
7
Handling the Unexpected > Power System Won’t Start
365
7
Handling the Unexpected
7
Handling the Unexpected >
If the 12-volt Battery Is Dead
Jump Starting Procedure
Turn off the power to electric devices, such as audio and lights. Turn off the power
system, then open the hood.
[1 ] Open the cover on the positive terminal.
[2 ] Connect the first jumper cable to your
vehicle’s battery terminal.
[3 ] Connect the other end of the first jumper
cable to the booster battery (a)
terminal.
≫
Use a 12-volt booster battery only.
≫
When using an automotive battery charger to
boost your 12-volt battery, select a lower
charging voltage than 15-volt. Check the
charger manual for the proper setting.
[4 ] Connect the second jumper cable to the
booster battery terminal.
[5 ] Connect the other end of the second jumper
cable to the stud bolt (a) as shown. Do not
connect this jumper cable to any other part.
[6 ] If your vehicle is connected to another
vehicle, start the assisting vehicle’s engine
and increase its RPM slightly.
[7 ] Attempt to start your vehicle’s engine. If it
turns over slowly, check that the jumper
cables have good metal-to-metal contact.
3 WARNING
A 12-volt battery can explode if you do not follow the correct procedure,
seriously injuring anyone nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking materials away from the 12-volt
battery.
!
Securely attach the jumper cables’ clips so that they do not come off
when the engine vibrates.
Be careful not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the cable ends to touch
each other while attaching or detaching the jumper cables.
367
7
Handling the Unexpected
!
12-volt battery performance degrades in cold conditions and may
prevent the engine from starting.
What to Do After the Power System Starts
Once your vehicle’s power system has started, remove the jumper cables in the
following order.
[1 ] Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle’s ground.
[2 ] Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery
terminal.
[3 ] Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle’s battery terminal.
[4 ] Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery
terminal.
After re-connecting the 12-volt battery: if various
indicators come on and the message on the left is
displayed on the driver information interface,
drive a short distance at more than 12 mph
(20km/h). If the indicator does not go off, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.
7
Handling the Unexpected > If the 12-volt Battery Is Dead
368
7
Handling the Unexpected >
Shift Lever Does Not Move
Releasing the Lock
Follow the procedure below if you cannot move the shift lever out of the P position.
[1 ] Set the parking brake.
[2 ] Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF.
[3 ] Remove the built-in key from the keyless
remote.
[4 ] Wrap a cloth around the tip of the built-in
key. Put it into the shift lock release slot (a)
as shown in the image, and remove the cover
(b).
[5 ] Insert the key into the shift lock release slot
(a).
[6 ] While pushing the key down, press the shift
lever release button (b), and place the shift
lever into N .
≫
The lock is now released. Have the shift lever
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
369
7
Handling the Unexpected
7
Handling the Unexpected >
Overheating
How to Handle Overheating
Overheating symptoms are as follows:
The Power system temperature high. Power may be reduced. message appears on the
driver information interface.
The Engine temperature too hot. Do not drive. Allow engine to cool. message appears on
the driver information interface.
Steam or spray comes out of the engine compartment.
3 WARNING
Steam and spray from an overheated engine can seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam is coming out.
3 WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause hot coolant to
spray out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator
cap.
!
Continuing to drive with the Engine temperature too hot. Do not
drive. Allow engine to cool. message on the driver information
interface may damage the engine.
If the Power system temperature high. Power may be reduced. appears on the
driver information interface, your vehicle has less ability to accelerate and may be
harder to start on an incline.
The Power system temperature high. Power may be
reduced. Message Appears on the Driver Information
Interface
[1 ] Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.
≫
Set the parking brake, and put the transmission into
P . Turn off all accessories and
turn on the hazard warning lights.
[2 ] Keep the power mode in ON, and wait until the message disappears.
≫
If the message does not disappear, have your vehicle inspected at a dealer.
370
The Engine temperature too hot. Do not drive. Allow engine
to cool. Message Appears on the Driver Information
Interface
[1 ] Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.
[2 ] Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights.
≫
No steam or spray present: Keep the power system on and open the hood.
≫
Steam or spray is present: Turn off the power system and wait until it subsides. Then,
open the hood.
a Reserve Tank
b MAX
c MIN
[3 ] Check that the cooling fan is operating and
turn the power system off once the Engine
temperature too hot. Do not drive. Allow
engine to cool. message disappears.
≫
If the cooling fan is not operating, immediately
turn the power system off.
[4 ] Once the engine has cooled down, inspect
the coolant level and check the cooling
system components for leaks.
≫
If the coolant level in the engine coolant reserve
tank is low, add coolant until it reaches the MAX
mark.
≫
If there is no coolant in the reserve tank, check
that the radiator is cool. Cover the radiator cap
with a heavy cloth and open the cap. If
necessary, add coolant up to the base of the
filler neck, and put thecap back on.
[5 ] Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, turn
the power system on. If the message does
not appear, resume driving. If it appears
again, contact a dealer for repairs.
If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs.
Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only. Have a dealer flush the system
with proper antifreeze as soon as possible.
7
Handling the Unexpected > Overheating
371
7
Handling the Unexpected
7
Handling the Unexpected >
When a Warning Appears
If the Engine oil pressure low. Warning
Appears
!
Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause serious
mechanical damage almost immediately.
Reasons for the warning to appear
Appears when the engine oil pressure is low.
What to do as soon as the warning appears
[1 ] Immediately park the vehicle on level ground in a safe place.
[2 ] If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights on.
What to do after parking the vehicle
[1 ] Turn the power system off and let the engine sit for approximately three
minutes.
[2 ] Open the hood and check the oil level.
≫
Add oil as necessary.
Oil Check
u
P.323
[3 ] Start the engine and check the Engine oil pressure low warning
≫
The warning disappears: Start driving again.
≫
The warning does not disappear within 10 seconds: Immediately turn the power
system off and contact a dealer for repairs.
372
If the Limited stopping power Warning
Appears
Reasons for the warning to appear
Appears when braking ability is reduced.
What to do as soon as the warning appears
Slow down and drive carefully. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
7
Handling the Unexpected > When a Warning Appears
373
7
Handling the Unexpected
7
Handling the Unexpected >
Fuses
Checking Fuses
If any electrical devices are not working, set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF and
check to see if any applicable fuse is blown.
Engine Compartment Fuse Box
Located near the 12-volt battery. Push the tabs
(a) to open the box.
Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box cover or
the image below.
Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number.
374
Circuit Protected and Fuse Rating
Circuit Protected Amps
1 — BATTERY 175 A
2
— — 30 A
— — 40 A
— F/BOX OPTION 60 A
— A/C PTC1 (40 A)
— F/BOX OPTION2 60 A
— — 60 A
— F/BOX MAIN 60 A
3
— AUDIO AMP (30 A)
— — 30 A
— A/C PTC3 (40 A)
— — 30 A
— — 50 A
— HTR MTR 40 A
— RR DEFROSTER 40 A
4
— ABS/VSA FSR 40 A
— ABS/VSA MTR 40 A
— ENG WATER PUMP 40 A
— ESB 40 A
— IG MAIN 30 A
— — 40 A
— R/M2 30 A
5
— SUB FUSE 30 A
— WIPER 30 A
— EPS 70 A
— R/M1 30 A
— RFC 60 A
— — (30 A)
— F/BOX MAIN2 60 A
6 — — —
7 — IG MAIN2 30 A
8 — — —
9 — BACK UP 15 A
Circuit Protected Amps
10 — WASHER 15 A
11 — — —
12 —
RR H/SEAT
*
(20 A)
13 — — —
14 — RFC RLY CL+ 10 A
15 — SHUTTER GRILLE (10 A)
16 — — —
17 — — —
18 — HORN 10 A
19 —
AUDIO SUB
*
(15 A)
20 — AUDIO 7.5 A
21 — EVTC 20 A
22 — DBW 15 A
23 — HAZARD 15 A
24 — BACKUP FI-ECU 10 A
25 — IGP 15 A
26 — — —
27 — LCM L 20 A
28 — INJ 20 A
29 — STOP 10 A
30 — LCM R 20 A
31 — IG COIL 15 A
32 — ICM 10 A
33 — PCU EWP 10 A
34 — — —
35 — — —
38 — — —
39 — IGA 10 A
40 — IGB 10 A
41 — — —
42 — MON2 7.5 A
43 — — —
44 — — —
*: Not available on all models
7
Handling the Unexpected > Fuses
375
7
Handling the Unexpected
Circuit Protected Amps
45 — IGPS (LAF) 10 A
Circuit Protected Amps
46 — — —
Interior Fuse Box
a Main Fuse Box
a Fuse Label
Located under the dashboard.
Fuse locations are shown on the label under the
steering column or the image below.
Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number.
7
Handling the Unexpected > Fuses
376
Circuit Protected and Fuse Rating
Circuit Protected Amps
1 — P/W DR 20 A
2 — P/W AS 20 A
3 — P/W RR R 20 A
4 — P/W RR L 20 A
5 — OPTION 10 A
6 — SRS 10 A
7 — TRUNK LOCK ACT 10 A
8 — — —
9 — FR ACC SOCKET 20 A
10 — DOOR LOCK 20 A
11 — METER 10 A
12 — — (10 A)
13 — OPTION2 10 A
14 — MISS SOL 10 A
15 — DR DOOR UNLOCK (10 A)
16 — — —
17 — — —
18 — — —
19 — — —
20 — CGW 10 A
21 — — —
22 — SMART 10 A
23 — DR DOOR LOCK (10 A)
24 — — —
25 — — —
26 — SRS 10 A
27 — ACG 10 A
28 — VSA/ABS 10 A
Circuit Protected Amps
29 — FUEL PUMP 20 A
30 — L SIDE DOOR UNLOCK 10 A
31 — R SIDE DOOR UNLOCK 10 A
32 — SUN ROOF (20 A)
33 — CTR DISP (7.5 A)
34 — USB CHG 10 A
35 — — —
36 — — —
37 — — —
38 — IGA2 (IGHOLD3) (20 A)
39 — R SIDE DOOR LOCK 10 A
40 — DR P/SEAT SLIDE (20 A)
41 — DR P/SEAT REC (20 A)
42 — OPTION3 (10 A)
43 — A/C 10 A
44 — DRL 10 A
45 — ACC 10 A
46 — ACC KEY LOCK 10 A
47 — L SIDE DOOR LOCK 10 A
48 —
FR H/SEAT
*
(20 A)
49 —
AS P/SEAT REC
*
(20 A)
50 — P/LUMBAR DR (10 A)
51 — — —
52 — — —
53 —
AS P/SEAT SLIDE
*
(20 A)
54 — OPTION1 10 A
55 — — —
56 — — —
*: Not available on all models
7
Handling the Unexpected > Fuses
377
7
Handling the Unexpected
Inspecting and Changing Fuses
a Hole
a Main Fuse
[1 ] Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF. Turn
headlights and all accessories off.
[2 ] Remove the fuse box cover.
[3 ] Check the main fuse in the engine
compartment fuse box.
≫
Look at the fuse through the hole.
≫
If the fuse is blown, have it replaced by a dealer.
a Blown Fuse
b Combined Fuse
[4 ] Check the combined fuses in the engine
compartment fuse box.
≫
Look into the space between the fuses.
≫
If the fuse is blown, have it replaced by a dealer.
7
Handling the Unexpected > Fuses
378
a Fuse Puller
b Remove
c Replace
[5 ] Inspect the small fuses in the engine
compartment and the vehicle interior.
≫
If there is a blown fuse, remove it with the fuse
puller and replace it with a new one.
Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating greatly increases the chances of damaging
the electrical system.
Use the charts to locate the fuse in question and confirm the specified amperage.
Replace with a fuse of the same specified amperage.
There is a fuse puller in the engine compartment fuse box cover.
7
Handling the Unexpected > Fuses
379
7
Handling the Unexpected
7
Handling the Unexpected >
Emergency Towing
About Towing
Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.
Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will cause serious damage. The bumpers are
not designed to support the vehicle’s weight.
When having your vehicle towed with the front wheels lifted, make sure the parking brake is
released. If you cannot release the parking brake, your vehicle must be transported by the
flatbed equipment.
Parking Brake
u
P.104
!
Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain.
It is very dangerous because ropes or chains may shift from side to side or
break.
!
Improper towing such as towing behind a motorhome or other motor
vehicle can damage the transmission.
Flatbed Equipment
The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck.
This is the best way to transport your vehicle.
Wheel Lift Equipment
The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off the
ground. The rear tires remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way to tow your
vehicle.
380
7
Handling the Unexpected >
If You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door
What to Do If Unable to Unlock the Fuel Fill
Door
If you cannot unlock the fuel fill door, use the following procedure.
[1 ] Open the trunk.
[2 ] Pull the release cord (a) as shown.
≫
Open the fuel fill door.
How to Refuel
u
P.117
After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the vehicle checked.
381
7
Handling the Unexpected
7
Handling the Unexpected >
If You Cannot Open the Trunk
What to Do If Unable to Open the Trunk
[1 ] Push the lower left side of the cover (a) to
remove it.
[2 ] Remove the built-in key (a) from the
keyless remote.
[3 ] Insert the key into the cylinder and turn it
clockwise.
≫
The trunk unlocks and opens.
Following up:
After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the vehicle checked.
382
7
Handling the Unexpected >
Refueling
Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container
[1 ] Turn off the power system.
[2 ] Open the fuel fill door.
How to Refuel
u
P.117
[3 ] Take the funnel (a) out of the tool case in
the trunk.
Types of Tools
u
P.350
[4 ] Place the end of the funnel on the lower part
of filler opening, then insert it slowly and
fully.
≫
Make sure that the end of the funnel goes down
along with the filler pipe.
[5 ] Fill the tank with fuel from the portable fuel
container.
≫
Pour fuel carefully so you do not spill any.
[6 ] Remove the funnel from the filler neck.
≫
Wipe up any fuel from the funnel before storing
it.
[7 ] Shut the fuel fill door by hand.
Do not insert the nozzle of a portable fuel container or any funnel other than the one
provided with your vehicle. Doing so can damage the fuel system.
Do not try to pry open or push open the sealed fuel tank with foreign objects. This can
damage the fuel system and its seal.
Make sure the fuel in the portable fuel container is gasoline before you refuel.
3 WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive.
You can be burned or seriously injured when handling fuel.
Turn the power system off, and keep heat, sparks, and flames away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
383
7
Handling the Unexpected
7
Handling the Unexpected >
Emergency Call (eCall)
Automatic Emergency Call
a eCall Indicator
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, the
vehicle will attempt to connect to an operator.
Once a connection is established, your location
information will be sent to an operator with whom
you will be able to speak.
When an emergency call is initiated, the vehicle speakers are disabled so that you can
hear the operator.
When the power mode is set to ON, the eCall indicator lights up in green for 1 second,
then in red for 1 second.
If the eCall system is working properly, the indicator will light up in green.
Green: eCall system is ready.
Blinking in green: eCall system is connected and making an eCall to an operator.
Repeating a pattern of short flashes of the red light: The eCall system has failed to connect to
an operator. The eCall indicator will continue this pattern for five seconds, then it will light up
in green.
If the eCall system is disabled in the event of a critical system failure, the following
warning will be given to the occupants of the vehicle:
Red or blacked out: A problem with the eCall system has occurred. If the indicator stays red or
blacked out even after you have restarted the vehicle, have the system check by a dealer.
!
Your vehicle may NOT be able to connect to an operator if:
The 12-volt battery is too low.
Your vehicle is in an area without adequate cellular coverage.
There is a problem with the eCall system itself or its peripheral equipment such
as the microphone or speakers.
384
Manual Emergency Call
b Microphone
c Cover
If you need to make an emergency call, you can
establish a connection manually. Press the SOS
button (a).
To cancel a call, press the SOS button for more
than two seconds, before 10 seconds have
elapsed since the SOS button was pressed.
The SOS button is protected by a cover. Open the cover to gain access.
When an emergency call is initiated, the vehicle speakers are disabled so that you
can hear the operator.
!
Do NOT press the button while you are driving. If you need to contact
an operator, park the vehicle in a safe place before you make a call.
!
If the eCall system at first fails to connect to an operator, it will try
again until a connection is established. However, if two minutes have
elapsed since the first try was attempted, the system will no longer
attempt to establish a connection.
!
The SOS button does not cancel a call once the system is connected to
an operator.
7
Handling the Unexpected > Emergency Call (eCall)
385
7
Handling the Unexpected
Specifications
About Specifications･･･････････････････････････387
Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine
Number, Motor Number, and Transmission
Number ･･････････････････････････････････････ 389
Devices that Emit Radio Waves
About Devices that Emit Radio Waves･････････ 390
Reporting Safety Defects
About Reporting･･･････････････････････････････ 391
Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes･･･････････････････ 393
Warranty Coverages
About Warranty Coverages････････････････････ 394
Customer Service Information
Contacts･･･････････････････････････････････････ 396
Open Source License
Summary･･････････････････････････････････････ 398
Vehicle Information
386
8
Vehicle Information >
Specifications
About Specifications
Basic Information
Model ACCORD HYBRID
No. of Passengers:
Front 2
Rear 3
Total 5
Weights：
Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating
See the certification label
on the driver’s doorjamb
Gross Axle Weight
Rating(Front)
See the certification label
on the driver’s doorjamb
Gross Axle Weight
Rating(Rear)
See the certification label
on the driver’s doorjamb
Air Conditioning
Refrigerant Type HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf)
Charge Quantity
15.3 – 17.1 oz (435 – 485
g)
Lubricant Type ND-OIL11 (POE)
Quantity
7.32 – 8.24 cu-in (120 –
135 cm
3
)
Engine Specifications
Displacement
121.57 cu-in (1,993 cm
3
)
Spark Plugs NGK
DILZKAR7G11
Y
Fuel
Type
Unleaded gasoline, pump
octane number 87 or
higher
Fuel Tank Capacity 12.81 US gal (48.5 L)
Washer Fluid
Tank Capacity
U.S.: 1.6 US qt (1.5 L)
Canada: 4.8 US qt (4.5 L)
Light Bulbs
Headlights (Low Beam) LED
Headlights (High Beam) LED
Front Turn Signal Lights LED
Parking/Daytime Running
Lights
LED
Front Side Marker Lights LED
Side Turn Signal Lights
*
(on
Door Mirrors)
LED
Brake Lights LED
Rear Side Marker/Taillights LED
Taillights LED
Rear Turn Signal Lights LED
Back-Up Lights LED
High-Mount Brake Light LED
Rear License Plate Light LED
Interior Lights
Map Lights LED
Ceiling Light LED
Trunk Light LED
Vanity Mirror
Lights
LED
Center
Console Light
LED
Ambient
Lights
LED
Brake Fluid
Specified
Honda Heavy Duty Brake
Fluid DOT 3
Transmission Fluid
Specified Honda HEVF-Type 1
Capacity Change
2.6 US qt (2.5
L)
Engine Oil
Recommende
d
・Honda Genuine Motor Oil
0W-20
・API service SN or higher grade
0W-20
Capacity
Change
3.9 US qt (3.7
L)
Change
including filter
4.2 US qt (4.0
L)
*: Not available on all models
387
8
Vehicle Information
Engine Coolant
Specified
Honda Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
Ratio 50/50 with distilled water
Capacity
1.49 US gal (5.63 L)
(change including the
remaining 0.19 US gal
(0.71 L) in the reserve
tank)
Tire
Regular
Size
225/50R17
94V
235/40R19
96V
Pressure
psi(kPa[kgf/
㎠])
Front:
33 (230 [2.3])
*1
35 (240 [2.4])
*2
Rear:
32 (220 [2.2])
Wheel Size Regular
17 x 7 1/2J
*1
19 x 8 1/2J
*2
For the tire size and pressure information, see the
label on driver’s doorjamb.
*1: Models with 225/50R17
*2: Models with 235/40R19
8
Vehicle Information > Specifications
388
8
Vehicle Information >
Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine
Number, Motor Number, and Transmission
Number
Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your
vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle. The
locations of your vehicle’s VIN, engine number, motor number, and transmission
number are shown as follows.
a Engine Number
b Certification Label/Vehicle Identification
Number
c Vehicle Identification Number
d Transmission Number
e Motor Number
389
8
Vehicle Information
8
Vehicle Information >
Devices that Emit Radio Waves
About Devices that Emit Radio Waves
Each radio frequency device installed in the vehicle conforms to the requirements and
standards of the regulation listed below:
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of the device.
390
8
Vehicle Information >
Reporting Safety Defects
About Reporting
In the U.S.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group
of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor
Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-
free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-888-275-9171); go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also inform Transport
Canada.
If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group
of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and remedy campaign.
However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, or Honda Canada
Inc.
391
8
Vehicle Information
8
Vehicle Information >
Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes
Your vehicle has readiness code as part of the onboard self diagnostic system.
Some states use these codes for testing to verify whether your vehicle’s emissions
components are working properly.
The codes may not be read properly if testing is performed just after the 12-volt
battery has gone dead or been disconnected.
To check the state of the readiness codes, set the power mode to ON, without turning
the power system on. The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for 15 to 20
seconds. If the malfunction indicator lamp then turns off, the readiness codes are set.
If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks five to ten times, the readiness codes are not
set.
If you are required to have your vehicle tested and the readiness codes are not set,
prepare the vehicle for testing by doing the following:
[1 ] Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full.
[2 ] Drive the vehicle for about 10 minutes, reaching 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h)
at least once during this drive.
[3 ] Park the vehicle and leave the power system off for 6 hours or more.
[4 ] Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40°F and 95°F (4°C and 35°C).
[5 ] Turn the power system on.
[6 ] Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed
of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in
D . Do not use cruise control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without
moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If
you cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions,
drive for at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90
seconds).
[7 ] Drive in city or suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions
allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator
pedal or the brake pedal.
[8 ] Park the vehicle and leave the power system off for 40 minutes.
[9 ] If this procedure is done immediately after losing 12-volt battery power, several
additional hours of driving may be required to set all codes.
If a testing facility determines that the readiness codes are not set, you may be
requested to return at a later date to complete the test.
If the testing facility determines the readiness codes are still not set, see a dealer.
393
8
Vehicle Information
8
Vehicle Information >
Warranty Coverages
About Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners
Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties:
New Vehicle Limited Warranty – covers your new vehicle, except for the
emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and
workmanship.
Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance
Warranty – these two warranties cover your vehicle’s emissions control systems.
Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for
exact information.
Seat Belt Limited Warranty – a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered
by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty – all exterior body panels are covered against
rusting from the inside out for the specified time period, regardless of mileage.
Accessory Limited Warranty – Honda accessories are covered under this
warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other
factors. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Replacement Parts Limited Warranty – covers all Honda replacement parts
against defects in materials and workmanship.
Replacement 12-Volt Battery Limited Warranty – provides prorated coverage for
a replacement battery purchased from your dealer.
Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty – provides coverage for as long
as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the Honda
warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on
warranty coverages. Your vehicle’s original tires are covered by their manufacturer.
Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.
394
Statement on Warranty Coverage for Aftermarket and Recycled Parts
The Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. s.2301 et seq., makes it illegal for
motor vehicle manufacturers to void a motor vehicle warranty or deny warranty
coverage solely because an aftermarket or recycled part has been used to repair
the vehicle or someone other than the authorized service provider performed
service on the vehicle.
This provision does not apply to a new motor vehicle purchased solely for
commercial or industrial use.
Under federal law, a manufacturer may deny warranty coverage and charge for
repairs to a vehicle if it is discovered that an aftermarket or recycled part installed
on the vehicle is defective or was installed incorrectly and caused damage to
another part of the vehicle otherwise covered under warranty.
The Federal Trade Commission requires that a manufacturer demonstrate that an
aftermarket or recycled part or service performed by a person other than an
authorized service provider caused damage to another part of the vehicle otherwise
covered under warranty before denying warranty coverage.
Additionally, federal law allows a manufacturer to void a motor vehicle warranty or
deny warranty coverage if the manufacturer provides the article or service to
consumers free of charge under the warranty or the manufacturer has secured a
waiver from the Federal Trade Commission.
Canadian Owners
Please refer to the warranty manual that came with your vehicle.
EPA Contact Information
An owner may obtain further information concerning emission warranties or report
violations of the terms of the emission warranties by contacting:
Director,
Light-Duty Vehicle Center,
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
Attention: Warranty Claim
2000 Traverwood Drive,
Ann Arbor, MI 48105;
8
Vehicle Information > Warranty Coverages
395
8
Vehicle Information
8
Vehicle Information >
Customer Service Information
Contacts
Honda dealership personnel are trained professionals able to deal with any problems
you may encounter with your vehicle. If, however, you are faced with a problem that
they cannot resolve to your satisfaction, contact Honda Customer Service.
U.S. Owners
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Honda Automobile Customer Service
Mail Stop CHI-5
1919 Torrance Blvd.
Torrance, CA 90501-2746
Tel: 1 (800) 999-1009
Canadian Owners
Honda Canada Inc.
Customer Relations
180 Honda Boulevard
Markham, ON
L6C 0H9
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: 1-877-939-0909
E-mail: Honda_[email protected]
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin Islands
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Tel: 1 (787) 620-7546
In Guam
Triple J Autogroup
157 S. Marine Corps Drive
Tamuning, GU 96913
Tel: (671) 648-2277
In Saipan, Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands
Joeten Motor Company, Inc.
P.O. Box 500680
Saipan, MP 96950
Tel: (670) 234-5562
When you call or write, please give us the following information:
396
Vehicle Identification Number
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, Motor Number, and Transmission
Number
u
P.389
Date of purchase
Odometer reading of your vehicle
Your name, address, and telephone number
A detailed description of the problem
Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you
8
Vehicle Information > Customer Service Information
397
8
Vehicle Information
8
Vehicle Information >
Open Source License
Summary
Meter Open Source License
QNX
The software embedded in this product includes open source software. Refer to the
following website for details regarding the open source software.
https://www.denso.com/global/en/opensource/meter/honda/
TCU Open Source License
To obtain the source code that is contained in this product, under GPL, LGPL, MPL,
and other open source licenses that have the obligation to disclose source code,
and to access all referred license terms, copyright notices and other relevant
documents, please visit https://opensource.lge.com. LG Electronics will also provide
open source code to you on CD-ROM for a charge covering the cost of performing
such distribution (such as the cost of media, shipping, and handling) upon email
request to opensource@lge.com. This offer is valid to anyone in receipt of this
information for a period of three years after our last shipment of this product.
Front Sensor Camera Open Source License
“The product includes code under public domain :
https://www.jonolick.com/
uploads/7/9/2/1/7921194/jo_jpeg.cpp
The code is based on https://github.com/jpeg-js/jpeg-js/blob/master/lib/encoder.js
Copyright (c) 2008, Adobe Systems Incorporated
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of Adobe Systems Incorporated nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this
software without specific prior written permission.
398
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT
OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
*/
/*
8
Vehicle Information > Open Source License
399
8
Vehicle Information
Numbers
12.3" Color Touchscreen Basic Operations････ 169
12.3" Color Touchscreen Customized Features････
･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 202
12.3" Color Touchscreen Other Operations････190
12-volt Battery････････････････････････････････ 343
Maintenance (Checking the 12-volt Battery)････
････････････････････････････････････････････ 343
Maintenance (Replacing)････････････････････ 343
12-Volt Battery Charging System Indicator････ 288
A
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)･････････････････ 110
Accessory Power Socket･･･････････････････････145
Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System･･････････････ 136
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow････････････････････････････････････････252
Indicator (Amber)･･･････････････････････････ 291
Indicator (White/Green)･････････････････････ 253
Adding the Coolant････････････････････････････ 328
Additives
Coolant･･････････････････････････････････････326
Engine Oil･･･････････････････････････････････ 322
Washer･･････････････････････････････････････330
Additives, Engine Oil･･･････････････････････････322
Adjusting
Front Seats･･･････････････････････････････････ 71
Head Restraints･･････････････････････････････ 71
Rear Seats････････････････････････････････････73
Steering Wheel･･･････････････････････････････ 68
Air Conditioning System (Climate Control System)
･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 157
Changing the Mode･･････････････････････････157
Defrosting the Windshield and Windows････ 130
Dust and Pollen Filter･･･････････････････････ 345
Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode････････････････157
Sensors･････････････････････････････････････ 160
Synchronization Mode･･･････････････････････ 159
Using Automatic Climate Control････････････ 158
Air Pressure･･･････････････････････････････････ 388
Airbags･･････････････････････････････････････････40
Advanced Airbags････････････････････････････ 44
After a Collision･･･････････････････････････････40
Airbag Care･･･････････････････････････････････ 51
Event Data Recorder･･･････････････････････････ 5
Front Airbags (SRS)･･･････････････････････････42
Indicator････････････････････････････････ 49, 288
Knee Airbags
･････････････････････････････････ 45
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator･･･････････････ 50
Sensors･･･････････････････････････････････････40
Side Airbags･･････････････････････････････････ 47
Side Curtain Airbags･･････････････････････････ 48
Ambient Meter･････････････････････････････････294
AM/FM Radio･･････････････････････････････････ 178
Android Auto™･････････････････････････････････ 195
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)･････････････････ 110
Indicator････････････････････････････････････ 289
Apple CarPlay･････････････････････････････････ 193
Armrest
Front Seat
････････････････････････････････････
73
Rear Seat
･････････････････････････････････････
73
AT&T Hotspot
･･････････････････････････････････
192
Audio Playback via Bluetooth® Device
･････････
183
Audio Remote Controls
････････････････････････
165
Audio System
12.3″ Color Touchscreen Basic Operations
･･
169
12.3″ Color Touchscreen Customized Features
･･
････････････････････････････････････････････
202
12.3″ Color Touchscreen Other Operations
･･
190
About Audio Playback
･･･････････････････････
180
Adjusting the Sound･････････････････････････175
Alexa Built-In･･･････････････････････････････ 176
AM/FM Radio････････････････････････････････178
Android Auto™･･････････････････････････････ 195
Apple CarPlay･･･････････････････････････････ 193
AT&T Hotspot･･･････････････････････････････ 192
Audio/Information Screen･･･････････････････ 162
Bluetooth® Audio････････････････････････････ 183
Display Setup･･･････････････････････････････ 176
General Information･････････････････････････212
Google built-in･･････････････････････････････ 184
Home Screen････････････････････････････････170
Power Flow･････････････････････････････････ 187
Reactivating･････････････････････････････････ 161
Remote Controls････････････････････････････ 165
Selecting an Audio Source･･･････････････････163
System Status･･･････････････････････････････163
System Updates･････････････････････････････171
Theft Protection･････････････････････････････ 161
USB Flash Drives･･･････････････････････182, 212
USB Ports･･･････････････････････････････････ 164
Wired Connection･･･････････････････････････ 181
Audio/Information Screen･････････････････････ 162
Authorized Manuals･･････････････････････････････ 1
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking･･･････････････････ 65
Index
400
Auto High-Beam･･･････････････････････････････ 123
Indicator････････････････････････････････････ 123
Automatic Brake Hold･････････････････････････ 107
Indicator････････････････････････････････････ 109
Automatic Brake Hold System
Indicator････････････････････････････････････ 108
Automatic Intermittent Wipers････････････････ 128
Automatic Lighting･････････････････････････････120
Automatic Power Off････････････････････････････97
AUTO/EV/CHARGE Mode･･････････････････････ 132
Average Fuel Economy････････････････････････ 299
Average Speed････････････････････････････････ 299
B
Battery････････････････････････････････････ 16, 343
12-Volt Battery Charging System Indicator･･ 288
High Voltage･･････････････････････････････････ 16
Maintenance (Checking the Battery)･････････344
Maintenance (Replacing)････････････････････ 352
Belts (Seat)･････････････････････････････････････ 78
Beverage Holders･･････････････････････････････150
Blind Spot Information System････････････････ 275
On and Off･･････････････････････････････････ 276
Bluetooth® Audio･･････････････････････････････ 183
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®････････････････････197
Booster Seats (For Children)････････････････････ 38
Brake･･････････････････････････････････････････ 104
Brake Assist System･･･････････････････････････ 104
Brake System
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)･･･････････････ 110
Automatic Brake Hold･･･････････････････････ 107
Brake Assist System･････････････････････････104
Fluid････････････････････････････････････････ 329
Foot Brake･･････････････････････････････････ 104
Indicator (Amber)･･･････････････････････････ 288
Indicator (Red)･･････････････････････････････ 287
Parking Brake･･･････････････････････････････ 104
Brightness･････････････････････････････････････ 303
Built-in Key･････････････････････････････････････ 58
Bulb Replacement･････････････････････････････ 351
Back-Up Lights･･････････････････････････････ 351
Brake Lights･････････････････････････････････351
Fog Lights･･･････････････････････････････････ 351
Front Side Marker Lights････････････････････ 351
Front Turn Signal Lights･････････････････････ 351
Headlights･･････････････････････････････････ 351
High-Mount Brake Light･････････････････････ 351
Parking/Daytime Running Lights････････････ 351
Rear License Plate Light
･････････････････････ 351
Rear Side Marker/Taillights･･････････････････ 351
Rear Turn Signal Lights･･････････････････････ 351
Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Lights (on
Door Mirrors)･･････････････････････････････ 351
Taillights････････････････････････････････････ 351
Bulb Specifications････････････････････････････ 387
C
Carbon Monoxide Gas･･･････････････････････････26
Cargo Hooks･･･････････････････････････････････ 151
Carrying Cargo･･････････････････････････････ 24, 92
Center Console Box････････････････････････････145
Certification Label･････････････････････････････ 389
Changing Bulbs････････････････････････････････ 351
Changing the Power Mode･･････････････････････ 97
Child Safety･････････････････････････････････････ 29
Childproof Door Locks････････････････････････ 66
Emergency Trunk Opener･････････････････････91
Child Seat･･･････････････････････････････････････ 29
Booster Seats･････････････････････････････････38
Child Seat for Infants･････････････････････････ 30
Child Seat for Small Children･････････････････ 31
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat
Belt ･････････････････････････････････････････ 35
Larger Children･･･････････････････････････････ 37
Rear-facing Child Seat････････････････････････ 30
Selecting a Child Seat････････････････････････ 32
Using a Tether････････････････････････････････ 36
Childproof Door Locks･･････････････････････････ 66
Cleaning the Exterior･･････････････････････････ 347
Cleaning the Interior･･･････････････････････････346
Client Service Information･････････････････････396
Climate Control System･･･････････････････････ 157
Changing the Mode･･････････････････････････157
Defrosting the Windshield and Windows････ 130
Dust and Pollen Filter･･･････････････････････ 345
Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode････････････････157
Sensors･････････････････････････････････････ 160
Synchronization Mode･･･････････････････････ 159
Using Automatic Climate Control････････････ 158
Clock･･････････････････････････････････････････ 305
Adjusting the Clock･･････････････････････････173
CMBS™ (Collision Mitigation Braking System™)････
･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 238
Coat Hook･････････････････････････････････････ 149
Index
401
Index
Collision Mitigation Braking System™ (CMBS™)････
･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 238
On and Off･･････････････････････････････････ 240
Coolant (Engine)･･･････････････････････････････ 326
Adding to the Engine Coolant Reserve Tank････
････････････････････････････････････････････ 327
Adding to the Radiator･･････････････････････ 328
Overheating･････････････････････････････････ 370
Creeping (Transmission)･･･････････････････････112
Cross Traffic Monitor･･････････････････････････ 278
On and Off･･････････････････････････････････ 279
Cup Holders･･･････････････････････････････････ 150
Current Mode for Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
with Low Speed Follow, the Lane Keeping Assist
System (LKAS), and Traffic Jam Assist
･･･････
295
Customize Display
･････････････････････････････
305
Customized Features
･･････････････････････････
202
D
Daytime Running Lights･･･････････････････････ 123
Deceleration Paddle Selector･･････････････････134
Defaulting All the Settings･････････････････････ 211
Defrosting the Windshield and Windows･･････ 130
Devices that Emit Radio Waves････････････････ 390
Dipstick (Engine Oil)･･･････････････････････････ 323
Directional Signals (Turn Signal)･･･････････････120
Display Setup･･････････････････････････････････176
Door Mirrors････････････････････････････････････ 85
Doors
Auto Door Locking････････････････････････････ 65
Auto Door Unlocking･･････････････････････････66
Door and Trunk Open Message･･･････････････ 24
Keys･･････････････････････････････････････････ 54
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from Inside･････ 64
DOT Tire Quality Grading･･････････････････････ 337
Drive Mode System････････････････････････････ 132
Driver Attention Monitor･･･････････････････････ 300
Driver Information Interface･････････････ 297, 305
Switching the Display･･･････････････････････ 297
Driving
Braking･･････････････････････････････････････104
Turn on Power System････････････････････････98
Driving Position Memory System････････････････75
DRIVE MODE Switch･･･････････････････････････132
Dust and Pollen Filter･･････････････････････････345
E
Elapsed Time･･････････････････････････････････ 299
Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator････････････････････････････････････ 290
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)･･････････････ 136
Emergency･････････････････････････････････････380
Emergency Trunk Opener･･･････････････････････ 91
Emissions Testing (Readiness Codes)･････････ 393
Engine･････････････････････････････････････････ 389
Coolant･･････････････････････････････････････326
Oil･･･････････････････････････････････････････322
Remote Engine Start･･････････････････････････99
Engine Coolant････････････････････････････････ 326
Adding to the Engine Coolant Reserve Tank････
････････････････････････････････････････････
327
Adding to the Radiator
･･････････････････････
328
Overheating
･････････････････････････････････
370
Engine oil pressure low Warning
･･･････････････
372
Engine Oil
･･････････････････････････････････････
322
Adding
･･････････････････････････････････････
324
Checking
････････････････････････････････････
323
Engine oil pressure low Warning
････････････
372
Recommended Engine Oil
･･･････････････････
322
EV Indicator
･････････････････････････････････････
18
Exhaust Gas Hazard (Carbon Monoxide)
････････
26
Exterior Mirrors･････････････････････････････････ 85
F
Filters
Dust and Pollen･････････････････････････････ 345
Oil･･･････････････････････････････････････････324
Flat Tire･･･････････････････････････････････････ 354
Fluids
Brake････････････････････････････････････････329
Engine Coolant･･････････････････････････････ 326
Transmission Fluid･･････････････････････････ 329
Windshield Washer･･････････････････････････330
FM/AM Radio･･････････････････････････････････ 178
Folding Down the Rear Seats･･･････････････････ 74
Foot Brake･････････････････････････････････････ 104
Front Airbags (SRS)･････････････････････････････ 42
Front Seat Heaters････････････････････････････ 152
Front Seats
Adjusting･････････････････････････････････････ 71
Front Sensor Camera･･････････････････････････ 233
Fuel････････････････････････････････････････････116
Average Fuel Economy･･････････････････････ 299
Economy････････････････････････････････････ 118
Gauge･･･････････････････････････････････････ 294
Instant Fuel Economy･･･････････････････････ 299
Index
402
Low Fuel Indicator･･････････････････････････ 289
Range･･･････････････････････････････････････ 298
Recommendation･･･････････････････････････ 116
Refueling････････････････････････････････････ 116
Fuel Economy and CO
2
Emissions･････････････ 118
Fuel Fill Door･･････････････････････････････････ 117
Unable to Unlock････････････････････････････ 381
Fuses･･････････････････････････････････････････ 374
Inspecting and Changing････････････････････ 378
Locations･･････････････････････････････ 374, 376
G
Gasoline (Fuel)
････････････････････････････････
116
Average Fuel Economy
･･････････････････････
299
Economy
････････････････････････････････････
118
Gauge
･･･････････････････････････････････････
294
Information
･････････････････････････････････
116
Instant Fuel Economy
･･･････････････････････
299
Low Fuel Indicator
･･････････････････････････
289
Recommendation
･･･････････････････････････
116
Refueling
････････････････････････････････････
116
Gauge Display Settings
････････････････････････
304
Gauges
････････････････････････････････････････
293
Glove Box･･････････････････････････････････････145
Google built-in･････････････････････････････････184
H
HandsFreeLink® (HFL)･････････････････････････ 197
Automatic Transferring･･････････････････････ 201
Emergency Call (eCall)･･････････････････････ 384
Favorite Contacts････････････････････････････198
HFL Menus･･････････････････････････････････ 201
HFL Status Display･･････････････････････････ 198
Making a Call････････････････････････････････199
Options During a Call････････････････････････201
Phone Setup･･･････････････････････････ 166, 201
Receiving a Call･････････････････････････････ 200
Ringtone････････････････････････････････････ 201
Hazard Warning Button･････････････････････････ 13
HD Radio™･･･････････････････････････････ 178, 227
Head Restraints･････････････････････････････70, 71
Headlights･････････････････････････････････････ 120
Aiming･･････････････････････････････････････ 351
Auto High-Beam････････････････････････････ 123
Operating･･･････････････････････････････････ 120
Heated Steering Wheel････････････････････････ 154
Heater (Steering Wheel)･･･････････････････････ 154
Heaters (Seat)････････････････････････････152, 153
HFL (HandsFreeLink®)
･････････････････････････ 197
High Beam Indicator･･････････････････････････ 122
Hill Start Assist System････････････････････････112
Honda App License Agreement････････････････ 213
Honda Sensing®･･･････････････････････････････ 231
HondaLink®････････････････････････････････････ 190
Hybrid Vehicle
SPORT HYBRID i-MMD (intelligent Multi-Mode
Drive) ･･･････････････････････････････････････ 16
I
iPhone･･･････････････････････････････････ 181, 212
iPod･･････････････････････････････････････ 181, 212
Identification Numbers
Engine and Transmission････････････････････389
Vehicle Identification････････････････････････389
Immobilizer System･････････････････････････････55
Indicator･･････････････････････････････････････55
Indicators･････････････････････････････････････ 285
12-Volt Battery Charging System････････････ 288
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (Amber)････････････････････････････ 291
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (White/Green)･･････････････････････ 253
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow Interval･････････････････････････････256
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)･･･････････････ 289
Auto High-Beam････････････････････････････ 123
Automatic Brake Hold･･･････････････････････ 109
Automatic Brake Hold System･･･････････････108
Electric Power Steering (EPS) System･･･････ 290
Engine oil pressure low Warning････････････ 372
EV････････････････････････････････････････････ 18
High Beam Indicator････････････････････････ 122
Immobilizer System･･････････････････････････ 55
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) (Amber)････
････････････････････････････････････････････ 291
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) (White/
Green) ･････････････････････････････････････ 264
Lights On････････････････････････････････････ 120
Low Fuel････････････････････････････････････ 289
Low Tire Pressure/TPMS･･･････････････ 138, 290
Malfunction Indicator Lamp･････････････････ 289
Parking Brake and Brake System (Amber)･･･ 288
Parking Brake and Brake System (Red)･･････287
READY indicator･･････････････････････････････ 98
Safety Support (Amber)･････････････････････ 291
Safety Support (Green/Gray)････････････････ 303
Index
403
Index
Seat Belt Reminder･････････････････････ 79, 288
Security System Alarm････････････････････････56
Shift Position････････････････････････････････ 102
Supplemental Restraint System･････････ 50, 288
System Message････････････････････････････ 305
Transmission System････････････････････････291
Turn Signal Indicators･･･････････････････････ 120
Vehicle Stability Assist™ (VSA®) OFF･･･ 137, 290
Vehicle Stability Assist™ (VSA®) System････
･･･････････････････････････････････････ 136, 290
Instant Fuel Economy･････････････････････････ 299
Interior Lights･････････････････････････････････ 143
Interior Rearview Mirror
････････････････････････
85
J
Jump Starting･････････････････････････････････ 367
K
Key Number Tag
････････････････････････････････
58
Keyless Access System
･････････････････････････
59
Keys
･････････････････････････････････････････････
54
Key Number Tag
･･････････････････････････････
58
Rear Door Won’t Open
････････････････････････
66
Remote Transmitter･･････････････････････････ 59
Valet Key･････････････････････････････････････ 91
Knee Airbags････････････････････････････････････45
L
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)･･･････････ 263
Indicator (Amber)･･･････････････････････････ 291
Indicator (White/Green)･････････････････････ 264
LATCH (Child Seats)･････････････････････････････32
Legal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto
･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 227
License Information･･･････････････････････････ 225
Lights････････････････････････････････････ 120, 351
Automatic･･･････････････････････････････････ 120
Bulb Replacement･･････････････････････････ 351
Daytime Running Lights･････････････････････ 123
High Beam Indicator････････････････････････ 122
Interior･･････････････････････････････････････ 143
Lights On Indicator･･････････････････････････ 120
Turn Signals･････････････････････････････････ 120
Load Limits･･････････････････････････････････････92
Locking/Unlocking･･････････････････････････････ 59
Auto Door Locking････････････････････････････ 65
Auto Door Unlocking･･････････････････････････66
Childproof Door Locks････････････････････････ 66
From Inside
･･････････････････････････････････ 64
From Outside･････････････････････････････････ 63
Using a Key･･･････････････････････････････････ 63
Using the Keyless Access System･････････････59
Using the Remote Transmitter････････････････ 59
Low Fuel Indicator･････････････････････････････289
Low Keyless Remote Signal Strength･･･････････ 54
Low Speed Braking Control････････････････････ 244
On and Off･･････････････････････････････････ 246
Lower Anchors･･････････････････････････････････ 32
Luggage (Maximum Load Limit)･････････････････ 92
M
Maintenance･･･････････････････････････････････312
12-volt Battery･･････････････････････････････ 343
Brake Fluid･･････････････････････････････････329
Cleaning･････････････････････････････････････346
Climate Control System･････････････････････ 345
Coolant･･････････････････････････････････････326
Maintenance Minder™･･･････････････････････ 315
Oil･･･････････････････････････････････････････323
Radiator･････････････････････････････････････ 328
Remote Transmitter･････････････････････････ 352
Replacing Light Bulbs･･･････････････････････ 351
Safety･･･････････････････････････････････････ 313
Service Items･･･････････････････････････････ 317
Tires････････････････････････････････････････ 333
Transmission Fluid･･････････････････････････ 329
Under the Hood･････････････････････････････ 320
Malfunction Indicator Lamp･･･････････････････ 289
Map Lights･････････････････････････････････････ 143
Maximum Load Limit････････････････････････････ 92
Meters, Gauges････････････････････････････････ 293
Mirrors･･････････････････････････････････････････ 85
Adjusting･････････････････････････････････････ 85
Door･･････････････････････････････････････････ 85
Interior Rearview･････････････････････････････ 85
Modifications (and Accessories)････････････････ 26
Moonroof･･････････････････････････････････････ 155
Motion Management System･･････････････････ 137
N
Numbers (Identification)･･････････････････････ 389
O
Odometer･･････････････････････････････････････296
Oil (Engine)････････････････････････････････････ 322
Adding･･････････････････････････････････････ 324
Index
404
Checking････････････････････････････････････ 323
Engine oil pressure low Warning････････････ 372
Recommended Engine Oil･･･････････････････322
Viscosity････････････････････････････････････ 322
Open Source Licenses････････････････････225, 398
Opening/Closing
Hood････････････････････････････････････････ 321
Moonroof････････････････････････････････････155
Power Windows･･････････････････････････････ 87
Trunk･････････････････････････････････････････ 90
Outside Temperature･･････････････････････････ 295
Overheating･･･････････････････････････････････ 370
P
Panic mode･････････････････････････････････････ 57
Parking･･･････････････････････････････････ 104, 113
Parking Brake･･････････････････････････････････104
Parking Brake and Brake System (Amber)･････ 288
Parking Brake and Brake System (Red)････････ 287
Parking Sensor System････････････････････････ 281
On and Off･･････････････････････････････････ 281
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator･････････････････ 50
Power Flow････････････････････････････････････ 187
Power Mode Reminder･･････････････････････････ 97
Power System
Turn off･･･････････････････････････････････････ 99
Turn on･･･････････････････････････････････････ 98
Power System Won’t Start･･･････････････ 364, 367
Power Windows･････････････････････････････････87
POWER Button･･････････････････････････････････ 97
Precautions While Driving
Rain･･････････････････････････････････････････ 25
Pregnant Women････････････････････････････････82
Puncture (Tire)････････････････････････････････ 354
R
Radar Sensor･･････････････････････････････････ 235
Radiator･･･････････････････････････････････････ 328
Radio (AM/FM)･････････････････････････････････178
Radio Data System (RDS)･･････････････････････179
Range･･････････････････････････････････････････298
RDS (Radio Data System)･･････････････････････179
Readiness Codes (Emissions Testing)･････････ 393
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button･････130
Rear Seat Heaters･････････････････････････････ 153
Rear Seat Reminder･････････････････････････････77
Rear Seats (Folding Down)･･････････････････････ 74
Rear View Camera･････････････････････････････ 114
Rearview Mirror
･････････････････････････････････ 85
Refueling･･････････････････････････････････････ 116
Fuel Gauge･･････････････････････････････････ 294
Gasoline･･･････････････････････････････ 116, 387
Low Fuel Indicator･･････････････････････････ 289
Regulations･････････････････････････ 139, 337, 390
Remote Engine Start････････････････････････････ 99
Remote Transmitter･････････････････････････････59
Replacement
12-volt Battery･･････････････････････････････ 343
Bulbs････････････････････････････････････････351
Fuses････････････････････････････････････････374
Tires
････････････････････････････････････････
333
Wiper Blade Rubber
･････････････････････････
331
Reporting Safety Defects
･･････････････････････
391
Resetting a Trip Meter
･････････････････････････
299
READY indicator
･････････････････････････････････
98
Road Departure Mitigation System
････････････
248
On and Off
･･････････････････････････････････
249
S
Safe Driving･････････････････････････････････････ 21
Safety Check････････････････････････････････････ 23
Safety Labels････････････････････････････････････53
Safety Message･･･････････････････････････････････2
Safety Support･････････････････････････････････302
Indicator (Amber)･･･････････････････････････ 291
Indicator (Green/Gray)･･････････････････････ 303
Seat Belts･････････････････････････････････ 78, 302
Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor･･･････････････ 83
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners･･･････････････80
Checking･････････････････････････････････････ 83
Fastening･････････････････････････････････････ 81
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat
Belt ･････････････････････････････････････････ 35
Pregnant Women･････････････････････････････ 82
Reminder･････････････････････････････････････ 79
Warning Indicator･･･････････････････････ 79, 288
Seat Heaters･････････････････････････････ 152, 153
Seats････････････････････････････････････････････ 69
Adjusting･････････････････････････････････････ 69
Front Seat Heaters･･････････････････････････ 152
Front Seats･･･････････････････････････････････ 71
Rear Seat Heaters･･･････････････････････････153
Rear Seats････････････････････････････････････73
Ventilation･･･････････････････････････････････152
Security System･････････････････････････････････56
Immobilizer System Indicator････････････････ 55
Index
405
Index
Security System Alarm Indicator･･････････････56
Selecting a Child Seat･･･････････････････････････ 32
Settings････････････････････････････････････････202
Shift Lever･････････････････････････････････････ 102
Releasing･･･････････････････････････････････ 369
Won’t Move･････････････････････････････････ 369
Shift Position Indicator････････････････････････ 102
Shifting (Transmission)････････････････････････ 102
Shoulder Anchor････････････････････････････････ 83
Side Airbags････････････････････････････････････ 47
Side Curtain Airbags････････････････････････････ 48
Snow Tires･････････････････････････････････････340
Sonar Sensors
･････････････････････････････････
236
Spark Plugs
････････････････････････････････････
387
Specifications
･･････････････････････････････････
387
Specified Fuel
････････････････････････････
116, 387
Speed/Distance Units
･･････････････････････････
304
Speedometer
･･････････････････････････････････
293
SRS Airbags (Airbags)
･･･････････････････････････
42
Steering Wheel
･･････････････････････････････････
68
Adjusting
･････････････････････････････････････
68
Heater
･･･････････････････････････････････････
154
Sunglasses Holder
･････････････････････････････
149
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)･･････････ 42
Switches (Around the Steering Wheel)･･････ 13, 14
System Message Indicator････････････････････ 305
System Updates･･･････････････････････････････ 171
T
Temperature
Outside Temperature････････････････････････295
Temperature Sensor･･･････････････････････････ 295
Temporary Tire Repair Kit･････････････････････ 355
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)･･････ 138
Indicator････････････････････････････････････ 290
Tire Repair Kit･････････････････････････････････ 354
Tires･･･････････････････････････････････････････ 333
Air Pressure･････････････････････････････････ 388
Checking and Maintaining･･･････････････････ 333
Flat Tire (Puncture)･････････････････････････ 354
Inspection･･･････････････････････････････････334
Labeling･････････････････････････････････････ 334
Puncture (Flat Tire)･････････････････････････ 354
Regulations･････････････････････････････････ 337
Rotation･････････････････････････････････････ 341
Temporary Tire Repair Kit･･･････････････････ 355
Tire Chains･･････････････････････････････････ 340
Wear Indicators･････････････････････････････ 339
Winter
･･･････････････････････････････････････340
Tools･･･････････････････････････････････････････350
Towing a Trailer･････････････････････････････････ 95
Towing Behind a Motorhome････････････････････95
Towing Your Vehicle･････････････････････････････95
Behind a Motorhome･････････････････････････ 95
Emergency･･････････････････････････････････ 380
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)･･････ 138
Indicator････････････････････････････････････ 290
Traffic Jam Assist･･････････････････････････････267
Traffic Sign Recognition System･･････････271, 295
Transmission･･････････････････････････････････ 102
Creeping
････････････････････････････････････
112
Fluid
････････････････････････････････････････
329
Indicator
････････････････････････････････････
291
Number
･････････････････････････････････････
389
Shift Lever Does Not Move
･･････････････････
369
Shift Position Indicator
･･････････････････････
102
Trip Computer
･････････････････････････････････
173
Trip Meter
･････････････････････････････････････
299
Troubleshooting
･･････････････････････････
363, 367
Blown Fuse
･･････････････････････････････････
374
Emergency Towing
･･････････････････････････
380
Flat Tire/Puncture･･･････････････････････････ 354
Overheating･････････････････････････････････ 370
Power System Won’t Start･････････････ 364, 367
Premium Gasoline･･････････････････････････ 116
Puncture/Flat Tire･･･････････････････････････ 354
Rear Door Won’t Open････････････････････････66
Shift Lever Won’t Move･･････････････････････ 369
Warning Indicators･･････････････････････････ 285
Trunk････････････････････････････････････････････90
Lid････････････････････････････････････････････ 90
Main Switch･･････････････････････････････････ 91
Turn off･････････････････････････････････････････ 99
Turn on Power System･･････････････････････････ 98
Turn Signals･･･････････････････････････････････ 120
Indicators (Instrument Panel)･･･････････････120
Turning on the Power
Does Not Activate･･･････････････････････････ 364
Does Not Start･･････････････････････････････ 367
U
Under-Floor Storage Area･････････････････････ 151
Unlocking the Doors････････････････････････････ 59
USB Flash Drives･････････････････････････ 182, 212
USB Ports･･････････････････････････････････････164
Index
406
V
Vanity Mirrors･･･････････････････････････････････ 11
Vehicle Identification Number･････････････････ 389
Vehicle Stability Assist™ (VSA®)････････････････136
Off Indicator････････････････････････････････ 290
On and Off･･････････････････････････････････ 137
System Indicator････････････････････････････ 290
Viscosity (Oil)････････････････････････････ 322, 387
VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist™)････････････････136
W
Walk Away Auto Lock®･･････････････････････････ 61
Warning････････････････････････････････････････305
Warning Indicator On/Blinking････････････････ 286
Warning Labels･･････････････････････････････････53
Warranties (Warranty Manual provided separately)
･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 394
Wear Indicators (Tire)･････････････････････････ 339
Wi‑Fi Connection･･････････････････････････････ 191
Window Washers
Adding/Refilling Fluid･･･････････････････････ 330
Switch･･･････････････････････････････････････126
Windows(Opening and Closing)･････････････････ 87
Windshield
Cleaning･･･････････････････････････････ 346, 348
Defrosting/Defogging････････････････････････130
Washer Fluid････････････････････････････････ 330
Wiper Blades････････････････････････････････ 331
Wipers and Washers････････････････････････ 126
Winter Tires
Snow Tires･･････････････････････････････････ 340
Tire Chains･･････････････････････････････････ 340
Wipers and Washers･･･････････････････････････126
Checking and Replacing Wiper Blades･･････ 331
Wired Connection･･････････････････････････････181
Wireless Charger･･････････････････････････････ 146
Worn Tires･････････････････････････････････････ 333
Index
407
Index
© 2025 HONDA MOTOR CO., LTD. — ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
PRINTED IN THE U.S.A.
MYGARAGE.HONDA.COM (U.S.A.)
HONDA.CA (CANADA)
3130B630
OM-27029
00X31-30B-6300
2026 HONDA ACCORD HYBRID OWNER’S MANUAL
